Lexploria

11.6.2021

EN

Official Journal of the European Union

L 206/1

REGULATION (EU) 2021/821 OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL

of 20 May 2021

setting up a Union regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items (recast)

THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,

Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union, and in particular Article 207(2) thereof,

Having regard to the proposal from the European Commission,

After transmission of the draft legislative act to the national parliaments,

Acting in accordance with the ordinary legislative procedure ( 1 ) ,

Whereas:

(1)

Council Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 ( 2 ) has been substantially amended several times. Since further amendments are to be made, that Regulation should be recast in the interests of clarity, effectiveness and efficiency.

(2)

This Regulation aims to ensure that in the area of dual-use items, the Union and its Member States fully take into account all relevant considerations. Relevant considerations include international obligations and commitments, obligations under relevant sanctions, considerations of national foreign and security policy including those contained in the Council Common Position 2008/944/CFSP ( 3 ) , among them human rights, and considerations about intended end-use and the risk of diversion. Through this Regulation, the Union demonstrates its commitment to maintaining robust legal requirements with regard to dual-use items, as well as to strengthening the exchange of relevant information and greater transparency. With regard to cyber-surveillance items, the competent authorities of the Member States should consider in particular the risk of them being used in connection with internal repression or the commission of serious violations of human rights and international humanitarian law.

(3)

This Regulation also aims to strengthen the guidance to be given to exporters, in particular to small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), regarding responsible practices, yet without impairing the global competitiveness of exporters of dual-use items or other associated industry or academia which are resident or established in a Member State.

(4)

United Nations Security Council Resolution 1540 (2004), adopted on 28 April 2004, decided that all States are to take and enforce effective measures to establish domestic controls to prevent the proliferation of nuclear, chemical or biological weapons and their means of delivery, including by establishing appropriate controls over related materials, equipment and technology. Controls are also required under relevant international agreements, such as the Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production, Stockpiling and use of Chemical Weapons and on their Destruction (the ‘Chemical Weapons Convention’ or ‘CWC’) and the Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production and Stockpiling of Bacteriological (Biological) and Toxin Weapons and On Their Destruction (the ‘Biological and Toxin Weapons Convention’ or ‘BWC’), and in line with commitments agreed upon in multilateral export control regimes.

(5)

An effective common system of export controls on dual-use items is therefore necessary to ensure that the international commitments and responsibilities of the Member States and of the Union, in particular regarding non-proliferation, regional peace, security and stability and respect for human rights and international humanitarian law, are complied with.

(6)

The EU Strategy against proliferation of Weapons of Mass Destruction of 12 December 2003 (‘EU WMD Strategy’) emphasises the Union’s commitment to strong national and internationally coordinated export controls.

(7)

The contribution of exporters, brokers, providers of technical assistance or other relevant stakeholders to the overall aim of trade controls is crucial. In order for them to be able to act in conformity with this Regulation, the assessment of risks related to transactions concerned by this Regulation is to be carried out through transaction-screening measures, also known as the due diligence principle, as a part of an Internal Compliance Programme (ICP). In that regard, in particular the size and organisational structure of exporters have to be taken into account when developing and implementing ICPs.

(8)

In order to address the risk that certain non-listed cyber-surveillance items exported from the customs territory of the Union might be misused by persons complicit in or responsible for directing or committing serious violations of human rights or international humanitarian law, it is appropriate to place the export of such items under control. Associated risks relate, in particular, to cases where cyber-surveillance items are specially designed to enable intrusion or deep packet inspection into information and telecommunications systems in order to conduct covert surveillance of natural persons by monitoring, extracting, collecting or analysing data, including biometrics data, from those systems. Items used for purely commercial applications such as billing, marketing, quality services, user satisfaction or network security are generally considered not to entail such risks.

(9)

With a view to strengthening the effective control of exports of non-listed cyber-surveillance items, it is essential to further harmonise the application of catch-all controls in that area. To that end, Member States are committed to supporting such controls by sharing information amongst themselves and with the Commission, in particular regarding technological developments of cyber-surveillance items, and by exercising vigilance in the application of such controls to promote an exchange at Union level.

(10)

In order to enable the Union to react rapidly to the serious misuse of existing technologies or to new risks associated with emerging technologies, a mechanism should be introduced to enable Member States to coordinate their responses when a new risk is identified. Such coordination should be followed by initiatives to introduce equivalent controls at the multilateral level in order to broaden the response to the identified risk.

(11)

Transmission of dual-use software and technology by means of electronic media, fax or telephone to destinations outside the customs territory of the Union should also be controlled. In order to limit the administrative burden for exporters and the competent authorities of the Member States, general or global licenses or harmonised interpretations of provisions should be provided for certain transmissions, such as transmissions to a cloud.

(12)

Considering the important role of customs authorities in the enforcement of export controls, the terms used in this Regulation should, to the extent possible, be consistent with the definitions set out in Regulation (EU) No 952/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 4 ) (the ‘Union Customs Code’).

(13)

Various categories of persons can be involved in the export of dual-use items, including natural persons such as service providers, researchers, consultants and persons transmitting dual-use items electronically. It is essential that all such persons are aware of the risks associated with the export and the provision of technical assistance regarding sensitive items. In particular, academic and research institutions face distinct challenges in export control due to, inter alia, their general commitment to the free exchange of ideas, the fact that their research work often involves cutting edge technologies, their organisational structures and the international nature of their scientific exchanges. Member States and the Commission should, where necessary, raise awareness among the academic and research community and provide them with tailored guidance to address those distinct challenges. In alignment with multilateral export control regimes, the implementation of controls should provide, to the extent possible, for a common approach with respect to certain provisions, in particular regarding the academia related de-control notes ‘basic scientific research’ and ‘public domain’.

(14)

The definition of the term ‘broker’ should be revised to include legal persons and partnerships not resident or established in a Member State and that provide brokering services from the customs territory of the Union.

(15)

The Lisbon Treaty clarifies that the provision of technical assistance involving a cross-border movement falls under Union competence. It is therefore appropriate to introduce a definition of technical assistance and to specify the controls applicable to its provision. In addition, for reasons of effectiveness and consistency, controls on the provision of technical assistance should be harmonised.

(16)

As in Regulation (EC) No 428/2009, it should be possible for Member States’ authorities to prohibit the transit of non-Union dual-use items under certain circumstances where, through intelligence or other sources, they have reasonable grounds for suspecting that the items are or might be intended, in their entirety or in part, for a military end-use in a country that is subject to an arms embargo, or for the proliferation of weapons of mass destruction or their means of delivery.

(17)

Licensing conditions and requirements should be harmonised, where appropriate, in order to avoid distortions of competition and to ensure the consistent and effective application of controls throughout the customs territory of the Union. To that effect, it is also necessary that the competent authorities of the Member States are clearly identified in all control situations. The responsibility for deciding on individual, global or national general export authorisations, on authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance, on transits of non-Union dual-use items and on authorisations for the transfer within the customs territory of the Union of dual-use items listed in Annex IV, lies with national authorities.

(18)

Guidelines for Internal Compliance Programmes should be introduced in order to contribute to achieving the level-playing field between exporters and to enhance the effective application of controls. Such guidelines should take into account the differences in sizes, resources, fields of activity and other features and conditions of exporters and their subsidiaries, such as intra-group compliance structures and standards, thereby avoiding a ‘one model for all’ approach and helping each exporter to find its own solutions for compliance and competitiveness. Exporters using global export authorisations should implement an ICP unless the competent authority considers it unnecessary due to other circumstances it has taken into account when processing the application for a global export authorisation submitted by the exporter.

(19)

Additional Union general export authorisations should be introduced in order to reduce the administrative burden on companies, in particular SMEs, and authorities, while ensuring an appropriate level of control of the relevant items to the relevant destinations. Where necessary, Member States can provide guidance to exporters regarding the application of general authorisations. Member States can also introduce national general export authorisations for low-risk exports where they consider it necessary. An authorisation for large projects should also be introduced to adapt licensing conditions to the particular needs of industry.

(20)

The Commission, in close consultation with Member States and stakeholders, should develop guidelines and/or recommendations for best practices to support practical application of controls. When preparing the guidelines and/or recommendations, the Commission should have due regard to the information needs of SMEs.

(21)

Common lists of dual-use items, destinations and guidelines are essential elements for an effective export control regime.

(22)

Member States that establish national control lists pursuant to this Regulation should inform the Commission and the other Member States of such lists. Member States should also inform the Commission and the other Member States of all decisions to refuse an authorisation for an export for which an authorisation is required on the basis of a national control list.

(23)

In order to allow for a swift Union response to changing circumstances as regards the assessment of the sensitivity of exports under Union general export authorisations as well as technological and commercial developments, the power to adopt acts in accordance with Article 290 of the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union (TFEU) should be delegated to the Commission in respect of amending Annexes I, II and IV to this Regulation. Decisions to update the common list of dual-use items subject to export controls set out in Annex I should be in conformity with the obligations and commitments that Member States or the Union have accepted as members of the relevant international non-proliferation agreements and as members of multilateral export control regimes or by ratification of relevant international treaties. Where the amendment of Annex I concerns dual-use items which are also listed in Annex II or IV, those Annexes should be amended accordingly. Decisions to update the common lists of items and destinations set out in Sections A to H of Annex II should be made having regard to the assessment criteria set out in this Regulation. It is of particular importance that the Commission carry out appropriate consultations during its preparatory work, including at expert level, and that those consultations be conducted in accordance with the principles laid down in the Interinstitutional Agreement of 13 April 2016 on Better Law-Making ( 5 ) . In particular, to ensure equal participation in the preparation of delegated acts, the European Parliament and the Council receive all documents at the same time as Member States’ experts, and their experts systematically have access to meetings of Commission expert groups dealing with the preparation of delegated acts.

(24)

The Commission should publish the updates to Annex I through delegated acts in all the official languages of the Union.

(25)

The Commission should publish and keep updated a compilation of national control lists in force in the Member States in all the official languages of the Union.

(26)

National provisions and decisions affecting exports of dual-use items should be taken in the framework of the common commercial policy, and in particular Regulation (EU) 2015/479 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 6 ) . Appropriate exchange of information and consultations on national provisions and decisions should ensure the effective and consistent application of controls throughout the customs territory of the Union.

(27)

The existence of a common control system is a prerequisite for establishing the free movement of dual-use items inside the customs territory of the Union.

(28)

Pursuant to and within the limits of Article 36 TFEU and in accordance with international obligations undertaken, Member States retain the right to carry out controls on transfers of certain dual-use items within the customs territory of the Union in order to safeguard public policy or public security. The list of items subject to intra-Union transfer controls set out in Annex IV should be periodically reviewed taking into account the further evolution of the underlying international obligations, as well as technological and commercial developments as regards the assessment of the sensitivity of transfers. Decisions to update the common list of dual-use items subject to export controls set out in Annex IV should be made having regard to Article 36 TFEU, namely the public policy and public security interests of the Member States.

(29)

On 22 September 1998, the Member States and the Commission signed Protocols additional to the respective safeguards agreements between the Member States, the European Atomic Energy Community and the International Atomic Energy Agency, which, among other measures, oblige the Member States to provide information on transfers of specified equipment and non-nuclear material. Intra-Union transfer controls should allow the Union and its Member States to fulfil their obligations under those agreements.

(30)

In order to achieve uniform and consistent application of controls throughout the Union, it is appropriate to broaden the scope of consultation and information exchange between the Member States and the Commission, and to introduce tools to support the development of a common export control network throughout the Union, such as electronic licensing procedures, technical expert groups and the setting up of an enforcement coordination mechanism. It is of particular importance to ensure that exporters, brokers, providers of technical assistance and other relevant stakeholders concerned by this Regulation, including industry and civil society organisations, are consulted, where appropriate, by the Dual-Use Coordination Group and the technical expert groups.

(31)

While customs authorities share certain information with other customs authorities using a risk management system in accordance with Union customs rules, it is also appropriate to ensure close cooperation between licensing and customs authorities.

(32)

It is appropriate to clarify that, to the extent that it concerns personal data, the processing and exchange of information should comply with the applicable rules on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data laid down in Regulations (EU) 2016/679 ( 7 ) and (EU) 2018/1725 ( 8 ) of the European Parliament and of the Council.

(33)

Member States and the Commission should take all necessary measures to ensure the protection of confidential information in compliance with, in particular, Commission Decisions (EU, Euratom) 2015/443 ( 9 ) and (EU, Euratom) 2015/444 ( 10 ) and the Agreement between the Member States of the European Union, meeting within the Council, regarding the protection of classified information exchanged in the interests of the European Union ( 11 ) . This includes, in particular, the obligation not to downgrade or declassify classified information without the prior written consent of the originator. Any non-classified sensitive information or information which is provided on a confidential basis should be handled as such by the authorities.

(34)

Outreach to the private sector, in particular to SMEs, and transparency are essential elements for an effective export control regime. It is therefore appropriate to provide for the continued development of guidelines, where necessary, to support the application of this Regulation and for the publication of a Union annual report on the implementation of controls.

(35)

The Union annual report on the implementation of controls should include relevant information on the licensing and enforcement of controls under this Regulation, with due respect to the need to ensure the protection of the confidentiality of certain data, in particular where the publication of licensing data could affect national security concerns raised by Member States or jeopardise commercial confidentiality and allow non-Union suppliers to undercut restrictive licensing decisions by Member States.

(36)

In order to ensure that this Regulation is properly applied, each Member State should take measures to give the competent authorities appropriate powers.

(37)

In accordance with the EU WMD Strategy, each Member State should determine effective, proportionate and dissuasive penalties applicable in the event of infringements of the provisions of this Regulation. It is also appropriate to introduce provisions to support the effective enforcement of controls, among other things through an enforcement coordination mechanism.

(38)

The Union Customs Code lays down, among other things, provisions relating to the export and re-export of goods. Nothing in this Regulation constrains any powers under and pursuant to the Union Customs Code and its implementing provisions.

(39)

Export controls contribute to international security and have an impact on trade with third countries. It is therefore appropriate to develop dialogue and cooperation with third countries in order to support a global level-playing field and enhance international security. In particular, Member States and the Commission should enhance their contribution to the activities of multilateral export control regimes. Member States and the Commission should also support those regimes in developing robust export controls as a global basis and model for international best practice, and an important tool for ensuring international peace and stability. Contributions should be made when a new risk has been identified by all Member States in the field of cyber-surveillance items in order to ensure a multilateral level playing field.

(40)

This Regulation applies without prejudice to the Commission Delegated Decision of 15 September 2015 supplementing Decision No 1104/2011/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 12 ) , which establishes specific rules for the control of the export of items for the Public Regulated Service under the Galileo Programme.

(41)

This Regulation respects the fundamental rights and observes the principles recognised in particular by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union,

HAVE ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:

CHAPTER I

SUBJECT AND DEFINITIONS

Article 1

This Regulation establishes a Union regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items.

Article 2

For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions apply:

(1)

‘dual-use items’ means items, including software and technology, which can be used for both civil and military purposes, and includes items which can be used for the design, development, production or use of nuclear, chemical or biological weapons or their means of delivery, including all items which can be used for both non-explosive uses and assisting in any way in the manufacture of nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices;

(2)

‘export’ means:

(a)

an export procedure within the meaning of Article 269 of the Union Customs Code;

(b)

a re-export within the meaning of Article 270 of the Union Customs Code; a re-export also occurs if, during a transit through the customs territory of the Union according to point (11) of this Article, an exit summary declaration has to be lodged because the final destination of the items has been changed;

(c)

an outward processing procedure within the meaning of Article 259 of the Union Customs Code; or

(d)

transmission of software or technology by electronic media, including by fax, telephone, electronic mail or any other electronic means to a destination outside the customs territory of the Union; it includes making available in an electronic form such software and technology to natural or legal persons or to partnerships outside the customs territory of the Union; it also includes the oral transmission of technology when the technology is described over a voice transmission medium;

(3)

‘exporter’ means:

(a)

any natural or legal person or any partnership that, at the time when the export declaration or the re-export declaration or an exit summary declaration is accepted, holds the contract with the consignee in the third country and has the power to determine the sending of the items out of the customs territory of the Union; where no export contract has been concluded or if the holder of the contract does not act on its own behalf, exporter means the person who has the power to determine the sending of the items out of the customs territory of the Union; or

(b)

any natural or legal person or any partnership that decides to transmit software or technology by electronic media, including by fax, telephone, electronic mail or by any other electronic means to a destination outside the customs territory of the Union or to make available in an electronic form such software and technology to natural or legal persons or to partnerships outside the customs territory of the Union.

Where the benefit of a right to dispose of the dual-use item belongs to a person resident or established outside the customs territory of the Union pursuant to the contract on which the export is based, the exporter shall be considered to be the contracting party resident or established in the customs territory of the Union;

(c)

where point (a) or (b) is not applicable, any natural person carrying the dual-use items to be exported where these dual-use items are contained in the person’s personal baggage within the meaning of point (a) of Article 1(19) of Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/2446 ( 13 ) ;

(4)

‘export declaration’ means an act whereby any natural or legal person or any partnership indicates, in the prescribed form and manner, the wish to place dual-use items specified in point (1) under an export procedure;

(5)

‘re-export declaration’ means an act within the meaning of Article 5(13) of the Union Customs Code;

(6)

‘exit summary declaration’ means an act within the meaning of Article 5(10) of the Union Customs Code;

(7)

‘brokering services’ means:

(a)

the negotiation or arrangement of transactions for the purchase, sale or supply of dual-use items from a third country to any other third country; or

(b)

the selling or buying of dual-use items that are located in third countries for their transfer to another third country.

For the purposes of this Regulation, the sole provision of ancillary services is excluded from this definition. Ancillary services are transportation, financial services, insurance or re-insurance, or general advertising or promotion;

(8)

‘broker’ means any natural or legal person or any partnership that provides brokering services from the customs territory of the Union into the territory of a third country;

(9)

‘technical assistance’ means any technical support related to repairs, development, manufacture, assembly, testing, maintenance, or any other technical service, and may take forms such as instruction, advice, training, transmission of working knowledge or skills or consulting services, including by electronic means as well as by telephone or any other verbal forms of assistance;

(10)

‘provider of technical assistance’ means:

(a)

any natural or legal person or any partnership that provides technical assistance from the customs territory of the Union into the territory of a third country;

(b)

any natural or legal person or any partnership resident or established in a Member State that provides technical assistance within the territory of a third country; or

(c)

any natural or legal person or any partnership resident or established in a Member State that provides technical assistance to a resident of a third country temporarily present in the customs territory of the Union;

(11)

‘transit’ means a transport of non-Union dual-use items entering and passing through the customs territory of the Union with a destination outside the customs territory of the Union where those items:

(a)

are placed under an external transit procedure according to Article 226 of the Union Customs Code and only pass through the customs territory of the Union;

(b)

are trans-shipped within, or directly re-exported from, a free zone;

(c)

are in temporary storage and are directly re-exported from a temporary storage facility; or

(d)

were brought into the customs territory of the Union on the same vessel or aircraft that will take them out of that territory without unloading;

(12)

‘individual export authorisation’ means an authorisation granted to one specific exporter for one end-user or consignee in a third country and covering one or more dual-use items;

(13)

‘global export authorisation’ means an authorisation granted to one specific exporter in respect of a type or category of dual-use items which may be valid for exports to one or more specified end-users and/or in one or more specified third countries;

(14)

‘large project authorisation’ means an individual export authorisation or a global export authorisation granted to one specific exporter, in respect of a type or category of dual-use items which may be valid for exports to one or more specified end-users in one or more specified third countries for the purpose of a specified large-scale project;

(15)

‘Union general export authorisation’ means an export authorisation for exports to certain countries of destination that is available to all exporters who respect the conditions and requirements listed in Sections A to H of Annex II;

(16)

‘national general export authorisation’ means an export authorisation defined by national legislation in accordance with Article 12(6) and Section C of Annex III;

(17)

‘customs territory of the Union’ means the customs territory of the Union within the meaning of Article 4 of the Union Customs Code;

(18)

‘non-Union dual-use items’ means items that have the status of non-Union goods within the meaning of Article 5(24) of the Union Customs Code;

(19)

‘arms embargo’ means an arms embargo imposed by a decision or a common position adopted by the Council or a decision of the Organisation for Security and Cooperation in Europe (OSCE) or an arms embargo imposed by a binding resolution of the Security Council of the United Nations;

(20)

‘cyber-surveillance items’ means dual-use items specially designed to enable the covert surveillance of natural persons by monitoring, extracting, collecting or analysing data from information and telecommunication systems;

(21)

‘internal compliance programme’ or ‘ICP’ means ongoing effective, appropriate and proportionate policies and procedures adopted by exporters to facilitate compliance with the provisions and objectives of this Regulation and with the terms and conditions of the authorisations implemented under this Regulation, including, inter alia, due diligence measures assessing risks related to the export of the items to end-users and end-uses;

(22)

‘essentially identical transaction’ means a transaction concerning items with essentially identical parameters or technical characteristics and involving the same end-user or consignee as another transaction.

CHAPTER II

SCOPE

Article 3

1. An authorisation shall be required for the export of dual-use items listed in Annex I.

2. Pursuant to Article 4, 5, 9 or 10, an authorisation may also be required for the export to all or certain destinations of certain dual-use items not listed in Annex I.

Article 4

1. An authorisation shall be required for the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:

(a)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(b)

for a military end-use if the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo; for the purposes of this point, ‘military end-use’ means:

(i)

incorporation into military items listed in the military list of Member States;

(ii)

use of production, test or analytical equipment and components therefor, for the development, production or maintenance of military items listed in the military list of Member States; or

(iii)

use of any unfinished products in a plant for the production of military items listed in the military list of Member States;

(c)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of a Member State without authorisation or in violation of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State.

2. Where an exporter is aware that dual-use items which he proposes to export, not listed in Annex I, are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, the exporter shall notify the competent authority. That competent authority shall decide whether or not to make the export concerned subject to authorisation.

3. A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article.

4. A Member State which imposes an authorisation requirement pursuant to paragraph 1, 2, or 3 shall immediately inform its customs authorities and other relevant national authorities and provide the other Member States and the Commission with relevant information on the authorisation requirement in question, in particular as regards the items and end-users concerned, unless it considers that it is not appropriate to do so in light of the nature of the transaction or the sensitivity of the information concerned.

5. Member States shall give due consideration to information received pursuant to paragraph 4 and shall inform their customs authorities and other relevant national authorities thereof.

6. In order to allow for an examination of all valid denials by the Member States, Article 16(1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall apply to cases concerning dual-use items not listed in Annex I.

7. All exchanges of information required pursuant to this Article shall take place in accordance with the legal requirements concerning the protection of personal information, commercially sensitive information or protected defence, foreign policy or national security information. Such exchanges of information shall be made via secure electronic means, including through the system referred to in Article 23(6).

8. This Regulation is without prejudice to the right of Member States to take national measures under Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2015/479.

Article 5

1. An authorisation shall be required for the export of cyber-surveillance items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for use in connection with internal repression and/or the commission of serious violations of human rights and international humanitarian law.

2. Where an exporter is aware, according to its due diligence findings, that cyber-surveillance items which the exporter proposes to export, not listed in Annex I, are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article, the exporter shall notify the competent authority. That competent authority shall decide whether or not to make the export concerned subject to authorisation. The Commission and the Council shall make available guidelines for exporters, as referred to in Article 26(1).

3. A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the export of cyber-surveillance items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1 of this Article.

4. A Member State which imposes an authorisation requirement pursuant to paragraph 1, 2 or 3 shall immediately inform its customs authorities and other relevant national authorities and shall provide the other Member States and the Commission with relevant information on the authorisation requirement in question, in particular as regards the items and entities concerned, unless it considers that it is not appropriate to do so in light of the nature of the transaction or the sensitivity of the information concerned.

5. Member States shall give due consideration to information received pursuant to paragraph 4 and shall review it in light of the criteria set out in paragraph 1 within 30 working days. They shall inform their customs authorities and other relevant national authorities. In exceptional cases, any Member State may request the extension of that 30-day period. However, the extension shall not exceed 30 working days.

6. Where all Member States notify each other and the Commission that an authorisation requirement should be imposed for essentially identical transactions, the Commission shall publish in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union information regarding the cyber-surveillance items and, where appropriate, destinations subject to authorisation requirements as notified by Member States for that purpose.

7. Member States shall review the information published pursuant to paragraph 6 at least annually, on the basis of relevant information and analyses provided by the Commission. Where all Member States notify each other and the Commission that the publication of an authorisation requirement should be amended or renewed, the Commission shall promptly and accordingly amend or renew the information published pursuant to paragraph 6 in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union .

8. In order to allow for an examination of all valid denials by the Member States, Article 16(1), (2) and (5) to (7) shall apply to cases concerning cyber-surveillance items not listed in Annex I.

9. All exchanges of information required pursuant to this Article shall take place in accordance with the legal requirements concerning the protection of personal information, commercially sensitive information or protected defence, foreign policy or national security information. Such exchanges of information shall be made via secure electronic means, including through the system referred to in Article 23(6).

10. Member States shall consider supporting the inclusion of items published pursuant to paragraph 6 of this Article in the appropriate international non-proliferation regimes or export control arrangements with a view to extending controls. The Commission shall provide analyses of the relevant data gathered pursuant to Article 23(2) and to Article 26(2).

11. This Regulation is without prejudice to the right of Member States to take national measures under Article 10 of Regulation (EU) 2015/479.

Article 6

1. An authorisation shall be required for the provision of brokering services of dual-use items listed in Annex I if the broker has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).

2. Where a broker proposes to provide brokering services of dual-use items listed in Annex I and is aware that those items are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1), the broker shall notify the competent authority. That competent authority shall decide whether or not to make such brokering services subject to authorisation.

3. A Member State may extend the application of paragraph 1 to non-listed dual-use items.

4. A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the provision of brokering services of dual-use items if the broker has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).

5. Article 9(2), (3) and (4) shall apply to the national measures referred to in paragraphs 3 and 4 of this Article.

Article 7

1. The transit of non-Union dual-use items listed in Annex I may be prohibited at any time by the competent authority of the Member State where the items are situated if the items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).

2. Before deciding whether or not to prohibit a transit the competent authority may, in individual cases, impose an authorisation requirement for the specific transit of dual-use items listed in Annex I if the items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1). If the transit takes place through the territory of multiple Member States, the competent authority of each affected Member State shall be able to prohibit such transit through its territory.

The competent authority may impose the authorisation requirement on the natural or legal person or the partnership that holds the contract with the consignee in the third country and has the power to determine the sending of the items passing through the customs territory of the Union.

If the natural or legal person or the partnership is not resident or established in the customs territory of the Union, the competent authority may impose the authorisation requirement on:

(a)

the declarant within the meaning of Article 5(15) of the Union Customs Code;

(b)

the carrier within the meaning of Article 5(40) of the Union Customs Code; or

(c)

the natural person carrying the dual-use items in transit where those dual-use items are contained in the personal baggage of that person.

3. A Member State may extend the application of paragraph 1 to non-listed dual-use items.

4. Article 9(2), (3) and (4) shall apply to the national measures referred to in paragraph 3 of this Article.

Article 8

1. An authorisation shall be required for the provision of technical assistance related to dual-use items listed in Annex I if the provider of technical assistance has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).

2. Where a provider of technical assistance proposes to provide technical assistance for dual-use items listed in Annex I and is aware that those items are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1), the provider of technical assistance shall notify the competent authority. That competent authority shall decide whether or not to make such technical assistance subject to authorisation.

3. Paragraphs 1 and 2 shall not apply if the technical assistance:

(a)

is provided within or into the territory of a country listed in Part 2 of Section A of Annex II, or towards a resident of a country listed in Part 2 of Section A of Annex II;

(b)

takes the form of transferring information that is in the public domain or basic scientific research within the meaning of the General Technology Note or of the Nuclear Technology Note set out in Annex I;

(c)

is provided by authorities or agencies of a Member State in the context of their official tasks;

(d)

is provided for the armed forces of a Member State on the basis of the tasks assigned to them;

(e)

is provided for a purpose which is cited in the exceptions for items of the Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR technology) in Annex IV; or

(f)

is the minimum necessary for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of those items for which an export authorisation has been issued.

4. A Member State may extend the application of paragraph 1 to non-listed dual-use items.

5. A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the provision of technical assistance where a provider of technical assistance who proposes to provide technical assistance for dual-use items has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1).

6. Article 9(2), (3) and (4) shall apply to the national measures referred to in paragraphs 4 and 5 of this Article.

Article 9

1. A Member State may prohibit or impose an authorisation requirement on the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I for reasons of public security, including the prevention of acts of terrorism, or for human rights considerations.

2. Member States shall notify the Commission and the other Member States of any measures adopted pursuant to paragraph 1 without delay and indicate the precise reasons for the measures. If the measure is the establishment of a national control list, Member States shall also inform the Commission and the other Member States of the description of the controlled items.

3. Member States shall, without delay, notify the Commission and the other Member States of any amendment to measures adopted pursuant to paragraph 1, including any amendment to their national control lists.

4. The Commission shall publish the measures notified to it pursuant to paragraphs 2 and 3 in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union . The Commission shall publish separately, without delay and in all the official languages of the Union, a compilation of national control lists in force in the Member States. The Commission shall, upon notification by a Member State of any amendment to its national control list, publish, without delay and in all the official languages of the Union, an update to the compilation of national control lists in force in the Member States.

Article 10

1. An authorisation shall be required for the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if another Member State imposes an authorisation requirement for the export of those items on the basis of a national control list of items adopted by that Member State pursuant to Article 9 and published by the Commission pursuant to Article 9(4), and if the exporter has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for uses of concern with respect to public security, including the prevention of acts of terrorism, or to human rights considerations.

2. A Member State which refuses an authorisation required under paragraph 1 shall also inform the Commission and the other Member States of such decision.

3. A Member State which imposes an authorisation requirement pursuant to paragraph 1 of this Article on the export of a dual-use item not listed in Annex I, shall inform its customs authorities and other relevant national authorities about the authorisation requirement without delay and, where appropriate, provide the other Member States and the Commission with the relevant information, in particular concerning the items and end-users concerned. The other Member States shall give due consideration to that information and shall inform their customs authorities and other relevant national authorities thereof.

Article 11

1. An authorisation shall be required for intra-Union transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex IV. Dual-use items listed in Part 2 of Annex IV shall not be covered by a general authorisation.

2. A Member State may impose an authorisation requirement for the transfer of other dual-use items from its territory to another Member State in cases where at the time of transfer:

(a)

the operator or the competent authority knows that the final destination of the items concerned is outside the customs territory of the Union;

(b)

the export of those items to that final destination is subject to an authorisation requirement pursuant to Article 3, 4, 5, 9 or 10 in the Member State from which the items are to be transferred, and such export directly from its territory is not authorised by a general authorisation or a global authorisation; and

(c)

no processing or working as defined in Article 60(2) of the Union Customs Code is to be performed on the items in the Member State to which they are to be transferred.

3. The transfer authorisation referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be applied for in the Member State from which the dual-use items are to be transferred.

4. In cases where the subsequent export of the dual-use items has already been accepted in the consultation procedures set out in Article 14 by the Member State from which the items are to be transferred, the transfer authorisation shall be issued to the operator immediately, unless the circumstances have substantially changed.

5. A Member State which adopts legislation imposing an authorisation requirement as referred to in paragraph 2 shall, without delay, inform the Commission and the other Member States of the measures it has taken. The Commission shall publish that information in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union .

6. The application of measures taken pursuant to paragraphs 1 and 2 shall not involve the application of internal frontier controls within the customs territory of the Union, but solely controls which are performed as part of the normal control procedures applied in a non-discriminatory fashion throughout the customs territory of the Union.

7. The application of measures taken pursuant to paragraphs 1 and 2 shall not result in transfers from one Member State to another being subject to more restrictive conditions than those imposed for exports of the same items to third countries.

8. A Member State may, by national legislation, require that, for any intra-Union transfers from that Member State of items listed in Annex I, Category 5, Part 2, which are not listed in Annex IV, additional information concerning those items shall be provided to the competent authority of that Member State.

9. The relevant commercial documents relating to intra-Union transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex I shall indicate clearly that those items are subject to controls if exported from the customs territory of the Union. Such documents include, in particular, any sales contract, order confirmation, invoice or dispatch note.

CHAPTER III

EXPORT AUTHORISATION AND AUTHORISATION FOR BROKERING SERVICES AND TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

Article 12

1. The following types of authorisations for export may be issued or are established under this Regulation:

(a)

individual export authorisations;

(b)

global export authorisations;

(c)

national general export authorisations;

(d)

Union general export authorisations for exports of certain items to certain destinations under specific conditions and requirements for use as set out in Sections A to H of Annex II.

Authorisations issued or established under this Regulation shall be valid throughout the customs territory of the Union.

2. Individual and global export authorisations under this Regulation shall be granted by the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established.

Without prejudice to point (3) of Article 2, where the exporter is not resident or established on the customs territory of the Union, individual export authorisations shall be granted under this Regulation by the competent authority of the Member State where the dual-use items are located.

All individual and global export authorisations shall be issued, whenever possible, by electronic means on forms containing at least all the elements of and in the order provided for in the models set out in Section A of Annex III.

3. Individual export authorisations and global export authorisations shall be valid for up to two years, unless the competent authority decides otherwise.

Large project authorisations shall be valid for a duration to be determined by the competent authority, but no longer than four years, except in duly justified circumstances based on the duration of the project.

4. Exporters shall supply the competent authority with all relevant information required for their applications for individual and global export authorisations so as to provide complete information in particular about the end-user, the country of destination and the end-use of the item exported.

Individual export authorisations shall be subject to an end-use statement. The competent authority may exempt certain applications from the obligation of providing an end-use statement. Global export authorisations may be subject to an end-use statement if appropriate.

Exporters using global export authorisations shall implement an ICP, unless the competent authority considers it unnecessary due to other information it has taken into account when processing the application for a global export authorisation submitted by the exporter.

Reporting and ICP requirements relating to the use of global export authorisations shall be defined by Member States.

At the request of exporters, global export authorisations that contain quantitative limitations shall be split.

5. The competent authorities of the Member States shall process requests for individual or global authorisations within a period of time to be determined by national law or practice.

6. National general export authorisations shall:

(a)

exclude from their scope items listed in Section I of Annex II;

(b)

be defined by national law or practice; they may be used by all exporters, resident or established in the Member State that issues those authorisations, if they meet the requirements set in this Regulation and in the complementary national legislation; they shall be issued in accordance with the indications set out in Section C of Annex III;

(c)

not be used if the exporter has been informed by the competent authority that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in Article 4(1), or if the exporter is aware that the items are intended for such uses.

National general export authorisations may also apply to items and destinations listed in Sections A to H of Annex II.

Member States shall notify the Commission immediately of any national general export authorisations issued or modified. The Commission shall publish such notifications in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union .

7. The competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established may prohibit the exporter from using Union general export authorisations if there is reasonable suspicion about the exporter’s ability to comply with such authorisation or with a provision of the export control legislation.

The competent authorities of the Member States shall exchange information on exporters which are prohibited from using a Union general export authorisation, unless the competent authority of the Member State where the exporter is resident or established determines that the exporter will not attempt to export dual-use items through another Member State. The exchange of information shall be carried out using the electronic system referred to in Article 23(6).

Article 13

1. Authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance under this Regulation shall be granted by the competent authority of the Member State where the broker or the provider of technical assistance is resident or established. Where the broker or the provider of technical assistance is not resident or established on the customs territory of the Union, authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance under this Regulation shall be granted by the competent authority of the Member State from where the brokering services or technical assistance will be provided.

2. Authorisations for the provision of brokering services shall be granted for a set quantity of specific items and shall clearly identify the location of the items in the originating third country, the end-user and the exact location of the end-user.

Authorisations for technical assistance shall clearly identify the end-user and the exact location of the end-user.

The authorisations shall be valid throughout the customs territory of the Union.

3. Brokers and providers of technical assistance shall supply the competent authority with all relevant information required for their application for authorisation under this Regulation, in particular details of the location of the dual-use items, a clear description of the items and the quantity involved, third parties involved in the transaction, the country of destination, the end-user in that country and its exact location.

4. The competent authorities of the Member States shall process requests for authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance within a period of time to be determined by national law or practice.

5. All authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance shall be issued, whenever possible, by electronic means on forms containing at least all the elements of and in the order provided for in the models set out in Section B of Annex III.

Article 14

1. If the dual-use items in respect of which an application has been made for an individual export authorisation to a destination not listed in Part 2 of Section A of Annex II or to any destination in the case of dual-use items listed in Annex IV are or will be located in one or more Member States other than the one where the application has been made, that fact shall be indicated in the application. The competent authority of the Member State to which the application for authorisation has been made shall immediately consult the competent authorities of the Member States in question and provide the relevant information. That consultation may be carried out using the electronic system referred to in Article 23(6). The Member States consulted shall make known within 10 working days any objections they may have to the granting of such an authorisation, which shall bind the Member State in which the application has been made.

If no objections are received within 10 working days, the Member States consulted shall be regarded as having no objection.

In exceptional cases, any Member State consulted may request the extension of that 10-day period. However, the extension shall not exceed 30 working days.

2. If an export might prejudice its essential security interests, a Member State may request another Member State not to grant an export authorisation or, if such authorisation has been granted, request its annulment, suspension, modification or revocation. The Member State receiving such a request shall immediately engage in consultations of a non-binding nature with the requesting Member State, to be terminated within 10 working days. In the event that the Member State receiving the request decides to grant the authorisation, that Member State shall notify the Commission and the other Member States thereof using the electronic system referred to in Article 23(6).

Article 15

1. In deciding whether or not to grant an authorisation or to prohibit a transit under this Regulation, the Member States shall take into account all relevant considerations, including:

(a)

Union and Member States’ international obligations and commitments, in particular the obligations and commitments they have each accepted as members of the relevant international non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, or by ratification of relevant international treaties;

(b)

their obligations under sanctions imposed by a decision or a common position adopted by the Council or by a decision of the OSCE or by a binding resolution of the Security Council of the United Nations;

(c)

considerations of national foreign and security policy, including those covered by Common Position 2008/944/CFSP;

(d)

considerations about intended end-use and the risk of diversion.

2. In addition to the criteria set out in paragraph 1, when assessing an application for a global export authorisation, Member States shall take into consideration the implementation of an ICP by the exporter.

Article 16

1. The competent authority acting in accordance with this Regulation, may refuse to grant an export authorisation and may annul, suspend, modify or revoke an export authorisation which it has already granted. Where the competent authority refuses, annuls, suspends, substantially limits or revokes an export authorisation or when it has determined that the intended export is not to be authorised, it shall notify the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission thereof and share the relevant information with them. In case the competent authority of a Member State has suspended an export authorisation, the final assessment shall be communicated to the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission at the end of the period of suspension.

2. The competent authorities of the Member States shall review denials of authorisations notified under paragraph 1 within three years of their notification and revoke them, amend them or renew them. The competent authorities of the Member States shall notify the results of the review to the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission as soon as possible. Denials which are not revoked shall remain valid and shall be reviewed every three years. At the third review, the Member State concerned shall be required to explain the reasoning for maintaining such denial.

3. The competent authority shall notify the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission of their decisions to prohibit a transit of dual-use items taken under Article 7 without delay. These notifications shall contain all relevant information including the classification of the item, its technical parameters, the country of destination and the end-user.

4. Paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article shall also apply to authorisations for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance referred to in Article 13.

5. Before the competent authority of a Member State decides whether or not to grant an authorisation or to prohibit a transit under this Regulation, it shall examine all valid denials or decisions to prohibit a transit of dual-use items listed in Annex I taken under this Regulation to ascertain whether an authorisation or a transit has been denied by the competent authorities of another Member State for an essentially identical transaction. It shall then consult the competent authorities of the Member States which issued such denials or decisions to prohibit the transit as provided for in paragraphs 1, 3 and 4 of this Article.

The competent authorities of the Member States consulted shall make known within 10 working days whether or not they consider the transaction in question to be an essentially identical transaction. If no reaction has been received within 10 working days, the competent authorities of the Member States consulted shall be regarded as not considering the transaction in question to be an essentially identical transaction.

If more information is required to correctly evaluate the transaction in question, the competent authorities of the Member States concerned shall agree on the extension of that 10-day period. However, the extension shall not exceed 30 working days.

If, following such consultation, the competent authority decides to grant an authorisation or allow the transit, it shall notify the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission, providing all relevant information to explain the decision.

6. All notifications required pursuant to this Article shall be made via secure electronic means, including through the system referred to in Article 23(6).

7. All information shared pursuant to this Article shall be in compliance with Article 23(5) concerning the confidentiality of such information.

CHAPTER IV

AMENDMENT OF LISTS OF DUAL - USE ITEMS AND DESTINATIONS

Article 17

1. The Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 18 in order to amend the list of dual-use items set out in Annexes I and IV, as follows:

(a)

the list of dual-use items set out in Annex I shall be amended in conformity with the relevant obligations and commitments, and any amendment thereof, that Member States and, where applicable, the Union have accepted as members of the international non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, or by ratification of relevant international treaties;

(b)

where the amendment of Annex I concerns dual-use items which are also listed in Annex II or IV, those Annexes shall be amended accordingly.

2. The Commission is empowered to adopt delegated acts in accordance with Article 18 in order to amend Annex II by removing items and by adding or removing destinations from the scope of Union general export authorisations in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group set up pursuant to Article 24 and taking into consideration obligations and commitments under the relevant non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, such as amendments to control lists, as well as relevant geopolitical developments. Where imperative grounds of urgency require a removal of particular destinations from the scope of a Union general export authorisation, the procedure provided for in Article 19 shall apply to delegated acts adopted pursuant to this paragraph.

Article 18

1. The power to adopt delegated acts is conferred on the Commission subject to the conditions laid down in this Article.

2. The power to adopt delegated acts referred to in Article 17 shall be conferred on the Commission for a period of five years from 9 September 2021. The Commission shall draw up a report in respect of the delegation of power not later than nine months before the end of the five-year period. The delegation of power shall be tacitly extended for periods of an identical duration, unless the European Parliament or the Council opposes such extension not later than three months before the end of each period.

3. The delegation of power referred to in Article 17 may be revoked at any time by the European Parliament or by the Council. A decision to revoke shall put an end to the delegation of the power specified in that decision. It shall take effect the day following the publication of the decision in the Official Journal of the European Union or at a later date specified therein. It shall not affect the validity of any delegated acts already in force.

4. Before adopting a delegated act, the Commission shall consult experts designated by each Member State in accordance with the principles laid down in the Interinstitutional Agreement of 13 April 2016 on Better Law-Making.

5. As soon as it adopts a delegated act, the Commission shall notify it simultaneously to the European Parliament and to the Council.

6. A delegated act adopted pursuant to Article 17 shall enter into force only if no objection has been expressed either by the European Parliament or by the Council within a period of two months of notification of that act to the European Parliament and the Council or if, before the expiry of that period, the European Parliament and the Council have both informed the Commission that they will not object. That period shall be extended by two months at the initiative of the European Parliament or of the Council.

Article 19

1. Delegated acts adopted under this Article shall enter into force without delay and shall apply as long as no objection is expressed in accordance with paragraph 2. The notification of a delegated act to the European Parliament and to the Council shall state the reasons for the use of the urgency procedure.

2. Either the European Parliament or the Council may object to a delegated act in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 18(6). In such a case, the Commission shall repeal the act immediately following the notification of the decision to object by the European Parliament or by the Council.

Article 20

The list of dual-use items set out in Annex IV, which is a subset of Annex I, shall be updated having regard to Article 36 TFEU, namely the public policy and public security interests of the Member States.

CHAPTER V

CUSTOMS PROCEDURES

Article 21

1. When completing the formalities for the export of dual-use items at the customs office responsible for handling the export declaration, the exporter shall furnish proof that any necessary export authorisation has been obtained.

2. A translation of any documents furnished as proof into an official language of the Member State where the export declaration is presented may be required of the exporter.

3. Without prejudice to any powers conferred on it under, and pursuant to, the Union Customs Code, a Member State may also, for a period not exceeding the periods referred to in paragraph 4, suspend the process of export from its territory, or, if necessary, otherwise prevent the dual-use items which are or are not covered by a valid export authorisation from leaving the Union via its territory, where it has:

(a)

grounds for suspicion that:

(i)

relevant information was not taken into account when the authorisation was granted; or

(ii)

circumstances have materially changed since the grant of the authorisation; or

(b)

relevant information regarding the potential application of measures under Article 4(1).

4. In the cases referred to in paragraph 3 of this Article, the Member State referred to in that paragraph shall consult the competent authority of the Member State which granted the export authorisation or which may take action pursuant to Article 4(1) without delay in order that the competent authority may take action pursuant to Article 4(1) or Article 16(1). If that competent authority decides to maintain the authorisation or not to take action pursuant to Article 4(1), it shall reply within 10 working days, which, at its request, may be extended to 30 working days in exceptional circumstances. In such case, or if no reply is received within 10 or 30 working days, as the case may be, the dual-use items shall be released immediately. The competent authority of the Member State which granted the authorisation shall inform the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission.

5. The Commission, in cooperation with the Member States, may develop guidance to support interagency cooperation between licensing and customs authorities.

Article 22

1. Member States may provide that customs formalities for the export of dual-use items may be completed only at customs offices empowered to that end.

2. Member States availing themselves of the option set out in paragraph 1 shall inform the Commission of the duly empowered customs offices. The Commission shall publish the information in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union .

CHAPTER VI

ADMINISTRATIVE COOPERATION, IMPLEMENTATION AND ENFORCEMENT

Article 23

1. Member States shall inform the Commission without delay of the laws, regulations and administrative provisions adopted in implementation of this Regulation, including:

(a)

a list of the competent authorities of the Member States empowered to:

—

grant export authorisations for dual-use items,

—

grant authorisations under this Regulation for the provision of brokering services and technical assistance,

—

prohibit the transit of non-Union dual-use items under this Regulation;

(b)

the measures referred to in Article 25(1).

The Commission shall forward the information to the other Member States and shall publish the information in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Union .

2. Member States, in cooperation with the Commission, shall take all appropriate measures to establish direct cooperation and exchange of information between the competent authorities with a view to enhance the efficiency of the Union export control regime and to ensure the consistent and effective implementation and enforcement of control throughout the customs territory of the Union. The information exchange may include:

(a)

relevant licensing data, provided for each authorisation issued (e.g. value and types of licence and related destinations, number of users of general authorisations);

(b)

additional information regarding the application of controls, including information on the application of criteria set out in Article 15(1), the number of operators with an ICP and, where available, data on exports of dual-use items carried out in other Member States;

(c)

information regarding the analysis underlying additions or planned additions to national control lists pursuant to Article 9;

(d)

information regarding the enforcement of controls, including risk-based audits, details of exporters deprived of the right to use the national or Union general export authorisations, and, where available, number of violations, seizures and application of other penalties;

(e)

data on sensitive end-users, actors involved in suspicious procurement activities, and, where available, routes taken.

3. The exchange of licensing data shall take place at least annually in accordance with guidelines to be drawn up by the Dual-Use Coordination Group established pursuant to Article 24 and with due consideration to legal requirements concerning the protection of personal information, commercially sensitive information or protected defence, foreign policy or national security information.

4. Member States and the Commission shall regularly examine the implementation of Article 15 based on information submitted pursuant to this Regulation and analyses of such data. All participants of these exchanges shall respect the confidentiality of the discussions.

5. Council Regulation (EC) No 515/97 ( 14 ) , and in particular its provisions on the confidentiality of information, shall apply mutatis mutandis.

6. A secure and encrypted system shall be developed by the Commission, in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group set up pursuant to Article 24, to support direct cooperation and exchange of information between the competent authorities of the Member States and, where appropriate, the Commission. The system shall, where feasible, be connected by the Commission to the electronic licensing systems of the competent authorities of the Member States to the extent necessary for the purpose of facilitating this direct cooperation and exchange of information. The European Parliament shall be informed about the system’s budget, development and functioning.

7. The processing of personal data shall be in accordance with the rules laid down in Regulations (EU) 2016/679 and (EU) 2018/1725.

Article 24

1. A Dual-Use Coordination Group chaired by a representative of the Commission shall be set up. Each Member State shall appoint a representative to this Group. It shall examine any question concerning the application of this Regulation which may be raised either by the chair or by a representative of a Member State.

2. The Dual-Use Coordination Group shall, whenever it considers it to be necessary, consult exporters, brokers, providers of technical assistance and other relevant stakeholders concerned by this Regulation.

3. The Dual-Use Coordination Group shall, where appropriate, set up technical expert groups composed of experts from Member States to examine specific issues relating to the implementation of controls, including issues relating to the updating of the Union control lists set out in Annex I. Technical expert groups shall, where appropriate, consult exporters, brokers, providers of technical assistance and other relevant stakeholders concerned by this Regulation.

4. The Commission shall support a Union licensing and enforcement capacity-building programme, including by developing, in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group, common training programmes for officials of the Member States.

Article 25

1. Each Member State shall take appropriate measures to ensure the proper enforcement of this Regulation. In particular, it shall lay down the penalties applicable to infringements of the provisions of this Regulation or of those adopted for its implementation. Those penalties shall be effective, proportionate and dissuasive.

2. The Dual-Use Coordination Group shall set up an enforcement coordination mechanism to support exchange of information and direct cooperation between competent authorities and enforcement agencies of the Member States (the ‘Enforcement Coordination Mechanism’). Under the Enforcement Coordination Mechanism, the Member States and the Commission shall exchange relevant information, where available, including on the application, nature and effect of the measures, taken under paragraph 1, on enforcement of best practices and unauthorised exports of dual-use items and/or infringements of this Regulation and/or relevant national legislation.

Under the Enforcement Coordination Mechanism, the Member States and the Commission shall also exchange information on best practices of national enforcement authorities regarding risk-based audits, the detection and prosecution of unauthorised exports of dual-use items and/or possible other infringements of this Regulation and/or relevant national legislation.

Exchange of information under the Enforcement Coordination Mechanism shall be confidential.

CHAPTER VII

TRANSPARENCY, OUTREACH, MONITORING, EVALUATION

Article 26

1. The Commission and the Council shall, where appropriate, make available guidelines and/or recommendations for best practices for the subjects referred to in this Regulation to ensure the efficiency of the Union export control regime and the consistency of its implementation. The provision of guidelines and/or recommendations for best practices to exporters, brokers and providers of technical assistance shall be the responsibility of the Member States where they are resident or established. In those guidelines and/or recommendations for best practices, the information needs of SMEs in particular shall be taken into account.

2. The Commission shall, in consultation with the Dual-Use Coordination Group, submit an annual report to the European Parliament and the Council on the implementation of this Regulation, and on the activities, examinations and consultations of the Dual-Use Coordination Group. That annual report shall be public.

The annual report shall include information on authorisations (in particular number and value by types of items and by destinations at Union and Member State levels), denials and prohibitions under this Regulation. The annual report shall also include information on the administration (in particular staffing, compliance and outreach activities, dedicated licensing or classification tools), and enforcement of controls (in particular the number of infringements and penalties).

With regard to cyber-surveillance items, the annual report shall include dedicated information on authorisations, in particular on the number of applications received by item, the issuing Member State and the destinations concerned by those applications, and on the decisions taken on those applications.

The information contained in the annual report shall be presented in accordance with the principles set out in paragraph 3.

The Commission and the Council shall make available guidelines on the methodology for data gathering and processing for the preparation of the annual report, including the determination of the types of items and the availability of enforcement data.

3. Member States shall provide to the Commission all appropriate information for the preparation of the report with due consideration given to legal requirements concerning the protection of personal information, commercially sensitive information or protected defence, foreign policy or national security information. Regulation (EC) No 223/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( 15 ) on European statistics applies to information exchanged or published under this Article.

4. Between 10 September 2026 and 10 September 2028, the Commission shall carry out an evaluation of this Regulation and report on the main findings to the European Parliament, the Council and the European Economic and Social Committee. After 10 September 2024, the Commission shall carry out an evaluation of Article 5 and report on the main findings to the European Parliament, the Council and the European Economic and Social Committee.

CHAPTER VIII

CONTROL MEASURES

Article 27

1. Exporters of dual-use items shall keep detailed registers or records of their exports, in accordance with the national law or practice in force in the Member State concerned. Such registers or records shall include in particular commercial documents such as invoices, manifests and transport and other dispatch documents containing sufficient information to allow the following to be identified:

(a)

a description of the dual-use items;

(b)

the quantity of the dual-use items;

(c)

the name and address of the exporter and of the consignee;

(d)

where known, the end-use and end-user of the dual-use items.

2. In accordance with national law or practice in force in the Member State concerned, brokers and providers of technical assistance shall keep registers or records for brokering services or technical assistance so as to be able to prove, on request, the description of the dual-use items that were the subject of brokering services or technical assistance, the period during which the items were the subject of such services, the destination of such items and services, and the countries concerned by those services.

3. The registers or records and the documents referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 shall be kept for at least five years from the end of the calendar year in which the export took place or the brokering services or technical assistance were provided. They shall be produced, on request, to the competent authority.

4. Documents and records of intra-Union transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex I shall be kept for at least three years from the end of the calendar year in which a transfer took place and shall be produced, on request, to the competent authority of the Member State from which these items were transferred.

Article 28

In order to ensure that this Regulation is properly applied, each Member State shall take all necessary measures to permit its competent authorities:

(a)

to gather information on any order or transaction involving dual-use items;

(b)

to establish whether the export control measures are being properly applied, which may include in particular the power to enter the premises of persons with an interest in an export transaction or brokers involved in the provision of brokering services under circumstances set out in Article 6, or providers of technical assistance under the circumstances set out in Article 8.

CHAPTER IX

COOPERATION WITH THIRD COUNTRIES

Article 29

1. The Commission and the Member States shall, where appropriate, maintain dialogues with third countries, with a view to promoting the global convergence of controls.

The dialogues may support regular and reciprocal cooperation with third countries, including exchange of information and best practices, as well as capacity-building and outreach to third countries. The dialogues may also encourage the adherence of third countries to robust export controls developed by multilateral export control regimes as a model for international best practice.

2. Without prejudice to the provisions on mutual administrative assistance agreements or protocols in customs matters concluded between the Union and third countries, the Council may authorise the Commission to negotiate with third countries on agreements providing for the mutual recognition of export controls of dual-use items covered by this Regulation.

Those negotiations shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures established in Article 207(3) TFEU and in the Treaty establishing the European Atomic Energy Community, as appropriate.

CHAPTER X

FINAL PROVISIONS

Article 30

This Regulation applies without prejudice to the Commission Delegated Decision of 15 September 2015 supplementing Decision No 1104/2011/EU.

Article 31

Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 is repealed.

However, for authorisation applications made before 9 September 2021, the relevant provisions of Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 shall continue to apply.

References to the repealed Regulation shall be construed as references to this Regulation and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex VI.

Article 32

This Regulation shall enter into force on the ninetieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union .

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.

Done at Brussels, 20 May 2021.

For the European Parliament

The President

D. M. SASSOLI

For the Council

The President

A. P. ZACARIAS

( 1 ) Position of the European Parliament of 25 March 2021 (not yet published in the Official Journal) and decision of the Council of 10 May 2021.

( 2 ) Council Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 of 5 May 2009 setting up a Community regime for the control of exports, transfer, brokering and transit of dual-use items ( OJ L 134, 29.5.2009, p. 1 ).

( 3 ) Council Common Position 2008/944/CFSP of 8 December 2008 defining common rules governing control of exports of military technology and equipment ( OJ L 335, 13.12.2008, p. 99 ).

( 4 ) Regulation (EU) No 952/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 9 October 2013 laying down the Union Customs Code ( OJ L 269, 10.10.2013, p. 1 ).

( 5 ) OJ L 123, 12.5.2016, p. 1 .

( 6 ) Regulation (EU) 2015/479 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 2015 on common rules for exports ( OJ L 83, 27.3.2015, p. 34 ).

( 7 ) Regulation (EU) 2016/679 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 April 2016 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Directive 95/46/EC ( OJ L 119, 4.5.2016, p. 1 ).

( 8 ) Regulation (EU) 2018/1725 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 23 October 2018 on the protection of natural persons with regard to the processing of personal data by the Union institutions, bodies, offices and agencies and on the free movement of such data, and repealing Regulation (EC) No 45/2001 and Decision No 1247/2002/EC ( OJ L 295, 21.11.2018, p. 39 ).

( 9 ) Commission Decision (EU, Euratom) 2015/443 of 13 March 2015 on Security in the Commission ( OJ L 72, 17.3.2015, p. 41 ).

( 10 ) Commission Decision (EU, Euratom) 2015/444 of 13 March 2015 on the security rules for protecting EU classified information ( OJ L 72, 17.3.2015, p. 53 ).

( 11 ) OJ C 202, 8.7.2011, p. 13 .

( 12 ) Decision No 1104/2011/EU of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 October 2011 on the rules for access to the public regulated service provided by the global navigation satellite system established under the Galileo programme ( OJ L 287, 4.11.2011, p. 1 ).

( 13 ) Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/2446 of 28 July 2015 supplementing Regulation (EU) No 952/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council as regards detailed rules concerning certain provisions of the Union Customs Code ( OJ L 343, 29.12.2015, p. 1 ).

( 14 ) Council Regulation (EC) No 515/97 of 13 March 1997 on mutual assistance between the administrative authorities of the Member States and cooperation between the latter and the Commission to ensure the correct application of the law on customs and agricultural matters ( OJ L 82, 22.3.1997, p. 1 ).

( 15 ) Regulation (EC) No 223/2009 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 2009 on European statistics and repealing Regulation (EC, Euratom) No 1101/2008 of the European Parliament and of the Council on the transmission of data subject to statistical confidentiality to the Statistical Office of the European Communities, Council Regulation (EC) No 322/97 on Community Statistics, and Council Decision 89/382/EEC, Euratom establishing a Committee on the Statistical Programmes of the European Communities ( OJ L 87, 31.3.2009, p. 164 ).

ANNEX I

LIST OF DUAL-USE ITEMS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 3 OF THIS REGULATION

The list of dual-use items contained in this Annex implements internationally agreed dual-use controls, including the Australia Group ( 1 ) , the Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR) ( 2 ) , the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG) ( 3 ) , the Wassenaar Arrangement ( 4 ) and the Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC) ( 5 ) .

CONTENTS

Part I -

Part II - Category 0

Part III -Category 1

Part IV - Category 2

Part V - Category 3

Part VI - Category 4

Part VII - Category 5

Part VIII - Category 6

Part IX - Category 7

Part X - Category 8

Part XI - Category 9

PART I - General Notes, Acronyms and Abbreviations, and Definitions

GENERAL NOTES TO ANNEX I

1.

2.

N.B.

3.

4.

NUCLEAR TECHNOLOGY NOTE (NTN)

(To be read in conjunction with section E of Category 0.)

The "technology" directly associated with any goods controlled in Category 0 is controlled according to the provisions of Category 0.

"Technology" for the "development", "production" or "use" of goods under control remains under control even when applicable to non-controlled goods.

The approval of goods for export also authorises the export to the same end-user of the minimum "technology" required for the installation, operation, maintenance and repair of the goods.

Controls on "technology" transfer do not apply to information "in the public domain" or to "basic scientific research".

GENERAL TECHNOLOGY NOTE (GTN)

(To be read in conjunction with section E of Categories 1 to 9.)

The export of "technology" which is "required" for the "development", "production" or "use" of goods controlled in Categories 1 to 9, is controlled according to the provisions of Categories 1 to 9.

"Technology""required" for the "development", "production" or "use" of goods under control remains under control even when applicable to non-controlled goods.

Controls do not apply to that "technology" which is the minimum necessary for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of those goods which are not controlled or whose export has been authorised.

Note:

Controls on "technology" transfers do not apply to information "in the public domain", to "basic scientific research" or to the minimum necessary information for patent applications.

NUCLEAR SOFTWARE NOTE (NSN)

(This note overrides any control within section D of Category 0)

Section D of Category 0 of this list does not control "software" which is the minimum necessary "object code" for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of those items whose export has been authorised.

The approval of goods for export also authorises the export to the same end-user of the minimum necessary "object code" for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of the goods

Note:

GENERAL SOFTWARE NOTE (GSN)

(This note overrides any control within section D of Categories 1 to 9.)

Categories 1 to 9 of this list do not control "software" which is any of the following:

a.

Generally available to the public by being:

1.

Sold from stock at retail selling points, without restriction, by means of:

a.

Over-the-counter transactions;

b.

Mail order transactions;

c.

Electronic transactions; or

d.

Telephone call transactions; and

2.

Designed for installation by the user without further substantial support by the supplier;

Note:

b.

"In the public domain"; or

c.

The minimum necessary "object code" for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) or repair of those items whose export has been authorised.

Note:

GENERAL "INFORMATION SECURITY" NOTE (GISN)

"Information security" items or functions should be considered against the provisions in Category 5, Part 2, even if they are components, "software" or functions of other items.

EDITORIAL PRACTICES IN THE OFFICIAL JOURNAL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION

In accordance with the rules set out in the Interinstitutional style guide, for texts in English published in the Official Journal of the European Union :

—

a comma is used to separate the whole number from decimals,

—

whole numbers are presented in series of three, each series being separated by a thin space.

The text reproduced in this Annex follows the above-described practice.

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS ANNEX

For acronyms and abbreviations used as defined terms, see 'Definitions of Terms used in this Annex'.

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

ABEC

Annular Bearing Engineers Committee

ABMA

American Bearing Manufacturers Association

ADC

Analogue-to-Digital Converter

AGMA

American Gear Manufacturers’ Association

AHRS

Attitude and Heading Reference Systems

AISI

American Iron and Steel Institute

ALE

Atomic Layer Epitaxy

ALU

Arithmetic Logic Unit

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

APP

Adjusted Peak Performance

APU

Auxiliary Power Unit

ASTM

American Society for Testing and Materials

ATC

Air Traffic Control

BJT

Bipolar Junction Transistors

BPP

Beam Parameter Product

BSC

Base Station Controller

CAD

Computer-Aided-Design

CAS

Chemical Abstracts Service

CCD

Charge Coupled Device

CDU

Control and Display Unit

CEP

Circular Error Probable

CMM

Coordinate Measuring Machine

CMOS

Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor

CNTD

Controlled Nucleation Thermal Deposition

CPLD

Complex Programmable Logic Device

CPU

Central Processing Unit

CVD

Chemical Vapour Deposition

CW

Chemical Warfare

CW (for lasers)

Continuous Wave

DAC

Digital-to-Analogue Converter

DANL

Displayed Average Noise Level

DBRN

Data-Base Referenced Navigation

DDS

Direct Digital Synthesizer

DMA

Dynamic Mechanical Analysis

DME

Distance Measuring Equipment

DMOSFET

Diffused Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor

DS

Directionally Solidified

EB

Exploding Bridge

EB-PVD

Electron Beam Physical Vapour Deposition

EBW

Exploding Bridge Wire

ECM

Electro-Chemical Machining

EDM

Electrical Discharge Machines

EFI

Exploding Foil Initiators

EIRP

Effective Isotropic Radiated Power

EMP

Electromagnetic Pulse

ENOB

Effective Number of Bits

ERF

Electrorheological Finishing

ERP

Effective Radiated Power

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

ETO

Emitter Turn-Off Thyristor

ETT

Electrical Triggering Thyristor

EU

European Union

EUV

Extreme Ultraviolet

FADEC

Full Authority Digital Engine Control

FFT

Fast Fourier Transform

FPGA

Field Programmable Gate Array

FPIC

Field Programmable Interconnect

FPLA

Field Programmable Logic Array

FPO

Floating Point Operation

FWHM

Full-Width Half-Maximum

GLONASS

Global Navigation Satellite System

GNSS

Global Navigation Satellite System

GPS

Global Positioning System

GSM

Global System for Mobile Communications

GTO

Gate Turn-off Thyristor

HBT

Hetero-Bipolar Transistors

HDMI

High-Definition Multimedia Interface

HEMT

High Electron Mobility Transistor

ICAO

International Civil Aviation Organization

IEC

International Electro-technical Commission

IED

Improvised Explosive Device

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

IFOV

Instantaneous-Field-Of-View

IGBT

Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor

IGCT

Integrated Gate Commutated Thyristor

IHO

International Hydrographic Organization

ILS

Instrument Landing System

IMU

Inertial Measurement Unit

INS

Inertial Navigation System

IP

Internet Protocol

IRS

Inertial Reference System

IRU

Inertial Reference Unit

ISA

International Standard Atmosphere

ISAR

Inverse Synthetic Aperture Radar

ISO

International Organization for Standardization

ITU

International Telecommunication Union

JT

Joule-Thomson

LIDAR

Light Detection and Ranging

LIDT

Laser Induced Damage Threshold

LOA

Length Overall

LRU

Line Replaceable Unit

LTT

Light Triggering Thyristor

MLS

Microwave Landing Systems

MMIC

Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit

MOCVD

Metal Organic Chemical Vapour Deposition

MOSFET

Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor

MPM

Microwave Power Module

MRF

Magnetorheological Finishing

MRF

Minimum Resolvable Feature size

MRI

Magnetic Resonance Imaging

MTBF

Mean-Time-Between-Failures

MTTF

Mean-Time-To-Failure

NA

Numerical Aperture

NDT

Non-Destructive Test

NEQ

Net Explosive Quantity

NIJ

National Institute of Justice

OAM

Operations, Administration or Maintenance

OSI

Open Systems Interconnection

PAI

Polyamide-imides

PAR

Precision Approach Radar

PCL

Passive Coherent Location

PDK

Process Design Kit

Personal Identification Number

PMR

Private Mobile Radio

PVD

Physical Vapour Deposition

ppm

parts per million

QAM

Quadrature-Amplitude-Modulation

QE

Quantum Efficiency

RAP

Reactive Atom Plasmas

RF

Radio Frequency

rms

root mean square

RNC

Radio Network Controller

RNSS

Regional Navigation Satellite System

ROIC

Read-out Integrated Circuit

S-FIL

Step and Flash Imprint Lithography

SAR

Synthetic Aperture Radar

SAS

Synthetic Aperture Sonar

SC

Single Crystal

SCR

Silicon Controlled Rectifier

SFDR

Spurious Free Dynamic Range

SHPL

Super High Powered Laser

SLAR

Sidelooking Airborne Radar

SOI

Silicon-on-Insulator

SQUID

Superconducting Quantum Interference Device

SRA

Shop Replaceable Assembly

SRAM

Static Random Access Memory

SSB

Single Sideband

SSR

Secondary Surveillance Radar

SSS

Side Scan Sonar

TIR

Total Indicated Reading

TVR

Transmitting Voltage Response

u

Atomic Mass Unit

UPR

Unidirectional Positioning Repeatability

UTS

Ultimate Tensile Strength

UV

Ultraviolet

VJFET

Vertical Junction Field Effect Transistor

VOR

Very High Frequency Omni-directional Range

WHO

World Health Organization

WLAN

Wireless Local Area Network

DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THIS ANNEX

PART II – Category 0

CATEGORY 0 - NUCLEAR MATERIALS, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT

0A Systems, Equipment and Components

0A001

a.

"Nuclear reactors";

b.

Metal vessels, or major shop-fabricated parts therefor, including the reactor vessel head for a reactor pressure vessel, specially designed or prepared to contain the core of a "nuclear reactor";

c.

Manipulative equipment specially designed or prepared for inserting or removing fuel in a "nuclear reactor";

d.

Control rods specially designed or prepared for the control of the fission process in a "nuclear reactor", support or suspension structures therefor, rod drive mechanisms and rod guide tubes;

e.

Pressure tubes specially designed or prepared to contain both fuel elements and the primary coolant in a "nuclear reactor";

f.

Zirconium metal tubes or zirconium alloy tubes (or assembles of tubes) specially designed or prepared for use as fuel cladding in a "nuclear reactor", and in quantities exceeding 10 kg;

N.B.

g.

Coolant pumps or circulators specially designed or prepared for circulating the primary coolant of "nuclear reactors";

h.

'Nuclear reactor internals' specially designed or prepared for use in a "nuclear reactor", including support columns for the core, fuel channels, calandria tubes, thermal shields, baffles, core grid plates, and diffuser plates;

Technical Note:

In 0A001.h. 'nuclear reactor internals' means any major structure within a reactor vessel which has one or more functions such as supporting the core, maintaining fuel alignment, directing primary coolant flow, providing radiation shields for the reactor vessel, and guiding in-core instrumentation.

i.

Heat exchangers as follows:

1.

Steam generators specially designed or prepared for the primary, or intermediate, coolant circuit of a "nuclear reactor";

2.

Other heat exchangers specially designed or prepared for use in the primary coolant circuit of a "nuclear reactor";

Note:

j.

Neutron detectors specially designed or prepared for determining neutron flux levels within the core of a "nuclear reactor";

k.

'External thermal shields' specially designed or prepared for use in a "nuclear reactor" for the reduction of heat loss and also for the containment vessel protection.

Technical Note:

In 0A001.k. 'external thermal shields' means major structures placed over the reactor vessel which reduce heat loss from the reactor and reduce temperature within the containment vessel.

0B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

0B001

a.

Plant specially designed for separating isotopes of "natural uranium", "depleted uranium", or "special fissile materials", as follows:

1.

Gas centrifuge separation plant;

2.

Gaseous diffusion separation plant;

3.

Aerodynamic separation plant;

4.

Chemical exchange separation plant;

5.

Ion-exchange separation plant;

6.

Atomic vapour "laser" isotope separation plant;

7.

Molecular "laser" isotope separation plant;

8.

Plasma separation plant;

9.

Electro magnetic separation plant;

b.

Gas centrifuges and assemblies and components, specially designed or prepared for gas centrifuge separation process, as follows:

Technical Note:

In 0B001.b. 'high strength - to - density ratio material' means any of the following:

1.

Maraging steel capable of an ultimate tensile strength of 1,95 GPa or more;

2.

Aluminium alloys capable of an ultimate tensile strength of 0,46 GPa or more; or

3.

"Fibrous or filamentary materials" with a "specific modulus" of more than 3,18 x 10 6 m and a "specific tensile strength" greater than 7,62 x 10 4 m;

1.

Gas centrifuges;

2.

Complete rotor assemblies;

3.

Rotor tube cylinders with a wall thickness of 12 mm or less, a diameter of between 75 mm and 650 mm, made from 'high strength-to-density ratio materials';

4.

Rings or bellows with a wall thickness of 3 mm or less and a diameter of between 75 mm and 650 mm and designed to give local support to a rotor tube or to join a number together, made from 'high strength-to-density ratio materials';

5.

Baffles of between 75 mm and 650 mm diameter for mounting inside a rotor tube, made from 'high strength-to-density ratio materials';

6.

Top or bottom caps of between 75 mm and 650 mm diameter to fit the ends of a rotor tube, made from 'high strength-to-density ratio materials';

7.

Magnetic suspension bearings as follows:

a.

Bearing assemblies consisting of an annular magnet suspended within a housing made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 " containing a damping medium and having the magnet coupling with a pole piece or second magnet fitted to the top cap of the rotor;

b.

Active magnetic bearings specially designed or prepared for use with gas centrifuges;

8.

Specially prepared bearings comprising a pivot-cup assembly mounted on a damper;

9.

Molecular pumps comprised of cylinders having internally machined or extruded helical grooves and internally machined bores;

10.

Ring-shaped motor stators for multiphase AC hysteresis (or reluctance) motors for synchronous operation within a vacuum at a frequency of 600 Hz or more and a power of 40 VA or more;

11.

Centrifuge housing/recipients to contain the rotor tube assembly of a gas centrifuge, consisting of a rigid cylinder of wall thickness up to 30 mm with precision machined ends that are parallel to each other and perpendicular to the cylinder’s longitudinal axis to within 0,05 ° or less;

12.

Scoops consisting of specially designed or prepared tubes for the extraction of UF 6 gas from within the rotor tube by a Pitot tube action and capable of being fixed to the central gas extraction system;

13.

Frequency changers (converters or inverters) specially designed or prepared to supply motor stators for gas centrifuge enrichment, having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

a.

A multiphase frequency output of 600 Hz or greater; and

b.

High stability (with frequency control better than 0,2%);

14.

Shut-off and control valves as follows:

a.

Shut-off valves specially designed or prepared to act on the feed, product or tails UF 6 gaseous streams of an individual gas centrifuge;

b.

Bellows-sealed valves, shut-off or control, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ", with an inside diameter of 10 mm to 160 mm, specially designed or prepared for use in main or auxiliary systems of gas centrifuge enrichment plants;

c.

Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for gaseous diffusion separation process, as follows:

1.

Gaseous diffusion barriers made of porous metallic, polymer or ceramic "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 " with a pore size of 10 to 100 nm, a thickness of 5 mm or less, and, for tubular forms, a diameter of 25 mm or less;

2.

Gaseous diffuser housings made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ";

3.

Compressors or gas blowers with a suction volume capacity of 1 m 3 /min or more of UF 6 , with a discharge pressure up to 500 kPa, and having a pressure ratio of 10:1 or less, and made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ";

4.

Rotary shaft seals for compressors or blowers specified in 0B001.c.3. and designed for a buffer gas in-leakage rate of less than 1 000 cm 3 /min.;

5.

Heat exchangers made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ", and designed for a leakage pressure rate of less than 10 Pa per hour under a pressure differential of 100 kPa;

6.

Bellows-sealed valves, manual or automated, shut-off or control, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ";

d.

Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for aerodynamic separation process, as follows:

1.

Separation nozzles consisting of slit-shaped, curved channels having a radius of curvature less than 1 mm, resistant to corrosion by UF 6 , and having a knife-edge contained within the nozzle which separates the gas flowing through the nozzle into two streams;

2.

Cylindrical or conical tubes, (vortex tubes), made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 " and with one or more tangential inlets;

3.

Compressors or gas blowers made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ", and rotary shaft seals therefor;

4.

Heat exchangers made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ";

5.

Separation element housings, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 " to contain vortex tubes or separation nozzles;

6.

Bellows-sealed valves, manual or automated, shut-off or control, made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ", with a diameter of 40 mm or more;

7.

Process systems for separating UF 6 from carrier gas (hydrogen or helium) to 1 ppm UF 6 content or less, including:

a.

Cryogenic heat exchangers and cryoseparators capable of temperatures of 153K (-120 o C) or less;

b.

Cryogenic refrigeration units capable of temperatures of 153 K (-120 o C) or less;

c.

Separation nozzle or vortex tube units for the separation of UF 6 from carrier gas;

d.

UF 6 cold traps capable of freezing out UF 6 ;

e.

Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for chemical exchange separation process, as follows:

1.

Fast-exchange liquid-liquid pulse columns with stage residence time of 30 s or less and resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. made of or protected by suitable plastic materials such as fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers or glass);

2.

Fast-exchange liquid-liquid centrifugal contactors with stage residence time of 30 s or less and resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. made of or protected by suitable plastic materials such as fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers or glass);

3.

Electrochemical reduction cells resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid solutions, for reduction of uranium from one valence state to another;

4.

Electrochemical reduction cells feed equipment to take U +4 from the organic stream and, for those parts in contact with the process stream, made of or protected by suitable materials (e.g. glass, fluorocarbon polymers, polyphenyl sulphate, polyether sulfone and resin-impregnated graphite);

5.

Feed preparation systems for producing high purity uranium chloride solution consisting of dissolution, solvent extraction and/or ion exchange equipment for purification and electrolytic cells for reducing the uranium U +6 or U +4 to U +3 ;

6.

Uranium oxidation systems for oxidation of U +3 to U +4 ;

f.

Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for ion-exchange separation process, as follows:

1.

Fast reacting ion-exchange resins, pellicular or porous macro-reticulated resins in which the active chemical exchange groups are limited to a coating on the surface of an inactive porous support structure, and other composite structures in any suitable form, including particles or fibres, with diameters of 0,2 mm or less, resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid and designed to have an exchange rate half-time of less than 10 s and capable of operating at temperatures in the range of 373 K (100 o C) to 473 K (200 o C);

2.

Ion exchange columns (cylindrical) with a diameter greater than 1 000 mm, made of or protected by materials resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. titanium or fluorocarbon plastics) and capable of operating at temperatures in the range of 373 K (100 o C) to 473 K (200 o C) and pressures above 0,7 MPa;

3.

Ion exchange reflux systems (chemical or electrochemical oxidation or reduction systems) for regeneration of the chemical reducing or oxidizing agents used in ion exchange enrichment cascades;

g.

Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for laser-based separation processes using atomic vapour laser isotope separation, as follows:

1.

Uranium metal vaporization systems designed to achieve a delivered power of 1 kW or more on the target for use in laser enrichment;

2.

Liquid or vapour uranium metal handling systems specially designed or prepared for handling molten uranium, molten uranium alloys or uranium metal vapour for use in laser enrichment, and specially designed components therefor;

N.B.

3.

Product and tails collector assemblies for collecting uranium metal in liquid or solid form, made of or protected by materials resistant to the heat and corrosion of uranium metal vapour or liquid, such as yttria-coated graphite or tantalum;

4.

Separator module housings (cylindrical or rectangular vessels) for containing the uranium metal vapour source, the electron beam gun and the product and tails collectors;

5.

"Lasers" or "laser" systems specially designed or prepared for the separation of uranium isotopes with a spectrum frequency stabilisation for operation over extended periods of time;

N.B.

h.

Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for laser-based separation processes using molecular laser isotope separation, as follows:

1.

Supersonic expansion nozzles for cooling mixtures of UF 6 and carrier gas to 150 K (-123 o C) or less and made from "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ";

2.

Product or tails collector components or devices specially designed or prepared for collecting uranium material or uranium tails material following illumination with laser light, made of "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ";

3.

Compressors made of or protected by "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 ", and rotary shaft seals therefor;

4.

Equipment for fluorinating UF 5 (solid) to UF 6 (gas);

5.

Process systems for separating UF 6 from carrier gas (e.g. nitrogen, argon or other gas) including:

a.

Cryogenic heat exchangers and cryoseparators capable of temperatures of 153 K (-120 o C) or less;

b.

Cryogenic refrigeration units capable of temperatures of 153 K (-120 o C) or less;

c.

UF 6 cold traps capable of freezing out UF 6 ;

6.

"Lasers" or "laser" systems specially designed or prepared for the separation of uranium isotopes with a spectrum frequency stabilisation for operation over extended periods of time;

N.B.

i.

Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for plasma separation process, as follows:

1.

Microwave power sources and antennae for producing or accelerating ions, with an output frequency greater than 30 GHz and mean power output greater than 50 kW;

2.

Radio frequency ion excitation coils for frequencies of more than 100 kHz and capable of handling more than 40 kW mean power;

3.

Uranium plasma generation systems;

4.

Not used;

5.

Product and tails collector assemblies for uranium metal in solid form, made of or protected by materials resistant to the heat and corrosion of uranium vapour such as yttria-coated graphite or tantalum;

6.

Separator module housings (cylindrical) for containing the uranium plasma source, radio-frequency drive coil and the product and tails collectors and made of a suitable non-magnetic material (e.g. stainless steel);

j.

Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for electromagnetic separation process, as follows:

1.

Ion sources, single or multiple, consisting of a vapour source, ioniser, and beam accelerator made of suitable non-magnetic materials (e.g. graphite, stainless steel, or copper) and capable of providing a total ion beam current of 50 mA or greater;

2.

Ion collector plates for collection of enriched or depleted uranium ion beams, consisting of two or more slits and pockets and made of suitable non-magnetic materials (e.g. graphite or stainless steel);

3.

Vacuum housings for uranium electromagnetic separators made of non-magnetic materials (e.g. stainless steel) and designed to operate at pressures of 0,1 Pa or lower;

4.

Magnet pole pieces with a diameter greater than 2 m;

5.

High voltage power supplies for ion sources, having all of the following characteristics:

a.

Capable of continuous operation;

b.

Output voltage of 20 000 V or greater;

c.

Output current of 1 A or greater; and

d.

Voltage regulation of better than 0,01% over a period of 8 hours;

N.B.

6.

Magnet power supplies (high power, direct current) having all of the following characteristics:

a.

Capable of continuous operation with a current output of 500 A or greater at a voltage of 100 V or greater; and

b.

Current or voltage regulation better than 0,01% over a period of 8 hours.

N.B.

0B002

a.

Feed autoclaves, ovens or systems used for passing UF 6 to the enrichment process;

b.

Desublimers or cold traps, used to remove UF 6 from the enrichment process for subsequent transfer upon heating;

c.

Product and tails stations for transferring UF 6 into containers;

d.

Liquefaction or solidification stations used to remove UF6 from the enrichment process by compressing, cooling and converting UF 6 to a liquid or solid form;

e.

Piping systems and header systems specially designed or prepared for handling UF 6 within gaseous diffusion, centrifuge or aerodynamic cascades;

f.

Vacuum systems and pumps as follows:

1.

Vacuum manifolds, vacuum headers or vacuum pumps having a suction capacity of 5 m 3 /minute or more;

2.

Vacuum pumps specially designed for use in UF 6 bearing atmospheres made of, or protected by, "materials resistant to corrosion by UF 6 "; or

3.

Vacuum systems consisting of vacuum manifolds, vacuum headers and vacuum pumps, and designed for service in UF 6 -bearing atmospheres;

g.

UF 6 mass spectrometers/ion sources capable of taking on-line samples from UF 6 gas streams and having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Capable of measuring ions of 320 atomic mass units or greater and having a resolution of better than 1 part in 320;

2.

Ion sources constructed of or protected by nickel, nickel-copper alloys with a nickel content of 60% or more by weight, or nickel-chrome alloys;

3.

Electron bombardment ionisation sources; and

4.

Having a collector system suitable for isotopic analysis.

0B003

a.

Systems for the conversion of uranium ore concentrates to UO 3 ;

b.

Systems for the conversion of UO 3 to UF 6 ;

c.

Systems for the conversion of UO 3 to UO 2 ;

d.

Systems for the conversion of UO 2 to UF 4 ;

e.

Systems for the conversion of UF 4 to UF 6 ;

f.

Systems for the conversion of UF 4 to uranium metal;

g.

Systems for the conversion of UF 6 to UO 2 ;

h.

Systems for the conversion of UF 6 to UF 4 ;

i.

Systems for the conversion of UO 2 to UCl 4 .

0B004

a.

Plant for the production of heavy water, deuterium or deuterium compounds, as follows:

1.

Water-hydrogen sulphide exchange plants;

2.

Ammonia-hydrogen exchange plants;

b.

Equipment and components, as follows:

1.

Water-hydrogen sulphide exchange towers with diameters of 1,5 m or more, capable of operating at pressures greater than or equal to 2 MPa;

2.

Single stage, low head (i.e., 0,2 MPa) centrifugal blowers or compressors for hydrogen sulphide gas circulation (i.e., gas containing more than 70% by weight hydrogen sulphide, H 2 S) with a throughput capacity greater than or equal to 56 m 3 /s when operating at pressures greater than or equal to 1,8 MPa suction and having seals designed for wet H 2 S service;

3.

Ammonia-hydrogen exchange towers greater than or equal to 35 m in height with diameters of 1,5 m to 2,5 m capable of operating at pressures greater than 15 MPa;

4.

Tower internals, including stage contactors, and stage pumps, including those which are submersible, for heavy water production utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;

5.

Ammonia crackers with operating pressures greater than or equal to 3 MPa for heavy water production utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;

6.

Infrared absorption analysers capable of on-line hydrogen/deuterium ratio analysis where deuterium concentrations are equal to or greater than 90% by weight;

7.

Catalytic burners for the conversion of enriched deuterium gas into heavy water utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;

8.

Complete heavy water upgrade systems, or columns therefor, for the upgrade of heavy water to reactor-grade deuterium concentration;

9.

Ammonia synthesis converters or synthesis units specially designed or prepared for heavy water production utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process.

0B005

Technical Note:

Specially designed or prepared equipment for the fabrication of "nuclear reactor" fuel elements includes equipment which:

1.

Normally comes into direct contact with or directly processes or controls the production flow of nuclear materials;

2.

Seals the nuclear materials within the cladding;

3.

Checks the integrity of the cladding or the seal;

4.

Checks the finish treatment of the sealed fuel; or

5.

Is used for assembling reactor elements.

0B006

Note:

a.

Plant for the reprocessing of irradiated "nuclear reactor" fuel elements including equipment and components which normally come into direct contact with and directly control the irradiated fuel and the major nuclear material and fission product processing streams;

b.

Fuel element decladding equipment and chopping or shredding machines, i.e., remotely operated equipment to cut, chop or shear irradiated "nuclear reactor" fuel assemblies, bundles or rods;

c.

Dissolver vessels or dissolvers employing mechanical devices specially designed or prepared for the dissolution of irradiated "nuclear reactor" fuel, which are capable of withstanding hot, highly corrosive liquids, and which can be remotely loaded, operated and maintained;

d.

Solvent extractors, such as packed or pulsed columns, mixer settlers or centrifugal contractors, resistant to the corrosive effects of nitric acid and specially designed or prepared for use in a plant for the reprocessing of irradiated "natural uranium", "depleted uranium" or "special fissile materials";

e.

Holding or storage vessels specially designed to be critically safe and resistant to the corrosive effects of nitric acid;

Technical Note:

Holding or storage vessels may have the following features:

1.

Walls or internal structures with a boron equivalent (calculated for all constituent elements as defined in the note to 0C004) of at least two per cent;

2.

A maximum diameter of 175 mm for cylindrical vessels; or

3.

A maximum width of 75 mm for either a slab or annular vessel.

f.

Neutron measurement systems specially designed or prepared for integration and use with automated process control systems in a plant for the reprocessing of irradiated "natural uranium", "depleted uranium" or "special fissile materials".

0B007

a.

Systems for the conversion of plutonium nitrate to oxide;

b.

Systems for plutonium metal production.

0C Materials

0C001

Note:

a.

Four grammes or less of "natural uranium" or "depleted uranium" when contained in a sensing component in instruments;

b.

"Depleted uranium" specially fabricated for the following civil non - nuclear applications:

1.

Shielding;

2.

Packaging;

3.

Ballasts having a mass not greater than 100 kg;

4.

Counter - weights having a mass not greater than 100 kg;

c.

Alloys containing less than 5% thorium;

d.

Ceramic products containing thorium, which have been manufactured for non-nuclear use .

0C002

Note:

0C003

0C004

N.B.

Note 1:

Note 2:

BE Z (ppm) = CF x concentration of element Z in ppm;

and σ B and σ Z are the thermal neutron capture cross sections (in barns) for naturally occurring boron and element Z respectively; and A B and A Z are the atomic masses of naturally occurring boron and element Z respectively.

0C005

0D Software

0D001

0E Technology

0E001

PART III – Category 1

CATEGORY 1 – SPECIAL MATERIALS AND RELATED EQUIPMENT

1A Systems, Equipment and Components

1A001

a.

Seals, gaskets, sealants or fuel bladders, specially designed for "aircraft" or aerospace use, made from more than 50% by weight of any of the materials specified in 1C009.b. or 1C009.c.;

b.

Not used;

c.

Not used.

1A002

N.B.

a.

Made from any of the following:

1.

An organic "matrix" and "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.c. or 1C010.d.: or

2.

Prepregs or preforms specified in 1C010.e.;

b.

Made from a metal or carbon "matrix", and any of the following:

1.

Carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" having all of the following:

a.

A "specific modulus" exceeding 10,15 x 10 6 m; and

b.

A "specific tensile strength" exceeding 17,7 x 10 4 m; or

2.

Materials specified in 1C010.c.

Note 1:

a.

An area not exceeding 1 m 2 ;

b.

A length not exceeding 2,5 m; and

c.

A width exceeding 15 mm.

Note 2:

a.

Sporting goods;

b.

Automotive industry;

c.

Machine tool industry;

d.

Medical applications.

Note 3:

a.

Metal heat-treatment furnaces for tempering metals;

b.

Silicon boule production equipment.

Note 4:

Note 5:

1A003

a.

A thickness exceeding 0,254 mm; or

b.

Coated or laminated with carbon, graphite, metals or magnetic substances.

Note:

N.B.

1A004

N.B.

a.

Full face masks, filter canisters and decontamination equipment therefor, designed or modified for defence against any of the following, and specially designed components therefor:

Note:

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 1A004.a.:

1.

2.

1.

"Biological agents";

2.

'Radioactive materials';

3.

Chemical warfare (CW) agents; or

4.

"Riot control agents", including:

a.

α-Bromobenzeneacetonitrile, (Bromobenzyl cyanide) (CA) (CAS 5798-79-8);

b.

[(2-Chlorophenyl) methylene] propanedinitrile, (o-Chlorobenzylidenemalononitrile) (CS) (CAS 2698-41-1);

c.

2-Chloro-1-phenylethanone, Phenylacyl chloride (ω-chloroacetophenone) (CN) (CAS 532-27-4);

d.

Dibenz-(b,f)-1,4-oxazephine (CR) (CAS 257-07-8);

e.

10-Chloro-5,10-dihydrophenarsazine, (Phenarsazine chloride), (Adamsite), (DM) (CAS 578-94-9);

f.

N-Nonanoylmorpholine, (MPA) (CAS 5299-64-9);

b.

Protective suits, gloves and shoes, specially designed or modified for defence against any of the following:

1.

"Biological agents";

2.

'Radioactive materials'; or

3.

Chemical warfare (CW) agents;

c.

Detection systems, specially designed or modified for detection or identification of any of the following, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

"Biological agents";

2.

'Radioactive materials'; or

3.

Chemical warfare (CW) agents.

d.

Electronic equipment designed for automatically detecting or identifying the presence of "explosives" residues and utilising 'trace detection' techniques (e.g., surface acoustic wave, ion mobility spectrometry, differential mobility spectrometry, mass spectrometry).

Technical Note:

'Trace detection' is defined as the capability to detect less than 1 ppm vapour, or 1 mg solid or liquid.

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note:

a.

Personal radiation monitoring dosimeters;

b.

Occupational health or safety equipment limited by design or function to protect against hazards specific to residential safety or civil industries, including:

1.

mining;

2.

quarrying;

3.

agriculture;

4.

pharmaceutical;

5.

medical;

6.

veterinary;

7.

environmental;

8.

waste management;

9.

food industry.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

1A005

N.B.

a.

Soft body armour not manufactured to military standards or specifications, or to their equivalents, and specially designed components therefor;

b.

Hard body armour plates providing ballistic protection equal to or less than level IIIA (NIJ 0101.06, July 2008), or "equivalent standards".

N.B.

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

1A006

N.B.

a.

Remotely operated vehicles;

b.

'Disruptors'.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 1A006.b. 'disruptors' are devices specially designed for the purpose of preventing the operation of an explosive device by projecting a liquid, solid or frangible projectile.

Note:

1A007

N.B.

a.

Explosive detonator firing sets designed to drive explosive detonators specified in 1A007.b.;

b.

Electrically driven explosive detonators as follows:

1.

Exploding bridge (EB);

2.

Exploding bridge wire (EBW);

3.

Slapper;

4.

Exploding foil initiators (EFI).

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

1A008

a.

'Shaped charges' having all of the following:

1.

Net Explosive Quantity (NEQ) greater than 90 g; and

2.

Outer casing diameter equal to or greater than 75 mm;

b.

Linear shaped cutting charges having all of the following, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

An explosive load greater than 40 g/m; and

2.

A width of 10 mm or more;

c.

Detonating cord with explosive core load greater than 64 g/m;

d.

Cutters, other than those specified in 1A008.b., and severing tools, having a Net Explosive Quantity (NEQ) greater than 3,5 kg.

Technical Note:

'Shaped charges' are explosive charges shaped to focus the effects of the explosive blast.

1A102

1A202

N.B.

a.

An inside diameter of between 75 mm and 400 mm; and

b.

Made with any of the "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.a. or b. or 1C210.a. or with carbon prepreg materials specified in 1C210.c.

1A225

1A226

a.

Made of phosphor bronze mesh chemically treated to improve wettability; and

b.

Designed to be used in vacuum distillation towers.

1A227

a.

A 'cold area' greater than 0,09 m 2 ;

b.

A density greater than 3 g/cm 3 ; and

c.

A thickness of 100 mm or greater.

Technical Note:

In 1A227 the term 'cold area' means the viewing area of the window exposed to the lowest level of radiation in the design application.

1B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

1B001

N.B.

a.

Filament winding machines, of which the motions for positioning, wrapping and winding fibres are coordinated and programmed in three or more 'primary servo positioning' axes, specially designed for the manufacture of "composite" structures or laminates, from "fibrous or filamentary materials";

b.

'Tape-laying machines', of which the motions for positioning and laying tape are coordinated and programmed in five or more 'primary servo positioning' axes, specially designed for the manufacture of "composite" airframe or 'missile' structures;

Note:

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 1B001.b., 'tape-laying machines' have the ability to lay one or more 'filament bands' limited to widths greater than 25,4 mm and less than or equal to 304,8 mm, and to cut and restart individual 'filament band' courses during the laying process.

c.

Multidirectional, multidimensional weaving machines or interlacing machines, including adapters and modification kits, specially designed or modified for weaving, interlacing or braiding fibres, for "composite" structures;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 1B001.c., the technique of interlacing includes knitting.

d.

Equipment specially designed or adapted for the production of reinforcement fibres, as follows:

1.

Equipment for converting polymeric fibres (such as polyacrylonitrile, rayon, pitch or polycarbosilane) into carbon fibres or silicon carbide fibres, including special equipment to strain the fibre during heating;

2.

Equipment for the chemical vapour deposition of elements or compounds, on heated filamentary substrates, to manufacture silicon carbide fibres;

3.

Equipment for the wet-spinning of refractory ceramics (such as aluminium oxide);

4.

Equipment for converting aluminium containing precursor fibres into alumina fibres by heat treatment;

e.

Equipment for producing prepregs specified in 1C010.e. by the hot melt method;

f.

Non-destructive inspection equipment specially designed for "composite" materials, as follows:

1.

X-ray tomography systems for three dimensional defect inspection;

2.

Numerically controlled ultrasonic testing machines of which the motions for positioning transmitters or receivers are simultaneously coordinated and programmed in four or more axes to follow the three dimensional contours of the component under inspection;

g.

'Tow-placement machines', of which the motions for positioning and laying tows are coordinated and programmed in two or more 'primary servo positioning' axes, specially designed for the manufacture of "composite" airframe or 'missile' structures.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 1B001.g., 'tow-placement machines' have the ability to place one or more 'filament bands' having widths less than or equal to 25,4 mm, and to cut and restart individual 'filament band' courses during the placement process.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

1B002

a.

Specially designed to avoid contamination; and

b.

Specially designed for use in one of the processes specified in 1C002.c.2.

N.B.

1B003

a.

Airframe or aerospace structures;

b.

"Aircraft" or aerospace engines; or

c.

Specially designed components for structures specified in 1B003.a. or for engines specified in 1B003.b.

1B101

N.B.

Note:

a.

Filament winding machines or fibre placement machines, of which the motions for positioning, wrapping and winding fibres can be coordinated and programmed in three or more axes, designed to fabricate composite structures or laminates from "fibrous or filamentary materials", and coordinating and programming controls;

b.

Tape-laying machines of which the motions for positioning and laying tape and sheets can be coordinated and programmed in two or more axes, designed for the manufacture of composite airframe and "missile" structures;

c.

Equipment designed or modified for the "production" of "fibrous or filamentary materials" as follows:

1.

Equipment for converting polymeric fibres (such as polyacrylonitrile, rayon or polycarbosilane) including special provision to strain the fibre during heating;

2.

Equipment for the vapour deposition of elements or compounds on heated filament substrates;

3.

Equipment for the wet-spinning of refractory ceramics (such as aluminium oxide);

d.

Equipment designed or modified for special fibre surface treatment or for producing prepregs and preforms specified in entry 9C110.

Note:

1B102

N.B.

a.

Metal powder "production equipment" usable for the "production", in a controlled environment, of spherical, spheroidal or atomised materials specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111.a.1., 1C111.a.2. or in the Military Goods Controls.

b.

Specially designed components for "production equipment" specified in 1B002 or 1B102.a.

Note:

a.

Plasma generators (high frequency arc-jet) usable for obtaining sputtered or spherical metallic powders with organization of the process in an argon-water environment;

b.

Electroburst equipment usable for obtaining sputtered or spherical metallic powders with organization of the process in an argon-water environment;

c.

Equipment usable for the "production" of spherical aluminium powders by powdering a melt in an inert medium (e.g. nitrogen).

1B115

a.

"Production equipment" for the "production", handling or acceptance testing of liquid propellants or propellant constituents specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 or in the Military Goods Controls;

b.

"Production equipment" for the "production", handling, mixing, curing, casting, pressing, machining, extruding or acceptance testing of solid propellants or propellant constituents specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 or in the Military Goods Controls.

Note:

Note 1:

Note 2:

1B116

1B117

a.

Designed or modified for mixing under vacuum in the range of zero to 13,326 kPa:

b.

Capable of controlling the temperature of the mixing chamber;

c.

A total volumetric capacity of 110 litres or more; and

d.

At least one 'mixing/kneading shaft' mounted off centre.

Note:

1B118

a.

Designed or modified for mixing under vacuum in the range of zero to 13,326 kPa;

b.

Capable of controlling the temperature of the mixing chamber;

c.

any of the following:

1.

Two or more mixing/kneading shafts; or

2.

All of the following:

a.

A single rotating and oscillating shaft with kneading teeth/pins; and

b.

Kneading teeth/pins inside the casing of the mixing chamber.

1B119

1B201

a.

Filament winding machines having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Having motions for positioning, wrapping, and winding fibres coordinated and programmed in two or more axes;

2.

Specially designed to fabricate composite structures or laminates from "fibrous or filamentary materials"; and

3.

Capable of winding cylindrical tubes with an internal diameter between 75 and 650 mm and lengths of 300 mm or greater;

b.

Coordinating and programming controls for the filament winding machines specified in 1B201.a.;

c.

Precision mandrels for the filament winding machines specified in 1B201.a.

1B225

1B226

Note:

a.

Capable of enriching stable isotopes;

b.

With the ion sources and collectors both in the magnetic field and those configurations in which they are external to the field.

1B228

a.

Designed for operation with internal temperatures of 35 K (-238°C) or less;

b.

Designed for operation at an internal pressure of 0,5 to 5 MPa;

c.

Constructed of either:

1.

Stainless steel of the Society of Automotive Engineers International (SAE) 300 series with low sulphur content and with an austenitic ASTM (or equivalent standard) grain size number of 5 or greater; or

2.

Equivalent materials which are both cryogenic and hydrogen (H 2 )-compatible; and

d.

With internal diameters of 30 cm or greater and 'effective lengths' of 4 m or greater.

Technical Note:

In 1B228 'effective length' means the active height of packing material in a packed-type column, or the active height of internal contactor plates in a plate-type column.

1B230

a.

Airtight (i.e., hermetically sealed);

b.

A capacity greater than 8,5 m 3 /h; and

c.

Either of the following characteristics:

1.

For concentrated potassium amide solutions (1% or greater), an operating pressure of 1,5 to 60 MPa; or

2.

For dilute potassium amide solutions (less than 1%), an operating pressure of 20 to 60 MPa.

1B231

a.

Facilities or plants for the production, recovery, extraction, concentration, or handling of tritium;

b.

Equipment for tritium facilities or plants, as follows:

1.

Hydrogen or helium refrigeration units capable of cooling to 23 K (-250°C) or less, with heat removal capacity greater than 150 W;

2.

Hydrogen isotope storage or hydrogen isotope purification systems using metal hydrides as the storage or purification medium.

1B232

a.

Designed for operation with an outlet temperature of 35 K (-238°C) or less; and

b.

Designed for a throughput of hydrogen gas of 1 000 kg/h or greater.

1B233

a.

Facilities or plants for the separation of lithium isotopes;

b.

Equipment for the separation of lithium isotopes based on the lithium-mercury amalgam process, as follows:

1.

Packed liquid-liquid exchange columns specially designed for lithium amalgams;

2.

Mercury or lithium amalgam pumps;

3.

Lithium amalgam electrolysis cells;

4.

Evaporators for concentrated lithium hydroxide solution;

c.

Ion exchange systems specially designed for lithium isotope separation, and specially designed components therefor;

d.

Chemical exchange systems (employing crown ethers, cryptands, or lariat ethers), specially designed for lithium isotope separation, and specially designed components therefor.

1B234

N.B.

a.

Designed to fully contain an explosion equivalent to 2 kg of trinitrotoluene (TNT) or greater; and

b.

Having design elements or features enabling real time or delayed transfer of diagnostic or measurement information.

1B235

a.

Target assemblies made of or containing lithium enriched in the lithium-6 isotope specially designed for the production of tritium through irradiation, including insertion in a nuclear reactor;

b.

Components specially designed for the target assemblies specified in 1B235.a.

Technical Note:

Components specially designed for target assemblies for the production of tritium may include lithium pellets, tritium getters, and specially-coated cladding.

1C Materials

Technical Note:

Metals and alloys:

Unless provision to the contrary is made, the words 'metals' and 'alloys' in 1C001 to 1C012 cover crude and semi-fabricated forms, as follows:

Crude forms:

Anodes, balls, bars (including notched bars and wire bars), billets, blocks, blooms, brickets, cakes, cathodes, crystals, cubes, dice, grains, granules, ingots, lumps, pellets, pigs, powder, rondelles, shot, slabs, slugs, sponge, sticks;

Semi-fabricated forms (whether or not coated, plated, drilled or punched):

a.

Wrought or worked materials fabricated by rolling, drawing, extruding, forging, impact extruding, pressing, graining, atomising, and grinding, i.e.: angles, channels, circles, discs, dust, flakes, foils and leaf, forging, plate, powder, pressings and stampings, ribbons, rings, rods (including bare welding rods, wire rods, and rolled wire), sections, shapes, sheets, strip, pipe and tubes (including tube rounds, squares, and hollows), drawn or extruded wire;

b.

Cast material produced by casting in sand, die, metal, plaster or other types of moulds, including high pressure castings, sintered forms, and forms made by powder metallurgy.

The object of the control should not be defeated by the export of non-listed forms alleged to be finished products but representing in reality crude forms or semi-fabricated forms.

1C001

N.B.

a.

Materials for absorbing frequencies exceeding 2 x 10 8 Hz but less than 3 x 10 12 Hz;

Note 1:

a.

Hair type absorbers, constructed of natural or synthetic fibres, with non-magnetic loading to provide absorption;

b.

Absorbers having no magnetic loss and whose incident surface is non-planar in shape, including pyramids, cones, wedges and convoluted surfaces;

c.

Planar absorbers, having all of the following:

1.

Made from any of the following:

a.

Plastic foam materials (flexible or non-flexible) with carbon-loading, or organic materials, including binders, providing more than 5% echo compared with metal over a bandwidth exceeding ±15% of the centre frequency of the incident energy, and not capable of withstanding temperatures exceeding 450 K (177°C); or

b.

Ceramic materials providing more than 20% echo compared with metal over a bandwidth exceeding ±15% of the centre frequency of the incident energy, and not capable of withstanding temperatures exceeding 800 K (527°C);

Technical Note:

Absorption test samples for 1C001.a. Note: 1.c.1. should be a square at least 5 wavelengths of the centre frequency on a side and positioned in the far field of the radiating element.

2.

Tensile strength less than 7 x 10 6 N/m 2 ; and

3.

Compressive strength less than 14 x 10 6 N/m 2 ;

d.

Planar absorbers made of sintered ferrite, having all of the following :

1.

A specific gravity exceeding 4,4; and

2.

A maximum operating temperature of 548 K (275°C) or less;

e.

Planar absorbers having no magnetic loss and fabricated from 'open-cell foam' plastic material with a density of 0,15 g/cm 3 or less.

Technical Note:

'Open-cell foams' are flexible and porous materials, having an inner structure open to the atmosphere. 'Open-cell foams' are also known as reticulated foams.

Note 2:

b.

Materials not transparent to visible light and specially designed for absorbing near-infrared radiation having a wavelength exceeding 810 nm but less than 2 000 nm (frequencies exceeding 150 THz but less than 370 THz);

Note:

a.

"Laser" marking of polymers; or

b.

"Laser" welding of polymers.

c.

Intrinsically conductive polymeric materials with a 'bulk electrical conductivity' exceeding 10 000 S/m (Siemens per metre) or a 'sheet (surface) resistivity' of less than 100 ohms/square , based on any of the following polymers:

1.

Polyaniline;

2.

Polypyrrole;

3.

Polythiophene;

4.

Poly phenylene-vinylene; or

5.

Poly thienylene-vinylene.

Note:

Technical Note:

'Bulk electrical conductivity' and 'sheet (surface) resistivity' should be determined using ASTM D-257 or national equivalents.

1C002

N.B.

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

a.

Aluminides, as follows:

1.

Nickel aluminides containing a minimum of 15% by weight aluminium, a maximum of 38% by weight aluminium and at least one additional alloying element;

2.

Titanium aluminides containing 10% by weight or more aluminium and at least one additional alloying element;

b.

Metal alloys, as follows, made from the powder or particulate material specified in 1C002.c.:

1.

Nickel alloys having any of the following:

a.

A 'stress-rupture life' of 10 000 hours or longer at 923 K (650°C) at a stress of 676 MPa; or

b.

A 'low cycle fatigue life' of 10 000 cycles or more at 823 K (550°C) at a maximum stress of 1 095 MPa;

2.

Niobium alloys having any of the following:

a.

A 'stress-rupture life' of 10 000 hours or longer at 1 073 K (800°C) at a stress of 400 MPa; or

b.

A 'low cycle fatigue life' of 10 000 cycles or more at 973 K (700°C) at a maximum stress of 700 MPa;

3.

Titanium alloys having any of the following:

a.

A 'stress-rupture life' of 10 000 hours or longer at 723 K (450°C) at a stress of 200 MPa; or

b.

A 'low cycle fatigue life' of 10 000 cycles or more at 723 K (450°C) at a maximum stress of 400 MPa;

4.

Aluminium alloys having any of the following:

a.

A tensile strength of 240 MPa or more at 473 K (200°C); or

b.

A tensile strength of 415 MPa or more at 298 K (25°C);

5.

Magnesium alloys having all of the following:

a.

A tensile strength of 345 MPa or more; and

b.

A corrosion rate of less than 1 mm/year in 3% sodium chloride aqueous solution measured in accordance with ASTM standard G-31 or national equivalents;

c.

Metal alloy powder or particulate material, having all of the following:

1.

Made from any of the following composition systems:

Technical Note:

X in the following equals one or more alloying elements.

a.

Nickel alloys (Ni-Al-X, Ni-X-Al) qualified for turbine engine parts or components, i.e. with less than 3 non-metallic particles (introduced during the manufacturing process) larger than 100 μm in 10 9 alloy particles;

b.

Niobium alloys (Nb-Al-X or Nb-X-Al, Nb-Si-X or Nb-X-Si, Nb-Ti-X or Nb-X-Ti);

c.

Titanium alloys (Ti-Al-X or Ti-X-Al);

d.

Aluminium alloys (Al-Mg-X or Al-X-Mg, Al-Zn-X or Al-X-Zn, Al-Fe-X or Al-X-Fe); or

e.

Magnesium alloys (Mg-Al-X or Mg-X-Al);

2.

Made in a controlled environment by any of the following processes:

a.

'Vacuum atomisation';

b.

'Gas atomisation';

c.

'Rotary atomisation';

d.

'Splat quenching';

e.

'Melt spinning' and 'comminution';

f.

'Melt extraction' and 'comminution';

g.

'Mechanical alloying'; or

h.

'Plasma atomisation'; and

3.

Capable of forming materials specified in 1C002.a. or 1C002.b.;

d.

Alloyed materials having all of the following:

1.

Made from any of the composition systems specified in 1C002.c.1.;

2.

In the form of uncomminuted flakes, ribbons or thin rods; and

3.

Produced in a controlled environment by any of the following:

a.

'Splat quenching';

b.

'Melt spinning'; or

c.

'Melt extraction'.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

1C003

a.

Initial relative permeability of 120 000 or more and a thickness of 0,05 mm or less;

Technical Note:

Measurement of initial relative permeability must be performed on fully annealed materials.

b.

Magnetostrictive alloys having any of the following:

1.

A saturation magnetostriction of more than 5 x 10 -4 ; or

2.

A magnetomechanical coupling factor (k) of more than 0,8; or

c.

Amorphous or 'nanocrystalline' alloy strips, having all of the following:

1.

A composition having a minimum of 75% by weight of iron, cobalt or nickel;

2.

A saturation magnetic induction (B s ) of 1,6 T or more; and

3.

Any of the following:

a.

A strip thickness of 0,02 mm or less; or

b.

An electrical resistivity of 2 x 10 -4 ohm cm or more.

Technical Note:

'Nanocrystalline' materials in 1C003.c. are those materials having a crystal grain size of 50 nm or less, as determined by X-ray diffraction.

1C004

a.

A density exceeding 17,5 g/cm 3 ;

b.

An elastic limit exceeding 880 MPa;

c.

An ultimate tensile strength exceeding 1 270 MPa; and

d.

An elongation exceeding 8%.

1C005

a.

"Superconductive""composite" conductors containing one or more niobium-titanium 'filaments', having all of the following:

1.

Embedded in a "matrix" other than a copper or copper-based mixed "matrix"; and

2.

Having a cross-section area less than 0,28 x 10 -4 mm 2 (6 μm in diameter for circular 'filaments');

b.

"Superconductive""composite" conductors consisting of one or more "superconductive" 'filaments' other than niobium-titanium, having all of the following:

1.

A "critical temperature" at zero magnetic induction exceeding 9,85 K (-263,31°C); and

2.

Remaining in the "superconductive" state at a temperature of 4,2 K (-268,96°C) when exposed to a magnetic field oriented in any direction perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of conductor and corresponding to a magnetic induction of 12 T with critical current density exceeding 1 750 A/mm 2 on overall cross-section of the conductor;

c.

"Superconductive""composite" conductors consisting of one or more "superconductive" 'filaments' which remain "superconductive" above 115 K (-158,16°C).

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 1C005 'filaments' may be in wire, cylinder, film, tape or ribbon form.

1C006

a.

Not used;

b.

Lubricating materials containing, as their principal ingredients, any of the following:

1.

Phenylene or alkylphenylene ethers or thio-ethers, or their mixtures, containing more than two ether or thio-ether functions or mixtures thereof; or

2.

Fluorinated silicone fluids with a kinematic viscosity of less than 5 000 mm 2 /s (5 000 centistokes) measured at 298 K (25°C);

c.

Damping or flotation fluids having all of the following:

1.

Purity exceeding 99,8%;

2.

Containing less than 25 particles of 200 μm or larger in size per 100 ml; and

3.

Made from at least 85% of any of the following:

a.

Dibromotetrafluoroethane (CAS 25497-30-7, 124-73-2, 27336-23-8);

b.

Polychlorotrifluoroethylene (oily and waxy modifications only); or

c.

Polybromotrifluoroethylene;

d.

Fluorocarbon fluids designed for electronic cooling and having all of the following:

1.

Containing 85% by weight or more of any of the following, or mixtures thereof:

a.

Monomeric forms of perfluoropolyalkylether-triazines or perfluoroaliphatic-ethers;

b.

Perfluoroalkylamines;

c.

Perfluorocycloalkanes; or

d.

Perfluoroalkanes;

2.

Density at 298 K (25°C) of 1,5 g/ml or more;

3.

In a liquid state at 273 K (0°C); and

4.

Containing 60% or more by weight of fluorine.

Note:

1C007

N.B.

a.

Ceramic powders of titanium diboride (TiB 2 ) (CAS 12045-63-5) having total metallic impurities, excluding intentional additions, of less than 5 000 ppm, an average particle size equal to or less than 5 μm and no more than 10% of the particles larger than 10 μm;

b.

Not used;

c.

Ceramic-"matrix""composite" materials as follows:

1.

Ceramic-ceramic "composite" materials with a glass or oxide-"matrix" and reinforced with any of the following:

a.

Continuous fibres made from any of the following materials:

1.

Al 2 O 3 (CAS 1344-28-1); or

2.

Si-C-N; or

Note:

b.

Fibres being all of the following:

1.

Made from any of the following materials:

a.

Si-N;

b.

Si-C;

c.

Si-Al-O-N; or

d.

Si-O-N; and

2.

Having a "specific tensile strength" exceeding 12,7 x 10 3 m;

2.

Ceramic “matrix”"composite" materials, with a "matrix" formed of carbides or nitrides of silicon, zirconium or boron;

d.

Not used;

e.

'Precursor materials' specially designed for the "production" of materials specified in 1C007.c., as follows:

1.

Polydiorganosilanes;

2.

Polysilazanes;

3.

Polycarbosilazanes;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 1C007, 'precursor materials' are special purpose polymeric or metallo-organic materials used for the "production" of silicon carbide, silicon nitride, or ceramics with silicon, carbon and nitrogen.

f.

Not used.

1C008

a.

Imides, as follows:

1.

Bismaleimides;

2.

Aromatic polyamide-imides (PAI) having a 'glass transition temperature (T g )' exceeding 563 K (290°C);

3.

Aromatic polyimides having a 'glass transition temperature (T g )' exceeding 505 K (232°C);

4.

Aromatic polyetherimides having a 'glass transition temperature (T g )' exceeding 563 K (290°C);

Note:

N.B.

b.

Not used;

c.

Not used;

d.

Polyarylene ketones;

e.

Polyarylene sulphides, where the arylene group is biphenylene, triphenylene or combinations thereof;

f.

Polybiphenylenethersulphone having a 'glass transition temperature (T g )' exceeding 563 K (290°C).

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

1C009

a.

Not used;

b.

Fluorinated polyimides containing 10% by weight or more of combined fluorine;

c.

Fluorinated phosphazene elastomers containing 30% by weight or more of combined fluorine.

1C010

N.B.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

a.

Organic "fibrous or filamentary materials", having all of the following:

1.

"Specific modulus" exceeding 12,7 x 10 6 m; and

2.

"Specific tensile strength" exceeding 23,5 x 10 4 m;

Note:

b.

Carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials", having all of the following:

1.

"Specific modulus" exceeding 14,65 x 10 6 m; and

2.

"Specific tensile strength" exceeding 26,82 x 10 4 m;

Note:

a.

"Fibrous or filamentary materials", for the repair of "civil aircraft" structures or laminates, having all of the following:

1.

An area not exceeding 1 m 2 ;

2.

A length not exceeding 2,5 m; and

3.

A width exceeding 15 mm.

b.

Mechanically chopped, milled or cut carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" 25,0 mm or less in length.

c.

Inorganic "fibrous or filamentary materials", having all of the following:

1.

Having any of the following:

a.

Composed of 50% or more by weight silicon dioxide and having a "specific modulus" exceeding 2,54 x 10 6 m; or

b.

Not specified in 1C010.c.1.a. and having a "specific modulus" exceeding 5,6 x 10 6 m; and

2.

Melting, softening, decomposition or sublimation point exceeding 1 922 K (1 649°C) in an inert environment;

Note:

a.

Discontinuous, multiphase, polycrystalline alumina fibres in chopped fibre or random mat form, containing 3% by weight or more silica, with a "specific modulus" of less than 10 x 10 6 m;

b.

Molybdenum and molybdenum alloy fibres;

c.

Boron fibres;

d.

Discontinuous ceramic fibres with a melting, softening, decomposition or sublimation point lower than 2 043 K (1 770°C) in an inert environment.

d.

"Fibrous or filamentary materials", having any of the following:

1.

Composed of any of the following:

a.

Polyetherimides specified in 1C008.a.; or

b.

Materials specified in 1C008.d. to 1C008.f.; or

2.

Composed of materials specified in 1C010.d.1.a. or 1C010.d.1.b. and 'commingled' with other fibres specified in 1C010.a., 1C010.b. or 1C010.c.;

Technical Note:

'Commingled' is filament to filament blending of thermoplastic fibres and reinforcement fibres in order to produce a fibre reinforcement "matrix" mix in total fibre form.

e.

Fully or partially resin-impregnated or pitch-impregnated "fibrous or filamentary materials" (prepregs), metal or carbon-coated "fibrous or filamentary materials" (preforms) or 'carbon fibre preforms', having all of the following:

1.

Having any of the following:

a.

Inorganic "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.c.; or

b.

Organic or carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials", having all of the following:

1.

"Specific modulus" exceeding 10,15 x 10 6 m; and

2.

"Specific tensile strength" exceeding 17,7 x 10 4 m; and

2.

Having any of the following:

a.

Resin or pitch, specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b.;

b.

'Dynamic Mechanical Analysis glass transition temperature (DMA T g )' equal to or exceeding 453 K (180 o C) and having a phenolic resin; or

c.

'Dynamic Mechanical Analysis glass transition temperature (DMA T g )' equal to or exceeding 505 K (232 o C) and having a resin or pitch, not specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b., and not being a phenolic resin;

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

Epoxy resin "matrix" impregnated carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" (prepregs) for the repair of "civil aircraft" structures or laminates, having all the following;

1.

An area not exceeding 1 m 2 ;

2.

A length not exceeding 2,5 m; and

3.

A width exceeding 15 mm.

b.

Fully or partially resin-impregnated or pitch-impregnated mechanically chopped, milled or cut carbon "fibrous or filamentary materials" 25,0 mm or less in length when using a resin or pitch other than those specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

1C011

N.B.

a.

Metals in particle sizes of less than 60 μm whether spherical, atomised, spheroidal, flaked or ground, manufactured from material consisting of 99% or more of zirconium, magnesium and alloys thereof;

Technical Note:

The natural content of hafnium in the zirconium (typically 2% to 7%) is counted with the zirconium.

Note:

b.

Boron or boron alloys, with a particle size of 60 μm or less, as follows:

1.

Boron with a purity of 85% by weight or more;

2.

Boron alloys with a boron content of 85% by weight or more;

Note:

c.

Guanidine nitrate (CAS 506-93-4);

d.

Nitroguanidine (NQ) (CAS 556-88-7).

N.B.

1C012

Technical Note:

These materials are typically used for nuclear heat sources.

a.

Plutonium in any form with a plutonium isotopic assay of plutonium-238 of more than 50% by weight;

Note:

a.

Shipments with a plutonium content of 1 g or less;

b.

Shipments of 3 "effective grammes" or less when contained in a sensing component in instruments.

b.

"Previously separated" neptunium-237 in any form.

Note:

1C101

Note 1:

a.

Structural materials and coatings specially designed for reduced radar reflectivity;

b.

Coatings, including paints, specially designed for reduced or tailored reflectivity or emissivity in the microwave, infrared or ultraviolet regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.

Note 2:

Technical Note:

In 1C101 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

1C102

1C107

a.

Fine grain graphites with a bulk density of 1,72 g/cm 3 or greater, measured at 288 K (15°C), and having a grain size of 100 μm or less, usable for rocket nozzles and re-entry vehicle nose tips, which can be machined to any of the following products:

1.

Cylinders having a diameter of 120 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater;

2.

Tubes having an inner diameter of 65 mm or greater and a wall thickness of 25 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater; or

3.

Blocks having a size of 120 mm x 120 mm x 50 mm or greater;

N.B.

b.

Pyrolytic or fibrous reinforced graphites, usable for rocket nozzles and reentry vehicle nose tips usable in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;

N.B.

c.

Ceramic composite materials (dielectric constant less than 6 at any frequency from 100 MHz to 100 GHz) for use in radomes usable in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;

d.

Bulk machinable silicon-carbide reinforced unfired ceramic, usable for nose tips usable in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;

e.

Reinforced silicon-carbide ceramic composites, usable for nose tips, reentry vehicles and nozzle flaps usable in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;

f.

Bulk machinable ceramic composite materials consisting of an 'Ultra High Temperature Ceramic (UHTC)' matrix with a melting point equal to or greater than 3 000°C and reinforced with fibres or filaments, usable for missile components (such as nose-tips, re-entry vehicles, leading edges, jet vanes, control surfaces or rocket motor throat inserts) in "missiles", space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or 'missiles'.

Note:

Technical Note 1:

In 1C107.f. 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

Technical Note 2:

'Ultra High Temperature Ceramics (UHTC)' includes:

1.

Titanium diboride (TiB 2 );

2.

Zirconium diboride (ZrB 2 );

3.

Niobium diboride (NbB 2 );

4.

Hafnium diboride (HfB 2 );

5.

Tantalum diboride (TaB 2 );

6.

Titanium carbide (TiC);

7.

Zirconium carbide (ZrC);

8.

Niobium carbide (NbC);

9.

Hafnium carbide (HfC);

10.

Tantalum carbide (TaC).

1C111

a.

Propulsive substances:

1.

Spherical or spheroidal aluminium powder other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, in particle size of less than 200 μm and an aluminium content of 97% by weight or more, if at least 10% of the total weight is made up of particles of less than 63 μm, according to ISO 2591-1:1988 or national equivalents;

Technical Note:

A particle size of 63 μm (ISO R-565) corresponds to 250 mesh (Tyler) or 230 mesh (ASTM standard E-11).

2.

Metal powders, other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, as follows:

a.

Metal powders of zirconium, beryllium or magnesium, or alloys of these metals, if at least 90% of the total particles by particle volume or weight are made up of particles of less than 60 μm (determined by measurement techniques such as using a sieve, laser diffraction or optical scanning), whether spherical, atomised, spheroidal, flaked or ground, consisting 97% by weight or more of any of the following:

1.

Zirconium;

2.

Beryllium; or

3.

Magnesium;

Technical Note:

The natural content of hafnium in the zirconium (typically 2% to 7%) is counted with the zirconium.

b.

Metal powders of either boron or boron alloys with a boron content of 85% or more by weight, if at least 90% of the total particles by particle volume or weight are made up of particles of less than 60 μm (determined by measurement techniques such as using a sieve, laser diffraction or optical scanning), whether spherical, atomised, spheroidal, flaked or ground;

Note:

3.

Oxidiser substances usable in liquid propellant rocket engines as follows:

a.

Dinitrogen trioxide (CAS 10544-73-7);

b.

Nitrogen dioxide (CAS 10102-44-0)/dinitrogen tetroxide (CAS 10544-72-6);

c.

Dinitrogen pentoxide (CAS 10102-03-1);

d.

Mixed Oxides of Nitrogen (MON);

Technical Note:

Mixed Oxides of Nitrogen (MON) are solutions of Nitric Oxide (NO) in Dinitrogen Tetroxide/Nitrogen Dioxide (N 2 O 4 /NO 2 ) that can be used in missile systems. There are a range of compositions that can be denoted as MONi or MONij, where i and j are integers representing the percentage of Nitric Oxide in the mixture (e.g., MON3 contains 3% Nitric Oxide, MON25 25% Nitric Oxide. An upper limit is MON40, 40% by weight).

e.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Inhibited Red Fuming Nitric Acid (IRFNA);

f.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS AND 1C238 FOR compounds composed of fluorine and one or more of other halogens, oxygen or nitrogen.

4.

Hydrazine derivatives as follows:

N.B.

a.

Trimethylhydrazine (CAS 1741-01-1);

b.

Tetramethylhydrazine (CAS 6415-12-9);

c.

N,N-Diallylhydrazine (CAS 5164-11-4);

d.

Allylhydrazine (CAS 7422-78-8);

e.

Ethylene dihydrazine (CAS 6068-98-0);

f.

Monomethylhydrazine dinitrate;

g.

Unsymmetrical dimethylhydrazine nitrate;

h.

Hydrazinium azide (CAS 14546-44-2);

i.

1,1-Dimethylhydrazinium azide (CAS 227955-52-4) / 1,2-Dimethylhydrazinium azide (CAS 299177-50-7);

j.

Hydrazinium dinitrate (CAS 13464-98-7);

k.

Diimido oxalic acid dihydrazine (CAS 3457-37-2);

l.

2-hydroxyethylhydrazine nitrate (HEHN);

m.

See Military Goods Controls for Hydrazinium perchlorate;

n.

Hydrazinium diperchlorate (CAS 13812-39-0);

o.

Methylhydrazine nitrate (MHN) (CAS 29674-96-2);

p.

1,1-Diethylhydrazine nitrate (DEHN) / 1,2-Diethylhydrazine nitrate (DEHN) (CAS 363453-17-2);

q.

3,6-Dihydrazino tetrazine nitrate (1,4-dihydrazine nitrate) (DHTN);

5.

High energy density materials, other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, usable in 'missiles' or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a.;

a.

Mixed fuel that incorporate both solid and liquid fuels, such as boron slurry, having a mass-based energy density of 40 x 10 6 J/kg or greater;

b.

Other high energy density fuels and fuel additives (e.g., cubane, ionic solutions, JP-10) having a volume-based energy density of 37,5 x 10 9 J/m 3 or greater, measured at 20°C and one atmosphere (101,325 kPa) pressure;

Note:

Technical Note:

In 1C111.a.5. 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

6.

Hydrazine replacement fuels as follows:

a.

2-Dimethylaminoethylazide (DMAZ) (CAS 86147-04-8);

b.

Polymeric substances:

1.

Carboxy-terminated polybutadiene (including carboxyl-terminated polybutadiene) (CTPB);

2.

Hydroxy-terminated polybutadiene (including hydroxyl-terminated polybutadiene) (HTPB) (CAS 69102-90-5), other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls;

3.

Polybutadiene-acrylic acid (PBAA);

4.

Polybutadiene-acrylic acid-acrylonitrile (PBAN) (CAS 25265-19-4 / CAS 68891-50-9);

5.

Polytetrahydrofuran polyethylene glycol (TPEG);

Technical Note:

Polytetrahydrofuran polyethylene glycol (TPEG) is a block co-polymer of poly 1,4-Butanediol (CAS 110-63-4) and polyethylene glycol (PEG) (CAS 25322-68-3).

6.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR polyglycidyl nitrate (PGN or poly-GLYN) (CAS 27814-48- 8).

c.

Other propellant additives and agents:

1.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Carboranes, decaboranes, pentaboranes and derivatives thereof;

2.

Triethylene glycol dinitrate (TEGDN) (CAS 111-22-8);

3.

2-Nitrodiphenylamine (CAS 119-75-5);

4.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR trimethylolethane trinitrate (TMETN) (CAS 3032-55-1);

5.

Diethylene glycol dinitrate (DEGDN) (CAS 693-21-0);

6.

Ferrocene derivatives as follows:

a.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR catocene (CAS 37206-42-1);

b.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Ethyl ferrocene (CAS 1273-89-8);

c.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR n-Propyl ferrocene (CAS 1273-92-3)/iso-propyl ferrocene (CAS 12126-81-7);

d.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR n-butyl ferrocene (CAS 31904-29-7);

e.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Pentyl ferrocene (CAS 1274-00-6);

f.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dicyclopentyl ferrocene (CAS 125861-17-8);

g.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dicyclohexyl ferrocene;

h.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Diethyl ferrocene (CAS 1273-97-8);

i.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dipropyl ferrocene;

j.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dibutyl ferrocene (CAS 1274-08-4);

k.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Dihexyl ferrocene (CAS 93894-59-8);

l.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Acetyl ferrocene (CAS 1271-55-2) / 1,1'-diacetyl ferrocene (CAS 1273-94-5);

m.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Ferrocene carboxylic acid (CAS 1271-42-7) / 1,1'-Ferrocenedicarboxylic acid (CAS 1293-87-4) ;

n.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR butacene (CAS 125856-62-4);

o.

Other ferrocene derivatives usable as rocket propellant burning rate modifiers, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls.

Note:

7.

4,5-Diazidomethyl-2-methyl-1,2,3-triazole (iso-DAMTR), other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls.

d.

'Gel propellants', other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, specifically formulated for use in 'missiles'.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

Note:

1C116

N.B.

a.

Having an ultimate tensile strength, measured at 293 K (20°C), equal to or greater than:

1.

0,9 GPa in the solution annealed stage; or

2.

1,5 GPa in the precipitation hardened stage; and

b.

Any of the following forms:

1.

Sheet, plate or tubing with a wall or plate thickness equal to or less than 5,0 mm;

2.

Tubular forms with a wall thickness equal to or less than 50 mm and having an inner diameter equal to or greater than 270 mm.

Technical Note 1:

Maraging steels are iron alloy:

1.

Generally characterised by high nickel, very low carbon content and the use of substitutional elements or precipitates to produce strengthening and age-hardening of the alloy; and

2.

Subjected to heat treatment cycles to facilitate the martensitic transformation process (solution annealed stage) and subsequently age hardened (precipitation hardened stage).

Technical Note 2:

In 1C116 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

1C117

a.

Tungsten and alloys in particulate form with a tungsten content of 97% by weight or more and a particle size of 50 x 10 -6 m (50 μm) or less;

b.

Molybdenum and alloys in particulate form with a molybdenum content of 97% by weight or more and a particle size of 50 x 10 -6 m (50 μm) or less;

c.

Tungsten materials in solid form having all of the following:

1.

Any of the following material compositions:

a.

Tungsten and alloys containing 97% by weight or more of tungsten;

b.

Copper infiltrated tungsten containing 80% by weight or more of tungsten; or

c.

Silver infiltrated tungsten containing 80% by weight or more of tungsten; and

2.

Able to be machined to any of the following products:

a.

Cylinders having a diameter of 120 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater;

b.

Tubes having an inner diameter of 65 mm or greater and a wall thickness of 25 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater; or

c.

Blocks having a size of 120 mm by 120 mm by 50 mm or greater.

Technical Note:

In 1C117 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

1C118

a.

Having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Containing 17,0 - 23,0% by weight of chromium and 4,5 - 7,0% by weight of nickel;

2.

Having a titanium content of greater than 0,10% by weight; and

3.

A ferritic-austenitic microstructure (also referred to as a two-phase microstructure) of which at least 10% by volume (according to ASTM E-1181-87 or national equivalents) is austenite; and

b.

Having any of the following forms:

1.

Ingots or bars having a size of 100 mm or more in each dimension;

2.

Sheets having a width of 600 mm or more and a thickness of 3 mm or less; or

3.

Tubes having an outer diameter of 600 mm or more and a wall thickness of 3 mm or less.

1C202

a.

Aluminium alloys having both of the following characteristics:

1.

'Capable of' an ultimate tensile strength of 460 MPa or more at 293 K (20°C); and

2.

In the form of tubes or cylindrical solid forms (including forgings) with an outside diameter of more than 75 mm;

b.

Titanium alloys having both of the following characteristics:

1.

'Capable of' an ultimate tensile strength of 900 MPa or more at 293 K (20°C); and

2.

In the form of tubes or cylindrical solid forms (including forgings) with an outside diameter of more than 75 mm.

Technical Note:

The phrase alloys 'capable of' encompasses alloys before or after heat treatment.

1C210

a.

Carbon or aramid 'fibrous or filamentary materials' having either of the following characteristics:

1.

A "specific modulus" of 12,7 x 10 6 m or greater; or

2.

A "specific tensile strength" of 23,5 x 10 4 m or greater;

Note:

b.

Glass 'fibrous or filamentary materials' having both of the following characteristics:

1.

A "specific modulus" of 3,18 x 10 6 m or greater; and

2.

A "specific tensile strength" of 7,62 x 10 4 m or greater;

c.

Thermoset resin impregnated continuous "yarns", "rovings", "tows" or "tapes" with a width of 15 mm or less (prepregs), made from carbon or glass 'fibrous or filamentary materials' specified in 1C210.a. or .b.

Technical Note:

The resin forms the matrix of the composite.

Note:

1C216

Note:

Technical Note:

The phrase maraging steel 'capable of' encompasses maraging steel before or after heat treatment.

1C225

Note:

Technical Note:

The natural isotopic abundance of boron-10 is approximately 18,5 weight per cent (20 atom per cent).

1C226

a.

In forms with a hollow cylindrical symmetry (including cylinder segments) with an inside diameter between 100 mm and 300 mm; and

b.

A mass greater than 20 kg.

Note:

1C227

a.

Containing less than 1 000 ppm by weight of metallic impurities other than magnesium; and

b.

Containing less than 10 ppm by weight of boron.

1C228

a.

Containing less than 200 ppm by weight of metallic impurities other than calcium; and

b.

Containing less than 10 ppm by weight of boron.

1C229

a.

A purity of 99,99% or greater by weight; and

b.

Containing less than 10 ppm by weight of silver.

1C230

N.B.

Note:

a.

Metal windows for X - ray machines, or for bore - hole logging devices;

b.

Oxide shapes in fabricated or semi - fabricated forms specially designed for electronic component parts or as substrates for electronic circuits;

c.

Beryl (silicate of beryllium and aluminium) in the form of emeralds or aquamarines.

1C231

1C232

Note:

1C233

Note:

Technical Note:

The natural isotopic abundance of lithium-6 is approximately 6,5 weight per cent (7,5 atom per cent).

1C234

Note:

1C235

Note:

1C236

a.

Elemental;

b.

Compounds having a total activity of 37 GBq/kg (1 Ci/kg) or greater;

c.

Mixtures having a total activity of 37 GBq/kg (1 Ci/kg) or greater;

d.

Products or devices containing any of the foregoing.

Note:

Technical Note:

In 1C236 'radionuclides' are any of the following:

– Actinium-225 ( 225 Ac)

Actinium-227 ( 227 Ac)

Californium-253 ( 253 Cf)

Curium-240 ( 240 Cm)

Curium-241 ( 241 Cm)

Curium-242 ( 242 Cm)

Curium-243 ( 243 Cm)

Curium-244 ( 244 Cm)

Einsteinium-253 ( 253 Es)

Einsteinium-254 ( 254 Es)

Gadolinium-148 ( 148 Gd)

Plutonium-236 ( 236 Pu)

Plutonium-238 ( 238 Pu)

Polonium-208 ( 208 Po)

Polonium-209 ( 209 Po)

Polonium-210 ( 210 Po)

Radium-223 ( 223 Ra)

Thorium-227 ( 227 Th)

Thorium-228 ( 228 Th)

Uranium-230 ( 230 U)

Uranium-232 ( 232 U)

1C237

Note:

a.

Medical applicators;

b.

A product or device containing less than 0,37 GBq (10 millicuries) of radium - 226.

1C238

1C239

1C240

a.

Nickel powder having both of the following characteristics:

1.

A nickel purity content of 99,0% or greater by weight; and

2.

A mean particle size of less than 10 μm measured by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B330 standard;

b.

Porous nickel metal produced from materials specified in 1C240.a.

Note:

a.

Filamentary nickel powders;

b.

Single porous nickel sheets with an area of 1 000 cm 2 per sheet or less.

Technical Note:

1C240.b. refers to porous metal formed by compacting and sintering the materials in 1C240.a. to form a metal material with fine pores interconnected throughout the structure.

1C241

a.

In forms with a hollow cylindrical symmetry (including cylinder segments) with an inside diameter between 100 and 300 mm; and

b.

A mass greater than 20 kg.

1C350

N.B.

1.

Thiodiglycol (CAS 111-48-8);

2.

Phosphorus oxychloride (CAS 10025-87-3);

3.

Dimethyl methylphosphonate (CAS 756-79-6);

4.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS for Methyl phosphonyl difluoride (CAS 676-99-3);

5.

Methyl phosphonyl dichloride (CAS 676-97-1);

6.

Dimethyl phosphite (DMP) (CAS 868-85-9);

7.

Phosphorus trichloride (CAS 7719-12-2);

8.

Trimethyl phosphite (TMP) (CAS 121-45-9);

9.

Thionyl chloride (CAS 7719-09-7);

10.

3-Hydroxy-1-methylpiperidine (CAS 3554-74-3);

11.

N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride (CAS 96-79-7);

12.

N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (CAS 5842-07-9);

13.

3-Quinuclidinol (CAS 1619-34-7);

14.

Potassium fluoride (CAS 7789-23-3);

15.

2-Chloroethanol (CAS 107-07-3);

16.

Dimethylamine (CAS 124-40-3);

17.

Diethyl ethylphosphonate (CAS 78-38-6);

18.

Diethyl N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate (CAS 2404-03-7);

19.

Diethyl phosphite (CAS 762-04-9);

20.

Dimethylamine hydrochloride (CAS 506-59-2);

21.

Ethyl phosphinyl dichloride (CAS 1498-40-4);

22.

Ethyl phosphonyl dichloride (CAS 1066-50-8);

23.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS for Ethyl phosphonyl difluoride (CAS 753-98-0);

24.

Hydrogen fluoride (CAS 7664-39-3);

25.

Methyl benzilate (CAS 76-89-1);

26.

Methyl phosphinyl dichloride (CAS 676-83-5);

27.

N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-amino ethanol (CAS 96-80-0);

28.

Pinacolyl alcohol (CAS 464-07-3);

29.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS for O-Ethyl O-2-diisopropylaminoethyl methylphosphonite (QL) (CAS 57856-11-8);

30.

Triethyl phosphite (CAS 122-52-1);

31.

Arsenic trichloride (CAS 7784-34-1);

32.

Benzilic acid (CAS 76-93-7);

33.

Diethyl methylphosphonite (CAS 15715-41-0);

34.

Dimethyl ethylphosphonate (CAS 6163-75-3);

35.

Ethyl phosphinyl difluoride (CAS 430-78-4);

36.

Methyl phosphinyl difluoride (CAS 753-59-3);

37.

3-Quinuclidone (CAS 3731-38-2);

38.

Phosphorus pentachloride (CAS 10026-13-8);

39.

Pinacolone (CAS 75-97-8);

40.

Potassium cyanide (CAS 151-50-8);

41.

Potassium bifluoride (CAS 7789-29-9);

42.

Ammonium hydrogen fluoride or ammonium bifluoride (CAS 1341-49-7);

43.

Sodium fluoride (CAS 7681-49-4);

44.

Sodium bifluoride (CAS 1333-83-1);

45.

Sodium cyanide (CAS 143-33-9);

46.

Triethanolamine (CAS 102-71-6);

47.

Phosphorus pentasulphide (CAS 1314-80-3);

48.

Di-isopropylamine (CAS 108-18-9);

49.

Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8);

50.

Sodium sulphide (CAS 1313-82-2);

51.

Sulphur monochloride (CAS 10025-67-9);

52.

Sulphur dichloride (CAS 10545-99-0);

53.

Triethanolamine hydrochloride (CAS 637-39-8);

54.

N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (CAS 4261-68-1);

55.

Methylphosphonic acid (CAS 993-13-5);

56.

Diethyl methylphosphonate (CAS 683-08-9);

57.

N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride (CAS 677-43-0);

58.

Triisopropyl phosphite (CAS 116-17-6);

59.

Ethyldiethanolamine (CAS 139-87-7);

60.

O,O-Diethyl phosphorothioate (CAS 2465-65-8);

61.

O,O-Diethyl phosphorodithioate (CAS 298-06-6);

62.

Sodium hexafluorosilicate (CAS 16893-85-9);

63.

Methylphosphonothioic dichloride (CAS 676-98-2);

64.

Diethylamine (CAS 109-89-7);

65.

N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiol hydrochloride (CAS 41480-75-5);

66.

Methyl dichlorophosphate (CAS 677-24-7);

67.

Ethyl dichlorophosphate (CAS 1498-51-7);

68.

Methyl difluorophosphate (CAS 22382-13-4);

69.

Ethyl difluorophosphate (CAS 460-52-6);

70.

Diethyl chlorophosphite (CAS 589-57-1);

71.

Methyl chlorofluorophosphate (CAS 754-01-8);

72.

Ethyl chlorofluorophosphate (CAS 762-77-6);

73.

N,N-Dimethylformamidine (CAS 44205-42-7);

74.

N,N-Diethylformamidine (CAS 90324-67-7);

75.

N,N-Dipropylformamidine (CAS 48044-20-8);

76.

N,N-Diisopropylformamidine (CAS 857522-08-8);

77.

N,N-Dimethylacetamidine (CAS 2909-14-0);

78.

N,N-Diethylacetamidine (CAS 14277-06-6);

79.

N,N-Dipropylacetamidine (CAS 1339586-99-0);

80.

N,N-Dimethylpropanamidine (CAS 56776-14-8);

81.

N,N-Diethylpropanamidine (CAS 84764-73-8);

82.

N,N-Dipropylpropanamidine (CAS 1341496-89-6);

83.

N,N-Dimethylbutanamidine (CAS 1340437-35-5);

84.

N,N-Diethylbutanamidine (CAS 53510-30-8);

85.

N,N-Dipropylbutanamidine (CAS 1342422-35-8);

86.

N,N-Diisopropylbutanamidine (CAS 1315467-17-4);

87.

N,N-Dimethylisobutanamidine (CAS 321881-25-8);

88.

N,N-Diethylisobutanamidine (CAS 1342789-47-2);

89.

N,N-Dipropylisobutanamidine (CAS 1342700-45-1).

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

Note 4:

1C351

a.

Viruses, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1.

African horse sickness virus;

2.

African swine fever virus;

3.

Andes virus;

4.

Avian influenza virus, which are:

a.

Uncharacterised; or

b.

Defined in Annex I(2) EC Directive 2005/94/EC ( OJ L 10 14.1.2006, p. 16 ) as having high pathogenicity, as follows:

1.

Type A viruses with an IVPI (intravenous pathogenicity index) in 6 week old chickens of greater than 1,2; or

2.

Type A viruses of the subtypes H5 or H7 with genome sequences codified for multiple basic amino acids at the cleavage site of the haemagglutinin molecule similar to that observed for other HPAI viruses, indicating that the haemagglutinin molecule can be cleaved by a host ubiquitous protease;

5.

Bluetongue virus;

6.

Chapare virus;

7.

Chikungunya virus;

8.

Choclo virus;

9.

Crimean-Congo hemorrhagic fever virus;

10.

Not used;

11.

Dobrava-Belgrade virus;

12.

Eastern equine encephalitis virus;

13.

Ebolavirus: all members of the Ebolavirus genus;

14.

Foot-and-mouth disease virus;

15.

Goatpox virus;

16.

Guanarito virus;

17.

Hantaan virus;

18.

Hendra virus (Equine morbillivirus);

19.

Suid herpesvirus 1 (Pseudorabies virus; Aujeszky's disease);

20.

Classical swine fever virus (Hog cholera virus);

21.

Japanese encephalitis virus;

22.

Junin virus;

23.

Kyasanur Forest disease virus;

24.

Laguna Negra virus;

25.

Lassa virus;

26.

Louping ill virus;

27.

Lujo virus;

28.

Lumpy skin disease virus;

29.

Lymphocytic choriomeningitis virus;

30.

Machupo virus;

31.

Marburgvirus: all members of the Marburgvirus genus;

32.

Monkeypox virus;

33.

Murray Valley encephalitis virus;

34.

Newcastle disease virus;

35.

Nipah virus;

36.

Omsk hemorrhagic fever virus;

37.

Oropouche virus;

38.

Peste-des-petits-ruminants virus;

39.

Swine vesicular disease virus;

40.

Powassan virus;

41.

Rabies virus and all other members of the Lyssavirus genus;

42.

Rift Valley fever virus;

43.

Rinderpest virus;

44.

Rocio virus;

45.

Sabia virus;

46.

Seoul virus;

47.

Sheeppox virus;

48.

Sin Nombre virus;

49.

St. Louis encephalitis virus;

50.

Porcine Teschovirus;

51.

Tick-borne encephalitis virus (Far Eastern subtype);

52.

Variola virus;

53.

Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus;

54.

Vesicular stomatitis virus;

55.

Western equine encephalitis virus;

56.

Yellow fever virus;

57.

Severe acute respiratory syndrome-related coronavirus (SARS-related coronavirus);

58.

Reconstructed 1918 influenza virus;

59.

Middle East respiratory syndrome-related coronavirus (MERS-related coronavirus);

b.

Not used;

c.

Bacteria, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1.

Bacillus anthracis;

2.

Brucella abortus;

3.

Brucella melitensis;

4.

Brucella suis;

5.

Burkholderia mallei (Pseudomonas mallei);

6.

Burkholderia pseudomallei (Pseudomonas pseudomallei);

7.

Chlamydia psittaci (Chlamydophila psittaci);

8.

Clostridium argentinense (formerly known as Clostridium botulinum Type G), botulinum neurotoxin producing strains;

9.

Clostridium baratii, botulinum neurotoxin producing strains;

10.

Clostridium botulinum;

11.

Clostridium butyricum, botulinum neurotoxin producing strains;

12

Clostridium perfringens epsilon toxin producing types;

13.

Coxiella burnetii;

14.

Francisella tularensis;

15.

Mycoplasma capricolum subspecies capripneumoniae (strain F38);

16.

Mycoplasma mycoides subspecies mycoides SC (small colony);

17.

Rickettsia prowazekii;

18.

Salmonella enterica subspecies enterica serovar Typhi (Salmonella typhi);

19.

Shiga toxin producing Escherichia coli (STEC) of serogroups O26, O45, O103, O104, O111, O121, O145, O157, and other shiga toxin producing serogroups;

Note:

Shiga toxin producing Escherichia coli (STEC) includes inter alia enterohaemorrhagic E. coli (EHEC), verotoxin producing E. coli (VTEC) or verocytotoxin producing E. coli (VTEC).

20.

Shigella dysenteriae;

21.

Vibrio cholerae;

22.

Yersinia pestis;

d.

"Toxins", as follows, and "sub-unit of toxins" thereof:

1.

Botulinum toxins;

2.

Clostridium perfringens alpha, beta 1, beta 2, epsilon and iota toxins;

3.

Conotoxins;

4.

Ricin;

5.

Saxitoxin;

6.

Shiga toxins (shiga-like toxins, verotoxins and verocytotoxins)

7.

Staphylococcus aureus enterotoxins, hemolysin alpha toxin, and toxic shock syndrome toxin (formerly known as Staphylococcus enterotoxin F);

8.

Tetrodotoxin;

9.

Not used;

10.

Microcystins (Cyanginosins);

11.

Aflatoxins;

12.

Abrin;

13.

Cholera toxin;

14.

Diacetoxyscirpenol;

15.

T-2 toxin;

16.

HT-2 toxin;

17.

Modeccin;

18.

Volkensin;

19.

Viscumin (Viscum Album Lectin 1);

Note:

1.

Are pharmaceutical formulations designed for human administration in the treatment of medical conditions;

2.

Are pre-packaged for distribution as medical products;

3.

Are authorised by a state authority to be marketed as medical products.

e.

Fungi, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1.

Coccidioides immitis;

2.

Coccidioides posadasii.

Note:

1C353

a.

Any 'genetically-modified organism' which contains, or 'genetic element' that codes for, any of the following:

1.

Any gene or genes specific to any virus specified in 1C351.a. or 1C354.a.;

2.

Any gene or genes specific to any bacterium specified in 1C351.c. or 1C354.b. or fungus specified in 1C351.e. or 1C354.c., and which is any of the following:

a.

In itself or through its transcribed or translated products represents a significant hazard to human, animal or plant health; or

b.

Could 'endow or enhance pathogenicity'; or

3.

Any "toxins" specified in 1C351.d. or "sub-units of toxins" therefor;

b.

Not used.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

Note 1:

Note 2:

1C354

a.

Viruses, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1.

Andean potato latent virus (Potato Andean latent tymovirus);

2.

Potato spindle tuber viroid;

b.

Bacteria, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1.

Xanthomonas albilineans;

2.

Xanthomonas axonopodis pv. citri (Xanthomonas campestris pv. citri A) [Xanthomonas campestris pv. citri];

3.

Xanthomonas oryzae pv. oryzae (Pseudomonas campestris pv. oryzae);

4.

Clavibacter michiganensis subsp. sepedonicus (Corynebacterium michiganensis subsp. sepedonicum or Corynebacterium sepedonicum);

5.

Ralstonia solanacearum, race 3, biovar 2;

c.

Fungi, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of "isolated live cultures" or as material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1.

Colletotrichum kahawae (Colletotrichum coffeanum var. virulans);

2.

Cochliobolus miyabeanus (Helminthosporium oryzae);

3.

Microcyclus ulei (syn. Dothidella ulei);

4.

Puccinia graminis ssp. graminis var. graminis / Puccinia graminis ssp. graminis var. stakmanii (Puccinia graminis [syn. Puccinia graminis f. sp. tritici]);

5.

Puccinia striiformis (syn. Puccinia glumarum);

6.

Magnaporthe oryzae (Pyricularia oryzae);

7.

Peronosclerospora philippinensis (Peronosclerospora sacchari);

8.

Sclerophthora rayssiae var. zeae;

9.

Synchytrium endobioticium;

10.

Tilletia indica;

11.

Thecaphora solani.

1C450

N.B.

a.

Toxic chemicals, as follows:

1.

Amiton: O,O-Diethyl S-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] phosphorothiolate (CAS 78-53-5) and corresponding alkylated or protonated salts;

2.

PFIB: 1,1,3,3,3-Pentafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-1-propene (CAS 382-21-8);

3.

SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR BZ: 3-Quinuclidinyl benzilate (CAS 6581-06-2);

4.

Phosgene: Carbonyl dichloride (CAS 75-44-5);

5.

Cyanogen chloride (CAS 506-77-4);

6.

Hydrogen cyanide (CAS 74-90-8);

7.

Chloropicrin: Trichloronitromethane (CAS 76-06-2);

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

Note 4:

b.

Toxic chemical precursors, as follows:

1.

Chemicals, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls or in 1C350, containing a phosphorus atom to which is bonded one methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso) group but not further carbon atoms;

Note:

2.

N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] phosphoramidic dihalides, other than N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride;

N.B.

3.

Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] N,N-dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)]-phosphoramidates, other than Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate which is specified in 1C350;

4.

N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethyl-2-chlorides and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride or N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride which are specified in 1C350;

5.

N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-ols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethanol (CAS 96-80-0) and N,N-Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8) which are specified in 1C350;

Note:

a.

N,N - Dimethylaminoethanol (CAS 108 - 01 - 0) and corresponding protonated salts;

b.

Protonated salts of N,N - Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100 - 37 - 8);

6.

N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-thiols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (CAS 5842-07-9) and N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiol hydrochloride (CAS 41480-75-5) which are specified in 1C350;

7.

See 1C350 for ethyldiethanolamine (CAS 139-87-7);

8.

Methyldiethanolamine (CAS 105-59-9).

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

Note 4:

1D Software

1D001

1D002

1D003

1D101

1D103

1D201

1E Technology

1E001

1E002

a.

"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of polybenzothiazoles or polybenzoxazoles;

b.

"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of fluoroelastomer compounds containing at least one vinylether monomer;

c.

"Technology" for the design or "production" of the following ceramic powders or non-"composite" ceramic materials:

1.

Ceramic powders having all of the following:

a.

Any of the following compositions:

1.

Single or complex oxides of zirconium and complex oxides of silicon or aluminium;

2.

Single nitrides of boron (cubic crystalline forms);

3.

Single or complex carbides of silicon or boron; or

4.

Single or complex nitrides of silicon;

b.

Any of the following total metallic impurities (excluding intentional additions):

1.

Less than 1 000 ppm for single oxides or carbides; or

2.

Less than 5 000 ppm for complex compounds or single nitrides; and

c.

Being any of the following:

1.

Zirconia (CAS 1314-23-4) with an average particle size equal to or less than 1 μm and no more than 10% of the particles larger than 5 μm; or

2.

Other ceramic powders with an average particle size equal to or less than 5 μm and no more than 10% of the particles larger than 10 μm;

2.

Non-"composite" ceramic materials composed of the materials specified in 1E002.c.1.;

Note:

d.

Not used;

e.

"Technology" for the installation, maintenance or repair of materials specified in 1C001;

f.

"Technology" for the repair of "composite" structures, laminates or materials specified in 1A002 or 1C007.c.;

Note:

g.

"Libraries" specially designed or modified to enable equipment to perform the functions of equipment specified in 1A004.c. or 1A004.d.

1E101

1E102

1E103

1E104

Note:

1E201

1E202

1E203

PART IV – Category 2

CATEGORY 2 - MATERIALS PROCESSING

2A Systems, Equipment and Components

N.B.

2A001

N.B.

a.

Ball bearings and solid roller bearings, having all tolerances specified by the manufacturer in accordance with ISO 492 Tolerance Class 4 or Class 2 (or national equivalents), or better, and having both 'rings' and 'rolling elements', made from monel or beryllium;

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

b.

Not used;

c.

Active magnetic bearing systems using any of the following, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

Materials with flux densities of 2,0 T or greater and yield strengths greater than 414 MPa;

2.

All-electromagnetic 3D homopolar bias designs for actuators; or

3.

High temperature (450 K (177°C) and above) position sensors.

2A101

a.

An inner ring bore diameter between 12 mm and 50 mm;

b.

An outer ring outside diameter between 25 mm and 100 mm; and

c.

A width between 10 mm and 20 mm.

2A225

a.

Crucibles having both of the following characteristics:

1.

A volume of between 150 cm 3 and 8 000 cm 3 ; and

2.

Made of or coated with any of the following materials, or combination of the following materials, having an overall impurity level of 2% or less by weight:

a.

Calcium fluoride (CaF 2 );

b.

Calcium zirconate (metazirconate) (CaZrO 3 );

c.

Cerium sulphide (Ce 2 S 3 );

d.

Erbium oxide (erbia) (Er 2 O 3 );

e.

Hafnium oxide (hafnia) (HfO 2 );

f.

Magnesium oxide (MgO);

g.

Nitrided niobium-titanium-tungsten alloy (approximately 50% Nb, 30% Ti, 20% W);

h.

Yttrium oxide (yttria) (Y 2 O 3 ); or

i.

Zirconium oxide (zirconia) (ZrO 2 );

b.

Crucibles having both of the following characteristics:

1.

A volume of between 50 cm 3 and 2 000 cm 3 ; and

2.

Made of or lined with tantalum, having a purity of 99,9% or greater by weight;

c.

Crucibles having all of the following characteristics:

1.

A volume of between 50 cm 3 and 2 000 cm 3 ;

2.

Made of or lined with tantalum, having a purity of 98% or greater by weight; and

3.

Coated with tantalum carbide, nitride, boride, or any combination thereof.

2A226

a.

A 'nominal size' of 5 mm or greater;

b.

Having a bellows seal; and

c.

Wholly made of or lined with aluminium, aluminium alloy, nickel, or nickel alloy containing more than 60% nickel by weight.

Technical Note:

For valves with different inlet and outlet diameters, the 'nominal size' in 2A226 refers to the smallest diameter.

2B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

a.

Wheel-dressing systems in grinding machines;

b.

Parallel rotary axes designed for mounting of separate workpieces;

c.

Co-linear rotary axes designed for manipulating the same workpiece by holding it in a chuck from different ends.

3.

4.

5.

a.

Select five machines of a model to be evaluated;

b.

Measure the linear axis repeatability (R↑,R↓) according to ISO 230-2:2014 and evaluate "unidirectional positioning repeatability" for each axis of each of the five machines;

c.

d.

Since the Category 2 list refers to each linear axis there will be as many 'stated "unidirectional positioning repeatability" values as there are linear axes;

e.

If any axis of a machine model not specified in 2B001.a. to 2B001.c. has a 'stated "unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less than the specified "unidirectional positioning repeatability" of each machine tool model plus 0,7 μm, the builder should be required to reaffirm the accuracy level once every eighteen months.

6.

7.

2B001

N.B.

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

Crankshafts or camshafts;

b.

Tools or cutters;

c.

Extruder worms;

d.

Engraved or facetted jewellery parts; or

e.

Dental prostheses.

Note 3:

Note 4:

N.B.

a.

Machine tools for turning having two or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" having any of the following:

1.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 0,9 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length less than 1,0 m; or

2.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 1,0 m;

Note 1:

a.

Machine controller limited to using ophthalmic based software for part programming data input; and

b.

No vacuum chucking.

Note 2:

b.

Machine tools for milling having any of the following:

1.

Three linear axes plus one rotary axis which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" having any of the following:

a.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 0,9 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length less than 1,0 m; or

b.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 1,0m;

2.

Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" having any of the following;

a.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 0,9 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length less than 1,0 m;

b.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,4 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 1 m and less than 4 m; or

c.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 6,0 μm (along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 4 m;

3.

A "unidirectional positioning repeatability" for jig boring machines, equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis; or

4.

Fly cutting machines having all of the following:

a.

Spindle "run-out" and "camming" less (better) than 0,0004 mm TIR; and

b.

Angular deviation of slide movement (yaw, pitch and roll) less (better) than 2 seconds of arc, TIR over 300 mm of travel;

c.

Machine tools for grinding having any of the following:

1.

Having all of the following:

a.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis; and

b.

Three or four axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control"; or

2.

Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control" having any of the following:

a.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,1 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length less than 1 m;

b.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 1,4 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 1 m and less than 4 m; or

c.

"Unidirectional positioning repeatability" equal to or less (better) than 6,0 μm along one or more linear axis with a travel length equal to or greater than 4 m.

Note:

a.

Cylindrical external, internal, and external-internal grinding machines, having all of the following:

1.

Limited to cylindrical grinding; and

2.

Limited to a maximum workpiece capacity of 150 mm outside diameter or length.

b.

Machines designed specifically as jig grinders that do not have a z-axis or a w-axis, with a "unidirectional positioning repeatability" less (better) than 1,1 μm

c.

Surface grinders.

d.

Electrical discharge machines (EDM) of the non-wire type which have two or more rotary axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control";

e.

Machine tools for removing metals, ceramics or "composites", having all of the following:

1.

Removing material by means of any of the following:

a.

Water or other liquid jets, including those employing abrasive additives;

b.

Electron beam; or

c.

"Laser" beam; and

2.

At least two rotary axes having all of the following:

a.

Can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control"; and

b.

A positioning "accuracy" of less (better) than 0,003°;

f.

Deep-hole-drilling machines and turning machines modified for deep-hole-drilling, having a maximum depth-of-bore capability exceeding 5m.

2B002

a.

Finishing the form to less (better) than 1,0 μm;

b.

Finishing to a roughness less (better) than 100 nm rms.

c.

Four or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control"; and

d.

Using any of the following processes:

1.

Magnetorheological finishing ('MRF');

2.

Electrorheological finishing ('ERF');

3.

'Energetic particle beam finishing';

4.

'Inflatable membrane tool finishing'; or

5.

'Fluid jet finishing'.

Technical Notes:

For the purposes of 2B002:

1.

'MRF' is a material removal process using an abrasive magnetic fluid whose viscosity is controlled by a magnetic field.

2.

'ERF' is a removal process using an abrasive fluid whose viscosity is controlled by an electric field.

3.

'Energetic particle beam finishing' uses Reactive Atom Plasmas (RAP) or ion-beams to selectively remove material.

4.

'Inflatable membrane tool finishing' is a process that uses a pressurized membrane that deforms to contact the workpiece over a small area.

5.

'Fluid jet finishing' makes use of a fluid stream for material removal.

2B003

a.

A pitch diameter exceeding 1 250 mm;

b.

A face width of 15% of pitch diameter or larger; and

c.

A finished quality of AGMA 14 or better (equivalent to ISO 1328 class 3).

2B004

N.B.

a.

A controlled thermal environment within the closed cavity and a chamber cavity with an inside diameter of 406 mm or more; and

b.

Having any of the following:

1.

A maximum working pressure exceeding 207 MPa;

2.

A controlled thermal environment exceeding 1 773 K (1 500°C); or

3.

A facility for hydrocarbon impregnation and removal of resultant gaseous degradation products.

Technical Note:

The inside chamber dimension is that of the chamber in which both the working temperature and the working pressure are achieved and does not include fixtures. That dimension will be the smaller of either the inside diameter of the pressure chamber or the inside diameter of the insulated furnace chamber, depending on which of the two chambers is located inside the other.

N.B.

2B005

a.

Chemical vapour deposition (CVD) production equipment having all of the following:

N.B.

1.

A process modified for one of the following:

a.

Pulsating CVD;

b.

Controlled nucleation thermal deposition (CNTD); or

c.

Plasma enhanced or plasma assisted CVD; and

2.

Having any of the following:

a.

Incorporating high vacuum (equal to or less than 0,01 Pa) rotating seals; or

b.

Incorporating in situ coating thickness control;

b.

Ion implantation production equipment having beam currents of 5 mA or more;

c.

Electron beam physical vapour deposition (EB-PVD) production equipment incorporating power systems rated for over 80 kW and having any of the following:

1.

A liquid pool level "laser" control system which regulates precisely the ingots feed rate; or

2.

A computer controlled rate monitor operating on the principle of photo-luminescence of the ionised atoms in the evaporant stream to control the deposition rate of a coating containing two or more elements;

d.

Plasma spraying production equipment having any of the following:

1.

Operating at reduced pressure controlled atmosphere (equal to or less than 10 kPa measured above and within 300 mm of the gun nozzle exit) in a vacuum chamber capable of evacuation down to 0,01 Pa prior to the spraying process; or

2.

Incorporating in situ coating thickness control;

e.

Sputter deposition production equipment capable of current densities of 0,1 mA/mm 2 or higher at a deposition rate of 15 μm/h or more;

f.

Cathodic arc deposition production equipment incorporating a grid of electromagnets for steering control of the arc spot on the cathode;

g.

Ion plating production equipment capable of the in situ measurement of any of the following:

1.

Coating thickness on the substrate and rate control; or

2.

Optical characteristics.

Note:

2B006

a.

Computer controlled or "numerical controlled" Coordinate Measuring Machines (CMM), having a three dimensional (volumetric) maximum permissible error of length measurement (E 0,MPE ) at any point within the operating range of the machine (i.e., within the length of axes) equal to or less (better) than (1,7 + L/1 000) μm (L is the measured length in mm), according to ISO 10360-2:2009;

Technical Note:

The E 0,MPE of the most accurate configuration of the CMM specified by the manufacturer (e.g., best of the following: probe, stylus length, motion parameters, environment) and with "all compensations available" shall be compared to the 1,7+L/1 000 μm threshold.

N.B.

b.

Linear displacement measuring instruments or systems, linear position feedback units, and "electronic assemblies", as follows:

Note:

1.

'Non-contact type measuring systems' with a "resolution" equal to or less (better) than 0,2 μm within 0 to 0,2 mm of the 'measuring range';

Technical Notes:

For the purposes of 2B006.b.1.:

1.

'non-contact type measuring systems' are designed to measure the distance between the probe and measured object along a single vector, where the probe or measured object is in motion.

2.

'measuring range' means the distance between the minimum and maximum working distance.

2.

Linear position feedback units specially designed for machine tools and having an overall "accuracy" less (better) than (800 + (600 x L/1 000)) nm (L equals effective length in mm);

3.

Measuring systems having all of the following:

a.

Containing a "laser";

b.

A "resolution" over their full scale of 0,200 nm or less (better); and

c.

Capable of achieving a "measurement uncertainty" equal to or less (better) than (1,6 + L/2 000) nm (L is the measured length in mm) at any point within a measuring range, when compensated for the refractive index of air and measured over a period of 30 seconds at a temperature of 20±0,01°C; or

4.

"Electronic assemblies" specially designed to provide feedback capability in systems specified in 2B006.b.3.;

c.

Rotary position feedback units specially designed for machine tools or angular displacement measuring instruments, having an angular position "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 0,9 second of arc;

Note:

d.

Equipment for measuring surface roughness (including surface defects), by measuring optical scatter with a sensitivity of 0,5 nm or less (better).

Note:

2B007

N.B.

a.

Not used;

b.

Specially designed to comply with national safety standards applicable to potentially explosive munitions environments;

Note:

c.

Specially designed or rated as radiation-hardened to withstand a total radiation dose greater than 5 x 10 3 Gy (silicon) without operational degradation; or

Technical Note:

The term Gy (silicon) refers to the energy in Joules per kilogram absorbed by an unshielded silicon sample when exposed to ionising radiation.

d.

Specially designed to operate at altitudes exceeding 30 000 m.

2B008

a.

Not used;

b.

Not used;

c.

'Compound rotary tables' having all of the following:

1.

Designed for machine tools for turning, milling or grinding; and

2.

Two rotary axes designed to be coordinated simultaneously for “contouring control”;

Technical Note:

A 'compound rotary table' is a table allowing the workpiece to rotate and tilt about two non-parallel axes

d.

"Tilting spindles" having all of the following :

1.

Designed for machine tools for turning, milling or grinding; and

2.

Designed to be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control".

2B009

N.B.

a.

Three or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control"; and

b.

A roller force more than 60 kN.

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 2B009, machines combining the function of spin-forming and flow-forming are regarded as flow-forming machines.

2B104

N.B.

a.

Maximum working pressure of 69 MPa or greater;

b.

Designed to achieve and maintain a controlled thermal environment of 873 K (600°C) or greater; and

c.

Possessing a chamber cavity with an inside diameter of 254 mm or greater.

2B105

2B109

N.B.

a.

Flow-forming machines having all of the following:

1.

Equipped with, or, according to the manufacturer's technical specification, are capable of being equipped with "numerical control" units or computer control; and

2.

More than two axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control".

b.

Specially designed components for flow-forming machines specified in 2B009 or 2B109.a.

Technical Note:

Machines combining the function of spin-forming and flow-forming are for the purpose of 2B109 regarded as flow-forming machines.

2B116

a.

Vibration test systems employing feedback or closed loop techniques and incorporating a digital controller, capable of vibrating a system at an acceleration equal to or greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz while imparting forces equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured 'bare table';

b.

Digital controllers, combined with specially designed vibration test software, with a 'real-time control bandwidth' greater than 5 kHz designed for use with vibration test systems specified in 2B116.a.;

Technical Note:

In 2B116.b., 'real - time control bandwidth' means the maximum rate at which a controller can execute complete cycles of sampling, processing data and transmitting control signals.

c.

Vibration thrusters (shaker units), with or without associated amplifiers, capable of imparting a force equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured 'bare table', and usable in vibration test systems specified in 2B116.a.;

d.

Test piece support structures and electronic units designed to combine multiple shaker units in a system capable of providing an effective combined force equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured 'bare table', and usable in vibration systems specified in 2B116.a.

Technical Note:

In 2B116, 'bare table' means a flat table, or surface, with no fixture or fittings.

2B117

2B119

N.B.

a.

Balancing machines having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Not capable of balancing rotors/assemblies having a mass greater than 3 kg;

2.

Capable of balancing rotors/assemblies at speeds greater than 12 500 rpm;

3.

Capable of correcting unbalance in two planes or more; and

4.

Capable of balancing to a residual specific unbalance of 0,2 g mm per kg of rotor mass;

Note:

b.

Indicator heads designed or modified for use with machines specified in 2B119.a.

Technical Note:

Indicator heads are sometimes known as balancing instrumentation.

2B120

a.

Two or more axes;

b.

Designed or modified to incorporate slip rings or integrated non-contact devices capable of transferring electrical power, signal information, or both; and

c.

Having any of the following characteristics:

1.

For any single axis having all of the following:

a.

Capable of rates of 400 degrees/s or more, or 30 degrees/s or less; and

b.

A rate resolution equal to or less than 6 degrees/s and an accuracy equal to or less than 0,6 degrees/s;

2.

Having a worst-case rate stability equal to or better (less) than plus or minus 0,05% averaged over 10 degrees or more; or

3.

A positioning "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 5 arc second.

Note 1:

Note 2:

2B121

a.

Two or more axes; and

b.

A positioning "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 5 arc second.

Note:

2B122

Note:

2B201

Technical Note:

Stated positioning accuracy levels derived under the following procedures from measurements made according to ISO 230 - 2:1988 ( 6 ) or national equivalents may be used for each machine tool model if provided to, and accepted by, national authorities instead of individual machine tests. Determination of stated positioning accuracy:

a.

Select five machines of a model to be evaluated;

b.

Measure the linear axis accuracies according to ISO 230 - 2:1988 1 ;

c.

Determine the accuracy values (A) for each axis of each machine. The method of calculating the accuracy value is described in the ISO 230 - 2:1988 1 standard;

d.

Determine the average accuracy value of each axis. This average value becomes the stated positioning accuracy of each axis for the model (Âx Ây...);

e.

Since item 2B201 refers to each linear axis, there will be as many stated positioning accuracy values as there are linear axes;

f.

If any axis of a machine tool not specified in 2B201.a., 2B201.b. or 2B201.c. has a stated positioning accuracy of 6 μm or better (less) for grinding machines, and 8 μm or better (less) for milling and turning machines, both according to ISO 230 - 2:1988 1 , then the builder should be required to reaffirm the accuracy level once every eighteen months.

a.

Machine tools for milling, having any of the following characteristics:

1.

Positioning accuracies with "all compensations available" equal to or less (better) than 6 μm according to ISO 230-2:1988 1 or national equivalents along any linear axis;

2.

Two or more contouring rotary axes; or

3.

Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control";

Note:

a.

X-axis travel greater than 2 m; and

b.

Overall positioning accuracy on the x-axis more (worse) than 30 μm.

b.

Machine tools for grinding, having any of the following characteristics:

1.

Positioning accuracies with "all compensations available" equal to or less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230-2:1988 1 or national equivalents along any linear axis;

2.

Two or more contouring rotary axes; or

3.

Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for "contouring control";

Note:

a.

Cylindrical external, internal, and external-internal grinding machines having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Limited to a maximum workpiece capacity of 150 mm outside diameter or length; and

2.

Axes limited to x, z and c;

b.

Jig grinders that do not have a z-axis or a w-axis with an overall positioning accuracy less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230 - 2:1988 1 or national equivalents.

c.

Machine tools for turning, that have positioning accuracies with "all compensations available" better (less) than 6 μm according to ISO 230-2:1988 1 along any linear axis (overall positioning) for machines capable of machining diameters greater than 35 mm;

Note:

Note 1:

a.

Gears;

b.

Crankshafts or camshafts;

c.

Tools or cutters;

d.

Extruder worms.

Note 2:

Note 3:

2B204

a.

"Isostatic presses" having both of the following characteristics:

1.

Capable of achieving a maximum working pressure of 69 MPa or greater; and

2.

A chamber cavity with an inside diameter in excess of 152 mm;

b.

Dies, moulds and controls, specially designed for "isostatic presses" specified in 2B204.a.

Technical Note:

In 2B204 the inside chamber dimension is that of the chamber in which both the working temperature and the working pressure are achieved and does not include fixtures. That dimension will be the smaller of either the inside diameter of the pressure chamber or the inside diameter of the insulated furnace chamber, depending on which of the two chambers is located inside the other.

2B206

a.

Computer controlled or numerically controlled coordinate measuring machines (CMM) having either of the following characteristics:

1.

Having only two axes and having a maximum permissible error of length measurement along any axis (one dimensional), identified as any combination of E 0x,MPE , E 0y,MPE , or E 0z,MPE , equal to or less (better) than (1,25 + L/1 000) μm (where L is the measured length in mm) at any point within the operating range of the machine (i.e., within the length of the axis), according to ISO 10360-2:2009; or

2.

Three or more axes and having a three dimensional (volumetric) maximum permissible error of length measurement (E 0,MPE ) equal to or less (better) than (1,7 + L/800) μm (where L is the measured length in mm) at any point within the operating range of the machine (i.e., within the length of the axis), according to ISO 10360-2:2009;

Technical Note:

The E 0,MPE of the most accurate configuration of the CMM specified according to ISO 10360-2:2009 by the manufacturer (e.g., best of the following: probe, stylus, length, motion parameters, environments) and with all compensations available shall be compared to the (1,7 + L/800) μm threshold.

b.

Systems for simultaneous linear-angular inspection of hemishells, having both of the following characteristics:

1.

"Measurement uncertainty" along any linear axis equal to or less (better) than 3,5 μm per 5 mm; and

2.

"Angular position deviation" equal to or less than 0,02°;

c.

'Linear displacement' measuring systems having all of the following characteristics:

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 2B206.c. 'linear displacement' means the change of distance between the measuring probe and the measured object.

1.

Containing a "laser"; and

2.

Capable of maintaining, for at least 12 hours, at a temperature of ± 1 K (± 1°C); around a standard temperature and standard pressure, all of the following:

a.

A "resolution" over their full scale of 0,1 μm or better; and

b.

With a "measurement uncertainty" equal to or better (less) than (0,2 + L/2 000) μm (L is the measured length in mm).

Note:

d.

Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT) systems having both of the following characteristics:

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 2B206.d. 'linear displacement' means the change of distance between the measuring probe and the measured object.

1.

Having any of the following:

a.

"Linearity" equal to or less (better) than 0,1% measured from 0 to the full operating range, for LVDTs with an operating range up to 5 mm; or

b.

"Linearity" equal to or less (better) than 0,1% measured from 0 to 5 mm for LVDTs with an operating range greater than 5 mm; and

2.

Drift equal to or better (less) than 0,1% per day at a standard ambient test room temperature ±1 K (± 1°C).

Note 1:

Note 2:

Technical Notes:

All parameters of measurement values in 2B206 represent plus/minus i.e., not total band.

2B207

a.

"Robots" or "end-effectors" specially designed to comply with national safety standards applicable to handling high explosives (for example, meeting electrical code ratings for high explosives);

b.

Control units specially designed for any of the "robots" or "end-effectors" specified in 2B207.a.

2B209

a.

Machines having both of the following characteristics:

1.

Three or more rollers (active or guiding); and

2.

Which, according to the manufacturer's technical specification, can be equipped with "numerical control" units or a computer control;

b.

Rotor-forming mandrels designed to form cylindrical rotors of inside diameter between 75 mm and 400 mm.

Note:

2B219

a.

Centrifugal balancing machines designed for balancing flexible rotors having a length of 600 mm or more and having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Swing or journal diameter greater than 75 mm;

2.

Mass capability of from 0,9 to 23 kg; and

3.

Capable of balancing speed of revolution greater than 5 000 r.p.m.;

b.

Centrifugal balancing machines designed for balancing hollow cylindrical rotor components and having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Journal diameter greater than 75 mm;

2.

Mass capability of from 0,9 to 23 kg;

3.

A minimum achievable residual specific unbalance equal to or less than 10 g mm/kg per plane; and

4.

Belt drive type.

2B225

a.

A capability of penetrating 0,6 m or more of hot cell wall (through-the-wall operation); or

b.

A capability of bridging over the top of a hot cell wall with a thickness of 0,6 m or more (over-the-wall operation).

Technical Note:

Remote manipulators provide translation of human operator actions to a remote operating arm and terminal fixture. They may be of 'master/slave' type or operated by joystick or keypad.

2B226

N.B.

a.

Furnaces having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Capable of operation above 1 123 K (850°C);

2.

Induction coils 600 mm or less in diameter; and

3.

Designed for power inputs of 5 kW or more;

Note:

b.

Power supplies, with a specified power output of 5 kW or more, specially designed for furnaces specified in 2B226.a.

2B227

a.

Arc remelt furnaces, arc melt furnaces and arc melt and casting furnaces having both of the following characteristics:

1.

Consumable electrode capacities between 1 000 cm 3 and 20 000 cm 3 ; and

2.

Capable of operating with melting temperatures above 1 973 K (1 700 o C);

b.

Electron beam melting furnaces, plasma atomisation furnaces and plasma melting furnaces, having both of the following characteristics:

1.

A power of 50 kW or greater; and

2.

Capable of operating with melting temperatures above 1 473 K (1 200 o C);

c.

Computer control and monitoring systems specially configured for any of the furnaces specified in 2B227.a. or 2B227.b.;

d.

Plasma torches specially designed for furnaces specified in 2B227.b. having both of the following characteristics:

1.

Operating at a power greater than 50 kW; and

2.

Capable of operating above 1 473 K (1 200 o C);

e.

Electron beam guns specially designed for the furnaces specified in 2B227.b. operating at a power greater than 50 kW.

2B228

a.

Rotor assembly equipment for assembly of gas centrifuge rotor tube sections, baffles, and end caps;

Note:

b.

Rotor straightening equipment for alignment of gas centrifuge rotor tube sections to a common axis;

Technical Note:

In 2B228.b. such equipment normally consists of precision measuring probes linked to a computer that subsequently controls the action of, for example, pneumatic rams used for aligning the rotor tube sections.

c.

Bellows-forming mandrels and dies for producing single-convolution bellows.

Technical Note:

In 2B228.c. the bellows have all of the following characteristics:

1.

Inside diameter between 75 mm and 400 mm;

2.

Length equal to or greater than 12,7 mm;

3.

Single convolution depth greater than 2 mm; and

4.

Made of high - strength aluminium alloys, maraging steel or high strength "fibrous or filamentary materials".

2B230

a.

Pressure sensing elements made of or protected by aluminium, aluminium alloy, aluminium oxide (alumina or sapphire), nickel, nickel alloy with more than 60% nickel by weight, or fully fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers;

b.

Seals, if any, essential for sealing the pressure sensing element, and in direct contact with the process medium, made of or protected by aluminium, aluminium alloy, aluminium oxide (alumina or sapphire), nickel, nickel alloy with more than 60% nickel by weight, or fully fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers; and

c.

Having either of the following characteristics:

1.

A full scale of less than 13 kPa and an 'accuracy' of better than 1% of full-scale; or

2.

A full scale of 13 kPa or greater and an 'accuracy' of better than 130 Pa when measured at 13 kPa.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

2B231

a.

Input throat size equal to or greater than 380 mm;

b.

Pumping speed equal to or greater than 15 m 3 /s; and

c.

Capable of producing an ultimate vacuum better than 13 mPa.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

2B232

N.B.

2B233

N.B.

a.

Capable of an inlet volume flow rate of 50 m 3 /h or greater;

b.

Capable of a pressure ratio of 2:1 or greater; and

c.

Having all surfaces that come in contact with the process gas made from any of the following materials:

1.

Aluminium or aluminium alloy;

2.

Aluminium oxide;

3.

Stainless steel;

4.

Nickel or nickel alloy;

5.

Phosphor bronze; or

6.

Fluoropolymers.

2B350

a.

Reaction vessels or reactors, with or without agitators, with total internal (geometric) volume greater than 0,1 m 3 (100 litres) and less than 20 m 3 (20 000 litres), where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

N.B.

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

2.

Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);

3.

Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coating or glass lining);

4.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

5.

Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';

6.

Titanium or titanium 'alloys';

7.

Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; or

8.

Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';

b.

Agitators designed for use in reaction vessels or reactors specified in 2B350.a.; and impellers, blades or shafts designed for such agitators, where all surfaces of the agitator that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

2.

Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);

3.

Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

5.

Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';

6.

Titanium or titanium 'alloys';

7.

Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; or

8.

Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';

c.

Storage tanks, containers or receivers with a total internal (geometric) volume greater than 0,1 m 3 (100 litres) where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

N.B.

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

2.

Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);

3.

Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

5.

Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';

6.

Titanium or titanium 'alloys';

7.

Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; or

8.

Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';

d.

Heat exchangers or condensers with a heat transfer surface area greater than 0,15 m 2 , and less than 20 m 2 ; and tubes, plates, coils or blocks (cores) designed for such heat exchangers or condensers, where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

2.

Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);

3.

Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4.

Graphite or 'carbon graphite';

5.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

6.

Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';

7.

Titanium or titanium 'alloys';

8.

Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys';

9.

Silicon carbide;

10.

Titanium carbide; or

11.

Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';

e.

Distillation or absorption columns of internal diameter greater than 0,1 m; and liquid distributors, vapour distributors or liquid collectors designed for such distillation or absorption columns, where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

2.

Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);

3.

Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4.

Graphite or 'carbon graphite';

5.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

6.

Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';

7.

Titanium or titanium 'alloys';

8.

Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; or

9.

Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';

f.

Remotely operated filling equipment in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight; or

2.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

g.

Valves and components, as follows:

1.

Valves, having both of the following:

a.

A 'nominal size' greater than DN 10 or NPS 3/8; and

b.

All surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being produced, processed, or contained are made from 'corrosion resistant materials';

2.

Valves, other than those specified in 2B350.g.1., having all of the following;

a.

A 'nominal size' equal to or greater than DN 25 or NPS 1 and equal to or less than DN 100 or NPS 4;

b.

Casings (valve bodies) or preformed casing liners;

c.

A closure element designed to be interchangeable; and

d.

All surfaces of the casing (valve body) or preformed case liner that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being produced, processed, or contained are made from 'corrosion resistant materials';

3.

Components, designed for valves specified in 2B350.g.1. or 2B350.g.2., in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being produced, processed, or contained are made from 'corrosion resistant materials', as follows:

a.

Casings (valve bodies);

b.

Preformed casing liners;

Technical Notes:

1.

a.

Nickel or alloys with more than 40% nickel by weight;

b.

Alloys with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

c.

Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);

d.

Glass or glass-lined (including vitrified or enamelled coating);

e.

Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

f.

Titanium or titanium alloys;

g.

Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

h.

Niobium (columbium) or niobium alloys; or

i.

Ceramic materials as follows:

1.

Silicon carbide with a purity of 80% or more by weight;

2.

Aluminium oxide (alumina) with a purity of 99,9% or more by weight;

3.

Zirconium oxide (zirconia).

2.

3.

h.

Multi-walled piping incorporating a leak detection port, in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

2.

Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);

3.

Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4.

Graphite or 'carbon graphite';

5.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

6.

Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';

7.

Titanium or titanium 'alloys';

8.

Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; or

9.

Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';

i.

Multiple-seal and seal-less pumps, with manufacturer's specified maximum flow-rate greater than 0,6 m 3 /hour, or vacuum pumps with manufacturer's specified maximum flow-rate greater than 5 m 3 /hour (under standard temperature (273 K (0 o C)) and pressure (101,3 kPa) conditions), other than those specified in 2B233; and casings (pump bodies), preformed casing liners, impellers, rotors or jet pump nozzles designed for such pumps, in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

2.

Ceramics;

3.

Ferrosilicon (high silicon iron alloys);

4.

Fluoropolymers (polymeric or elastomeric materials with more than 35% fluorine by weight);

5.

Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

6.

Graphite or 'carbon graphite';

7.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

8.

Tantalum or tantalum 'alloys';

9.

Titanium or titanium 'alloys';

10.

Zirconium or zirconium 'alloys'; or

11.

Niobium (columbium) or niobium 'alloys';

Technical Note:

In 2B350.i., the term seal refers to only those seals that come into direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed (or are designed to), and provide a sealing function where a rotary or reciprocating drive shaft passes through a pump body.

j.

Incinerators designed to destroy chemicals specified in entry 1C350, having specially designed waste supply systems, special handling facilities and an average combustion chamber temperature greater than 1 273 K (1 000 o C), in which all surfaces in the waste supply system that come into direct contact with the waste products are made from or lined with any of the following materials:

1.

'Alloys' with more than 25% nickel and 20% chromium by weight;

2.

Ceramics; or

3.

Nickel or 'alloys' with more than 40% nickel by weight;

k.

Prefabricated repair assemblies having metallic surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed which are made from tantalum or tantalum alloys as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

Designed for mechanical attachment to glass-lined reaction vessels or reactors specified in 2B350.a.; or

2.

Designed for mechanical attachment to glass-lined storage tanks, containers or receivers specified in 2B350.c.

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

2B351

a.

Designed for continuous operation and usable for the detection of chemical warfare agents or chemicals specified in 1C350, at concentrations of less than 0,3 mg/m 3 ; or

b.

Designed for the detection of cholinesterase-inhibiting activity.

2B352

a.

Containment facilities and related equipment as follows:

1.

Complete containment facilities that meet the criteria for P3 or P4 (BL3, BL4, L3, L4) containment as specified in the WHO Laboratory Biosafety Manual (3 rd edition, Geneva, 2004);

2.

Equipment designed for fixed installation in containment facilities specified in 2B352.a., as follows:

a.

Double-door pass-through decontamination autoclaves;

b.

Breathing air suit decontamination showers;

c.

Mechanical-seal or inflatable-seal walkthrough doors;

b.

Fermenters and components as follows:

1.

Fermenters capable of cultivation of "microorganisms" or of live cells for the production of viruses or toxins, without the propagation of aerosols, having a total internal volume of 20 litres or more;

2.

Components designed for fermenters specified in 2B352.b.1. as follows:

a.

Cultivation chambers designed to be sterilised or disinfected in situ;

b.

Cultivation chamber holding devices;

c.

Process control units capable of simultaneously monitoring and controlling two or more fermentation system parameters (e.g., temperature, pH, nutrients, agitation, dissolved oxygen, air flow, foam control);

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

c.

Centrifugal separators, capable of continuous separation without the propagation of aerosols, having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Flow rate exceeding 100 litres per hour;

2.

Components of polished stainless steel or titanium;

3.

One or more sealing joints within the steam containment area; and

4.

Capable of in-situ steam sterilisation in a closed state;

Technical Note:

Centrifugal separators include decanters.

d.

Cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment and components as follows:

1.

Cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment capable of separation of "microorganisms", viruses, toxins or cell cultures having all of the following characteristics:

a.

A total filtration area equal to or greater than 1 m 2 ; and

b.

Having any of the following characteristics:

1.

Capable of being sterilised or disinfected in-situ; or

2.

Using disposable or single-use filtration components;

Technical Note:

In 2B352.d.1.b. sterilised denotes the elimination of all viable microbes from the equipment through the use of either physical (e.g. steam) or chemical agents. Disinfected denotes the destruction of potential microbial infectivity in the equipment through the use of chemical agents with a germicidal effect. Disinfection and sterilisation are distinct from sanitisation, the latter referring to cleaning procedures designed to lower the microbial content of equipment without necessarily achieving elimination of all microbial infectivity or viability.

Note:

2.

Cross (tangential) flow filtration components (e.g. modules, elements, cassettes, cartridges, units or plates) with filtration area equal to or greater than 0,2 m 2 for each component and designed for use in cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment specified in 2B352.d.;

e.

Steam, gas or vapour sterilisable freeze-drying equipment with a condenser capacity of 10 kg of ice or more in 24 hours and less than 1 000 kg of ice in 24 hours;

f.

Protective and containment equipment, as follows:

1.

Protective full or half suits, or hoods dependent upon a tethered external air supply and operating under positive pressure;

Note:

2.

Biocontainment chambers, isolators, or biological safety cabinets having all of the following characteristics, for normal operation:

a.

Fully enclosed workspace where the operator is separated from the work by a physical barrier;

b.

Able to operate at negative pressure;

c.

Means to safely manipulate items in the workspace;

d.

Supply and exhaust air to and from the workspace is HEPA filtered;

Note 1:

Note 2:

g.

Aerosol inhalation equipment designed for aerosol challenge testing with "microorganisms", viruses or "toxins" as follows:

1.

Whole-body exposure chambers having a capacity of 1 m 3 or more;

2.

Nose-only exposure apparatus utilising directed aerosol flow and having capacity for exposure of any of the following:

a.

12 or more rodents; or

b.

2 or more animals other than rodents;

3.

Closed animal restraint tubes designed for use with nose-only exposure apparatus utilising directed aerosol flow;

h.

Spray drying equipment capable of drying toxins or pathogenic "microorganisms" having all of the following:

1.

A water evaporation capacity of ≥ 0,4 kg/h and ≤ 400 kg/h;

2.

The ability to generate a typical mean product particle size of ≤10 μm with existing fittings or by minimal modification of the spray-dryer with atomisation nozzles enabling generation of the required particle size; and

3.

Capable of being sterilised or disinfected in situ;

i.

Nucleic acid assemblers and synthesisers, which are partly or entirely automated, and designed to generate continuous nucleic acids greater than 1,5 kilobases in length with error rates less than 5% in a single run.

2C Materials

None.

2D Software

2D001

a.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development" or "production" of equipment specified in 2A001 or 2B001

b.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of equipment specified in 2A001.c., 2B001 or 2B003 to 2B009.

Note:

2D002

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

2D003

2D101

N.B.

2D201

2D202

Note:

2D351

2E Technology

2E001

Note:

2E002

2E003

a.

Not used;

b.

"Technology" for metal-working manufacturing processes, as follows:

1.

"Technology" for the design of tools, dies or fixtures specially designed for any of the following processes:

a.

"Superplastic forming";

b.

"Diffusion bonding"; or

c.

'Direct-acting hydraulic pressing';

2.

Technical data consisting of process methods or parameters as listed below used to control:

a.

"Superplastic forming" of aluminium alloys, titanium alloys or "superalloys":

1.

Surface preparation;

2.

Strain rate;

3.

Temperature;

4.

Pressure;

b.

"Diffusion bonding" of "superalloys" or titanium alloys:

1.

Surface preparation;

2.

Temperature;

3.

Pressure;

c.

'Direct-acting hydraulic pressing' of aluminium alloys or titanium alloys:

1.

Pressure;

2.

Cycle time;

d.

'Hot isostatic densification' of titanium alloys, aluminium alloys or "superalloys":

1.

Temperature;

2.

Pressure;

3.

Cycle time;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

c.

"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of hydraulic stretch-forming machines and dies therefor, for the manufacture of airframe structures;

d.

Not used;

e.

"Technology" for the "development" of integration "software" for incorporation of expert systems for advanced decision support of shop floor operations into "numerical control" units;

f.

"Technology" for the application of inorganic overlay coatings or inorganic surface modification coatings (specified in column 3 of the following table) to non-electronic substrates (specified in column 2 of the following table), by processes specified in column 1 of the following table and defined in the Technical Note.

Note:

N.B.

2E101

2E201

2E301

TABLE - DEPOSITION TECHNIQUES

1.

2.

3.

A.

Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD)

"Superalloys"

Aluminides for internal passages

Ceramics (19) and Low expansion glasses (14)

Silicides

Carbides

Dielectric layers (15)

Diamond

Diamond-like carbon (17)

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"

Silicides

Carbides

Refractory metals

Mixtures thereof (4)

Dielectric layers (15)

Aluminides

Alloyed aluminides (2)

Boron nitride

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18)

Carbides

Tungsten

Mixtures thereof (4)

Dielectric layers (15)

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Diamond

Diamond-like carbon (17)

Sensor window materials (9)

Dielectric layers (15)

Diamond

Diamond-like carbon (17)

B.

Thermal-Evaporation Physical Vapour Deposition (TE-PVD)

B.1.

Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): Electron-Beam (EB-PVD)

"Superalloys"

Alloyed silicides

Alloyed aluminides (2)

MCrAlX (5)

Modified zirconia (12)

Silicides

Aluminides

Mixtures thereof (4)

Ceramics (19) and Low expansion glasses (14)

Dielectric layers (15)

Corrosion resistant steel (7)

MCrAlX (5)

Modified zirconia (12)

Mixtures thereof (4)

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"

Silicides

Carbides

Refractory metals

Mixtures thereof (4)

Dielectric layers (15)

Boron nitride

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18)

Carbides

Tungsten

Mixtures thereof (4)

Dielectric layers (15)

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Borides

Beryllium

Sensor window materials (9)

Dielectric layers (15)

Titanium alloys (13)

Borides

Nitrides

B.2.

Ion assisted resistive heating Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD) (Ion Plating)

Ceramics (19) and Low-expansion glasses

Dielectric layers (15)

Diamond-like carbon (17)

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"

Dielectric layers (15)

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide

Dielectric layers (15)

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Sensor window materials (9)

Dielectric layers (15)

Diamond-like carbon (17)

B.3.

Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): "Laser" Vaporization

Ceramics (19) and Low expansion glasses (14)

Silicides

Dielectric layers (15)

Diamond-like carbon (17)

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"

Dielectric layers (15)

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide

Dielectric layers (15)

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Sensor window materials (9)

Dielectric layers (15)

Diamond-like carbon (17)

B.4.

Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): Cathodic Arc Discharge

"Superalloys"

Alloyed silicides

Alloyed aluminides (2)

MCrAlX (5)

Polymers (11) and Organic "matrix""composites"

Borides

Carbides

Nitrides

Diamond-like carbon (17)

C.

Pack cementation (see A above for out-of-pack cementation) (10)

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"

Silicides

Carbides

Mixtures thereof (4)

Titanium alloys (13)

Silicides

Aluminides

Alloyed aluminides (2)

Refractory metals and alloys (8)

Silicides

Oxides

D.

Plasma spraying

"Superalloys"

MCrAlX (5)

Modified zirconia (12)

Mixtures thereof (4)

Abradable Nickel-Graphite

Abradable materials containing Ni-Cr-Al

Abradable Al-Si-Polyester

Alloyed aluminides (2)

Aluminium alloys (6)

MCrAlX (5)

Modified zirconia (12)

Silicides

Mixtures thereof (4)

Refractory metals and alloys (8)

Aluminides

Silicides

Carbides

Corrosion resistant steel (7)

MCrAlX (5)

Modified zirconia (12)

Mixtures thereof (4)

Titanium alloys (13)

Carbides

Aluminides

Silicides

Alloyed aluminides (2)

Abradable Nickel-Graphite

Abradable materials containing Ni-Cr-Al

Abradable Al-Si-Polyester

E.

Slurry Deposition

Refractory metals and alloys (8)

Fused silicides

Fused aluminides except for resistance heating elements

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"

Silicides

Carbides

Mixtures thereof (4)

F.

Sputter Deposition

"Superalloys"

Alloyed silicides

Alloyed aluminides (2)

Noble metal modified aluminides (3)

MCrAlX (5)

Modified zirconia (12)

Platinum

Mixtures thereof (4)

Ceramics and Low- expansion glasses (14)

Silicides

Platinum

Mixtures thereof (4)

Dielectic layers (15)

Diamond-like carbon (17)

Titanium alloys (13)

Borides

Nitrides

Oxides

Silicides

Aluminides

Alloyed aluminides (2)

Carbides

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal "matrix""composites"

Silicides

Carbides

Refractory metals

Mixtures thereof (4)

Dielectric layers (15)

Boron nitride

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18)

Carbides

Tungsten

Mixtures thereof (4)

Dielectric layers (15)

Boron nitride

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys

Dielectric layers (15)

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys

Borides

Dielectric layers (15)

Beryllium

Sensor window materials (9)

Dielectric layers (15)

Diamond-like carbon (17)

Refractory metals and alloys (8)

Aluminides

Silicides

Oxides

Carbides

G.

Ion Implantation

High temperature bearing steels

Additions of Chromium Tantalum or Niobium (Columbium)

Titanium alloys (13)

Borides

Nitrides

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys

Borides

Cemented tungsten carbide (16)

Carbides

Nitrides

TABLE - DEPOSITION TECHNIQUES - NOTES

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

a.

CoCrAlY coatings which contain less than 22% by weight of chromium, less than 7% by weight of aluminium and less than 2% by weight of yttrium;

b.

CoCrAlY coatings which contain 22 to 24% by weight of chromium, 10 to 12% by weight of aluminium and 0,5 to 0,7% by weight of yttrium; or

c.

NiCrAlY coatings which contain 21 to 23% by weight of chromium, 10 to 12% by weight of aluminium and 0,9 to 1,1% by weight of yttrium.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

magnetic disk drives and heads, equipment for the manufacture of disposables, valves for faucets, acoustic diaphragms for speakers, engine parts for automobiles, cutting tools, punching-pressing dies, office automation equipment, microphones or medical devices or moulds, for casting or moulding of plastics, manufactured from alloys containing less than 5% beryllium.

18.

19.

TABLE - DEPOSITION TECHNIQUES - TECHNICAL NOTE

Processes specified in Column 1 of the Table are defined as follows:

a.

Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) is an overlay coating or surface modification coating process wherein a metal, alloy, "composite", dielectric or ceramic is deposited upon a heated substrate. Gaseous reactants are decomposed or combined in the vicinity of a substrate resulting in the deposition of the desired elemental, alloy or compound material on the substrate. Energy for this decomposition or chemical reaction process may be provided by the heat of the substrate, a glow discharge plasma, or "laser" irradiation.

N.B.1

N.B.2

N.B.3

b.

Thermal Evaporation-Physical Vapour Deposition (TE-PVD) is an overlay coating process conducted in a vacuum with a pressure less than 0,1 Pa wherein a source of thermal energy is used to vaporize the coating material. This process results in the condensation, or deposition, of the evaporated species onto appropriately positioned substrates.

The addition of gases to the vacuum chamber during the coating process to synthesise compound coatings is an ordinary modification of the process.

The use of ion or electron beams, or plasma, to activate or assist the coating's deposition is also a common modification in this technique. The use of monitors to provide in-process measurement of optical characteristics and thickness of coatings can be a feature of these processes.

Specific TE-PVD processes are as follows:

1.

Electron Beam PVD uses an electron beam to heat and evaporate the material which forms the coating;

2.

Ion Assisted Resistive Heating PVD employs electrically resistive heating sources in combination with impinging ion beam(s) to produce a controlled and uniform flux of evaporated coating species;

3.

"Laser" Vaporization uses either pulsed or continuous wave "laser" beams to vaporize the material which forms the coating;

4.

Cathodic Arc Deposition employs a consumable cathode of the material which forms the coating and has an arc discharge established on the surface by a momentary contact of a ground trigger. Controlled motion of arcing erodes the cathode surface creating a highly ionised plasma. The anode can be either a cone attached to the periphery of the cathode, through an insulator, or the chamber. Substrate biasing is used for non line-of-sight deposition;

N.B.

5.

Ion Plating is a special modification of a general TE-PVD process in which a plasma or an ion source is used to ionise the species to be deposited, and a negative bias is applied to the substrate in order to facilitate the extraction of the species from the plasma. The introduction of reactive species, evaporation of solids within the process chamber, and the use of monitors to provide in-process measurement of optical characteristics and thicknesses of coatings are ordinary modifications of the process.

c.

Pack Cementation is a surface modification coating or overlay coating process wherein a substrate is immersed in a powder mixture (a pack), that consists of:

1.

The metallic powders that are to be deposited (usually aluminium, chromium, silicon or combinations thereof);

2.

An activator (normally a halide salt); and

3.

An inert powder, most frequently alumina.

The substrate and powder mixture is contained within a retort which is heated to between 1 030 K (757°C) and 1 375 K (1 102°C) for sufficient time to deposit the coating.

d.

Plasma Spraying is an overlay coating process wherein a gun (spray torch) which produces and controls a plasma accepts powder or wire coating materials, melts them and propels them towards a substrate, whereon an integrally bonded coating is formed. Plasma spraying constitutes either low pressure plasma spraying or high velocity plasma spraying.

N.B.1

N.B.2

e.

Slurry Deposition is a surface modification coating or overlay coating process wherein a metallic or ceramic powder with an organic binder is suspended in a liquid and is applied to a substrate by either spraying, dipping or painting, subsequent air or oven drying, and heat treatment to obtain the desired coating.

f.

Sputter Deposition is an overlay coating process based on a momentum transfer phenomenon, wherein positive ions are accelerated by an electric field towards the surface of a target (coating material). The kinetic energy of the impacting ions is sufficient to cause target surface atoms to be released and deposited on an appropriately positioned substrate.

N.B.1

N.B.2

g.

Ion Implantation is a surface modification coating process in which the element to be alloyed is ionised, accelerated through a potential gradient and implanted into the surface region of the substrate. This includes processes in which ion implantation is performed simultaneously with electron beam physical vapour deposition or sputter deposition.

PART V – Category 3

CATEGORY 3 - ELECTRONICS

3A Systems, Equipment and Components

Note 1:

Note 2:

N.B.

Note 3:

3A001

a.

General purpose integrated circuits, as follows:

Note:

—

"Monolithic integrated circuits";

—

"Hybrid integrated circuits";

—

"Multichip integrated circuits";

—

"Film type integrated circuits", including silicon-on-sapphire integrated circuits;

—

"Optical integrated circuits";

—

"Three dimensional integrated circuits";

—

"Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuits" ("MMICs").

1.

Integrated circuits designed or rated as radiation hardened to withstand any of the following:

a.

A total dose of 5 x 10 3 Gy (silicon) or higher;

b.

A dose rate upset of 5 x 10 6 Gy (silicon)/s or higher; or

c.

A fluence (integrated flux) of neutrons (1 MeV equivalent) of 5 x 10 13 n/cm 2 or higher on silicon, or its equivalent for other materials;

Note:

2.

"Microprocessor microcircuits", "microcomputer microcircuits", microcontroller microcircuits, storage integrated circuits manufactured from a compound semiconductor, analogue-to-digital converters, integrated circuits that contain analogue-to-digital converters and store or process the digitised data, digital-to-analogue converters, electro-optical or "optical integrated circuits" designed for "signal processing", field programmable logic devices, custom integrated circuits for which either the function is unknown or the control status of the equipment in which the integrated circuit will be used is unknown, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processors, Static Random-Access Memories (SRAMs), or 'non-volatile memories', having any of the following:

a.

Rated for operation at an ambient temperature above 398 K (125°C);

b.

Rated for operation at an ambient temperature below 218 K (-55°C); or

c.

Rated for operation over the entire ambient temperature range from 218 K (-55°C) to 398 K (125°C);

Note:

Technical Note:

'Non-volatile memories' are memories with data retention over a period of time after a power shutdown.

3.

"Microprocessor microcircuits", "microcomputer microcircuits" and microcontroller microcircuits, manufactured from a compound semiconductor and operating at a clock frequency exceeding 40 MHz;

Note:

4.

Not used;

5.

Analogue-to-Digital Converter (ADC) and Digital-to-Analogue Converter (DAC) integrated circuits, as follows:

a.

ADCs having any of the following:

N.B.

1.

A resolution of 8 bit or more, but less than 10 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,3 Giga Samples Per Second (GSPS);

2.

A resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 600 Mega Samples Per Second (MSPS);

3.

A resolution of 12 bit or more, but less than 14 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 400 MSPS;

4.

A resolution of 14 bit or more, but less than 16 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 250 MSPS; or

5.

A resolution of 16 bit or more with a "sample rate" greater than 65 MSPS;

N.B.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

b.

Digital-to-Analogue Converters (DAC) having any of the following:

1.

A resolution of 10 bit or more but less than 12 bit, with an 'adjusted update rate' exceeding 3 500 MSPS; or

2.

A resolution of 12 bit or more and having any of the following:

a.

An 'adjusted update rate' exceeding 1 250 MSPS but not exceeding 3 500 MSPS, and having any of the following:

1.

A settling time less than 9 ns to arrive at or within 0,024% of full-scale from a full scale step; or

2.

A 'Spurious Free Dynamic Range' (SFDR) greater than 68 dBc (carrier) when synthesising a full scale analogue signal of 100 MHz or the highest full scale analogue signal frequency specified below 100 MHz; or

b.

An 'adjusted update rate' exceeding 3 500 MSPS;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3

4.

a.

For conventional (non-interpolating) DACs, the 'adjusted update rate' is the rate at which the digital signal is converted to an analogue signal and the output analogue values are changed by the DAC. For DACs where the interpolation mode may be bypassed (interpolation factor of one), the DAC should be considered as a conventional (non-interpolating) DAC.

b.

For interpolating DACs (oversampling DACs), the 'adjusted update rate' is defined as the DAC update rate divided by the smallest interpolating factor. For interpolating DACs, the 'adjusted update rate' may be referred to by different terms including:

—

input data rate

—

input word rate

—

input sample rate

—

maximum total input bus rate

—

maximum DAC clock rate for DAC clock input.

6.

Electro-optical and "optical integrated circuits", designed for "signal processing" and having all of the following:

a.

One or more than one internal "laser" diode;

b.

One or more than one internal light detecting element; and

c.

Optical waveguides;

7.

Field programmable logic devices having any of the following:

a.

A maximum number of single-ended digital input/outputs of greater than 700; or

b.

An 'aggregate one-way peak serial transceiver data rate' of 500 Gb/s or greater;

Note:

Complex Programmable Logic Devices (CPLDs)

Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs)

Field Programmable Logic Arrays (FPLAs)

Field Programmable Interconnects (FPICs)

N.B.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

8.

Not used;

9.

Neural network integrated circuits;

10.

Custom integrated circuits for which the function is unknown, or the control status of the equipment in which the integrated circuits will be used is unknown to the manufacturer, having any of the following:

a.

More than 1 500 terminals;

b.

A typical "basic gate propagation delay time" of less than 0,02 ns; or

c.

An operating frequency exceeding 3 GHz;

11.

Digital integrated circuits, other than those described in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.10. and 3A001.a.12., based upon any compound semiconductor and having any of the following:

a.

An equivalent gate count of more than 3 000 (2 input gates); or

b.

A toggle frequency exceeding 1,2 GHz;

12.

Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processors having a rated execution time for an N-point complex FFT of less than (N log 2 N) /20 480 ms, where N is the number of points;

Technical Note:

When N is equal to 1 024 points, the formula in 3A001.a.12. gives an execution time of 500 μs.

13.

Direct Digital Synthesizer (DDS) integrated circuits having any of the following:

a.

A Digital-to-Analogue Converter (DAC) clock frequency of 3,5 GHz or more and a DAC resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit; or

b.

A DAC clock frequency of 1,25 GHz or more and a DAC resolution of 12 bit or more;

Technical Note:

The DAC clock frequency may be specified as the master clock frequency or the input clock frequency.

14.

Integrated circuits that perform or are programmable to perform all of the following:

a.

Analogue-to-digital conversions meeting any of the following:

1.

A resolution of 8 bit or more, but less than 10 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,3 Giga Samples Per Second (GSPS);

2.

A resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,0 GSPS;

3.

A resolution of 12 bit or more, but less than 14 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,0 GSPS;

4.

A resolution of 14 bit or more, but less than 16 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 400 Mega Samples Per Second (MSPS); or

5.

A resolution of 16 bit or more with a "sample rate" greater than 180 MSPS; and

b.

Any of the following:

1.

Storage of digitised data; or

2.

Processing of digitised data;

N.B.1.

N.B.2.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

b.

Microwave or millimetre wave items as follows:

Technical Note:

For purposes of 3A001.b., the parameter peak saturated power output may also be referred to on product data sheets as output power, saturated power output, maximum power output, peak power output, or peak envelope power output.

1.

"Vacuum electronic devices" and cathodes, as follows:

Note 1:

a.

Does not exceed 31,8 GHz; and

b.

Is "allocated by the ITU" for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.

Note 2:

a.

An average output power equal to or less than 50 W; and

b.

Designed or rated for operation in any frequency band and having all of the following:

1.

Exceeds 31,8 GHz but does not exceed 43,5 GHz; and

2.

Is "allocated by the ITU" for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.

a.

Travelling-wave "vacuum electronic devices", pulsed or continuous wave, as follows:

1.

Devices operating at frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz;

2.

Devices having a cathode heater with a turn on time to rated RF power of less than 3 seconds;

3.

Coupled cavity devices, or derivatives thereof, with a "fractional bandwidth" of more than 7% or a peak power exceeding 2,5 kW;

4.

Devices based on helix, folded waveguide, or serpentine waveguide circuits, or derivatives thereof, having any of the following:

a.

An "instantaneous bandwidth" of more than one octave, and average power (expressed in kW) times frequency (expressed in GHz) of more than 0,5;

b.

An "instantaneous bandwidth" of one octave or less, and average power (expressed in kW) times frequency (expressed in GHz) of more than 1;

c.

Being "space-qualified"; or

d.

Having a gridded electron gun;

5.

Devices with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than or equal to 10%, with any of the following:

a.

An annular electron beam;

b.

A non-axisymmetric electron beam; or

c.

Multiple electron beams;

b.

Crossed-field amplifier "vacuum electronic devices" with a gain of more than 17 dB;

c.

Thermionic cathodes designed for "vacuum electronic devices" producing an emission current density at rated operating conditions exceeding 5 A/cm 2 or a pulsed (non-continuous) current density at rated operating conditions exceeding 10 A/cm 2 ;

d.

"Vacuum electronic devices" with the capability to operate in a 'dual mode'.

Technical Note:

'Dual mode' means the "vacuum electronic device" beam current can be intentionally changed between continuous-wave and pulsed mode operation by use of a grid and produces a peak pulse output power greater than the continuous-wave output power.

2.

"Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuits" ("MMIC") amplifiers that are any of the following:

N.B.

a.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 15%, and having any of the following:

1.

A peak saturated power output greater than 75 W (48,75 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 2,9 GHz;

2.

A peak saturated power output greater than 55 W (47,4 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,9 GHz up to and including 3,2 GHz;

3.

A peak saturated power output greater than 40 W (46 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 3,7 GHz; or

4.

A peak saturated power output greater than 20 W (43 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz;

b.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 16 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 10%, and having any of the following:

1.

A peak saturated power output greater than 10 W (40 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 8,5 GHz; or

2.

A peak saturated power output greater than 5 W (37 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 16 GHz;

c.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 3 W (34,77 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;

d.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37 GHz;

e.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 1 W (30 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 37 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;

f.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 31,62 mW (15 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz up to and including 75 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;

g.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 10 mW (10 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 75 GHz up to and including 90 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 5%; or

h.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 90 GHz;

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

3.

Discrete microwave transistors that are any of the following:

a.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz and having any of the following:

1.

A peak saturated power output greater than 400 W (56 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 2,9 GHz;

2.

A peak saturated power output greater than 205 W (53,12 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,9 GHz up to and including 3,2 GHz;

3.

A peak saturated power output greater than 115 W (50,61 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 3,7 GHz; or

4.

A peak saturated power output greater than 60 W (47,78 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz;

b.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz and having any of the following:

1.

A peak saturated power output greater than 50 W (47 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 8,5 GHz;

2.

A peak saturated power output greater than 15 W (41,76 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 12 GHz;

3.

A peak saturated power output greater than 40 W (46 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 12 GHz up to and including 16 GHz; or

4.

A peak saturated power output greater than 7 W (38,45 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz;

c.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,5 W (27 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37 GHz;

d.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 1 W (30 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 37 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz;

e.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz; or

f.

Other than those specified in 3A001.b.3.a. to 3A001.b.3.e and rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 5 W (37,0 dBm) at all frequencies exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz;

Note 1:

Note 2:

4.

Microwave solid state amplifiers and microwave assemblies/modules containing microwave solid state amplifiers, that are any of the following:

a.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 15%, and having any of the following:

1.

A peak saturated power output greater than 500 W (57 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 2,9 GHz;

2.

A peak saturated power output greater than 270 W (54,3 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,9 GHz up to and including 3,2 GHz;

3.

A peak saturated power output greater than 200 W (53 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 3,7 GHz; or

4.

A peak saturated power output greater than 90 W (49,54 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz;

b.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 10%, and having any of the following:

1.

A peak saturated power output greater than 70 W (48,54 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 8,5 GHz;

2.

A peak saturated power output greater than 50 W (47 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 12 GHz;

3.

A peak saturated power output greater than 30 W (44,77 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 12 GHz up to and including 16 GHz; or

4.

A peak saturated power output greater than 20 W (43 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz;

c.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,5 W (27 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37 GHz;

d.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 2 W (33 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 37 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;

e.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 43,5 GHz and having any of the following:

1.

A peak saturated power output greater than 0,2 W (23 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz up to and including 75 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;

2.

A peak saturated power output greater than 20 mW (13 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 75 GHz up to and including 90 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 5%; or

3.

A peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 90 GHz; or

f.

Not used

N.B.1.

N.B.2.

N.B.3.

Note 1:

Note 2:

5.

Electronically or magnetically tunable band-pass or band-stop filters, having more than 5 tunable resonators capable of tuning across a 1,5:1 frequency band (f max /f min ) in less than 10 μs and having any of the following:

a.

A band-pass bandwidth of more than 0,5% of centre frequency; or

b.

A band-stop bandwidth of less than 0,5% of centre frequency;

6.

Not used;

7.

Converters and harmonic mixers that are any of the following:

a.

Designed to extend the frequency range of "signal analysers" beyond 90 GHz;

b.

Designed to extend the operating range of signal generators as follows:

1.

Beyond 90 GHz;

2.

To an output power greater than 100 mW (20 dBm) anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;

c.

Designed to extend the operating range of network analysers as follows:

1.

Beyond 110 GHz;

2.

To an output power greater than 31,62 mW (15 dBm) anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;

3.

To an output power greater than 1 mW (0 dBm) anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 90 GHz but not exceeding 110 GHz; or

d.

Designed to extend the frequency range of microwave test receivers beyond 110 GHz;

8.

Microwave power amplifiers containing "vacuum electronic devices" specified in 3A001.b.1. and having all of the following:

a.

Operating frequencies above 3 GHz;

b.

An average output power to mass ratio exceeding 80 W/kg; and

c.

A volume of less than 400 cm 3 ;

Note:

9.

Microwave power modules (MPM) consisting of, at least, a travelling wave "vacuum electronic device", a "monolithic microwave integrated circuit" ("MMIC") and an integrated electronic power conditioner and having all of the following:

a.

A 'turn-on time' from off to fully operational in less than 10 seconds;

b.

A volume less than the maximum rated power in Watts multiplied by 10 cm 3 /W; and

c.

An "instantaneous bandwidth" greater than 1 octave (f max > 2f min ) and having any of the following:

1.

For frequencies equal to or less than 18 GHz, an RF output power greater than 100 W; or

2.

A frequency greater than 18 GHz;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

10.

Oscillators or oscillator assemblies, specified to operate with a single sideband (SSB) phase noise, in dBc/Hz, less (better) than -(126 + 20log 10 F - 20log 10 f) anywhere within the range of 10 Hz ≤ F ≤ 10 kHz;

Technical Note:

In 3A001.b.10., F is the offset from the operating frequency in Hz and f is the operating frequency in MHz.

11.

'Frequency synthesiser' "electronic assemblies" having a "frequency switching time" as specified by any of the following:

a.

Less than 143 ps;

b.

Less than 100 μs for any frequency change exceeding 2,2 GHz within the synthesised frequency range exceeding 4,8 GHz but not exceeding 31,8 GHz;

c.

Not used;

d.

Less than 500 μs for any frequency change exceeding 550 MHz within the synthesised frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz;

e.

Less than 100 μs for any frequency change exceeding 2,2 GHz within the synthesised frequency range exceeding 37 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz; or

f.

Not used;

g.

Less than 1 ms within the synthesised frequency range exceeding 90 GHz;

Technical Note:

A 'frequency synthesiser' is any kind of frequency source, regardless of the actual technique used, providing a multiplicity of simultaneous or alternative output frequencies, from one or more outputs, controlled by, derived from or disciplined by a lesser number of standard (or master) frequencies.

N.B.

12.

'Transmit/receive modules', 'transmit/receive MMICs', 'transmit modules', and 'transmit MMICs', rated for operation at frequencies above 2,7 GHz and having all of the following:

a.

A peak saturated power output (in watts), P sat , greater than 505,62 divided by the maximum operating frequency (in GHz) squared [P sat >505,62 W*GHz 2 /f GHz 2 ] for any channel;

b.

A "fractional bandwidth" of 5% or greater for any channel;

c.

Any planar side with length d (in cm) equal to or less than 15 divided by the lowest operating frequency in GHz [d ≤ 15cm*GHz*N/f GHz ] where N is the number of transmit or transmit/receive channels; and

d.

An electronically variable phase shifter per channel.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

c.

Acoustic wave devices as follows and specially designed components therefor:

1.

Surface acoustic wave and surface skimming (shallow bulk) acoustic wave devices, having any of the following:

a.

A carrier frequency exceeding 6 GHz;

b.

A carrier frequency exceeding 1 GHz, but not exceeding 6 GHz and having any of the following:

1.

A 'frequency side-lobe rejection' exceeding 65 dB;

2.

A product of the maximum delay time and the bandwidth (time in μs and bandwidth in MHz) of more than 100;

3.

A bandwidth greater than 250 MHz; or

4.

A dispersive delay of more than 10 μs; or

c.

A carrier frequency of 1 GHz or less and having any of the following:

1.

A product of the maximum delay time and the bandwidth (time in μs and bandwidth in MHz) of more than 100;

2.

A dispersive delay of more than 10 μs; or

3.

A 'frequency side-lobe rejection' exceeding 65 dB and a bandwidth greater than 100 MHz;

Technical Note:

'Frequency side-lobe rejection' is the maximum rejection value specified in data sheet.

2.

Bulk (volume) acoustic wave devices which permit the direct processing of signals at frequencies exceeding 6 GHz;

3.

Acoustic-optic "signal processing" devices employing interaction between acoustic waves (bulk wave or surface wave) and light waves which permit the direct processing of signals or images, including spectral analysis, correlation or convolution;

Note:

d.

Electronic devices and circuits containing components, manufactured from "superconductive" materials, specially designed for operation at temperatures below the "critical temperature" of at least one of the "superconductive" constituents and having any of the following:

1.

Current switching for digital circuits using "superconductive" gates with a product of delay time per gate (in seconds) and power dissipation per gate (in watts) of less than 10 -14 J; or

2.

Frequency selection at all frequencies using resonant circuits with Q-values exceeding 10 000;

e.

High energy devices as follows:

1.

'Cells' as follows:

a.

'Primary cells' having any of the following at 20°C;

1.

'Energy density' exceeding 550 Wh/kg and a 'continuous power density' exceeding 50 W/kg; or

2.

'Energy density' exceeding 50 Wh/kg and a 'continuous power density' exceeding 350 W/kg; or

b.

'Secondary cells' having an 'energy density' exceeding 350 Wh/kg at 20°C;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Note:

2.

High energy storage capacitors as follows:

N.B.

a.

Capacitors with a repetition rate of less than 10 Hz (single shot capacitors) and having all of the following:

1.

A voltage rating equal to or more than 5 kV;

2.

An energy density equal to or more than 250 J/kg; and

3.

A total energy equal to or more than 25 kJ;

b.

Capacitors with a repetition rate of 10 Hz or more (repetition rated capacitors) and having all of the following:

1.

A voltage rating equal to or more than 5 kV;

2.

An energy density equal to or more than 50 J/kg;

3.

A total energy equal to or more than 100 J; and

4.

A charge/discharge cycle life equal to or more than 10 000;

3.

"Superconductive" electromagnets and solenoids, specially designed to be fully charged or discharged in less than one second and having all of the following:

N.B.

Note:

a.

Energy delivered during the discharge exceeding 10 kJ in the first second;

b.

Inner diameter of the current carrying windings of more than 250 mm; and

c.

Rated for a magnetic induction of more than 8 T or "overall current density" in the winding of more than 300 A/mm 2 ;

4.

Solar cells, cell-interconnect-coverglass (CIC) assemblies, solar panels, and solar arrays, which are "space-qualified", having a minimum average efficiency exceeding 20% at an operating temperature of 301 K (28°C) under simulated 'AM0' illumination with an irradiance of 1 367 watts per square metre (W/m 2 );

Technical Note:

'AM0', or 'Air Mass Zero', refers to the spectral irradiance of sun light in the earth's outer atmosphere when the distance between the earth and sun is one astronomical unit (AU).

f.

Rotary input type absolute position encoders having an "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 1,0 second of arc and specially designed encoder rings, discs or scales therefor;

g.

Solid-state pulsed power switching thyristor devices and 'thyristor modules', using either electrically, optically, or electron radiation controlled switch methods and having any of the following:

1.

A maximum turn-on current rate of rise (di/dt) greater than 30 000 A/μs and off-state voltage greater than 1 100 V; or

2.

A maximum turn-on current rate of rise (di/dt) greater than 2 000 A/μs and having all of the following:

a.

An off-state peak voltage equal to or greater than 3 000 V; and

b.

A peak (surge) current equal to or greater than 3 000 A.

Note 1:

Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs)

Electrical Triggering Thyristors (ETTs)

Light Triggering Thyristors (LTTs)

Integrated Gate Commutated Thyristors (IGCTs)

Gate Turn-off Thyristors (GTOs)

MOS Controlled Thyristors (MCTs)

Solidtrons

Note 2:

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 3A001.g., a 'thyristor module' contains one or more thyristor devices.

h.

Solid-state power semiconductor switches, diodes, or 'modules', having all of the following:

1.

Rated for a maximum operating junction temperature greater than 488 K (215°C);

2.

Repetitive peak off-state voltage (blocking voltage) exceeding 300 V; and

3.

Continuous current greater than 1 A.

Note 1:

Note 2:

Junction Field Effect Transistors (JFETs)

Vertical Junction Field Effect Transistors (VJFETs)

Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistors (MOSFETs)

Double Diffused Metal Oxide Semiconductor Field Effect Transistor (DMOSFET)

Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT)

High Electron Mobility Transistors (HEMTs)

Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs)

Thyristors and Silicon Controlled Rectifiers (SCRs)

Gate Turn-Off Thyristors (GTOs)

Emitter Turn-Off Thyristors (ETOs)

PiN Diodes

Schottky Diodes

Note 3:

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 3A001.h., 'modules' contain one or more solid-state power semiconductor switches or diodes.

i.

Intensity, amplitude, or phase electro-optic modulators, designed for analogue signals and having any of the following:

1.

A maximum operating frequency of more than 10 GHz but less than 20 GHz, an optical insertion loss equal to or less than 3 dB and having any of the following:

a.

A 'half-wave voltage' ('Vπ') less than 2,7 V when measured at a frequency of 1 GHz or below; or

b.

A 'Vπ' of less than 4 V when measured at a frequency of more than 1 GHz; or

2.

A maximum operating frequency equal to or greater than 20 GHz, an optical insertion loss equal to or less than 3 dB and having any of the following:

a.

A 'Vπ' less than 3,3 V when measured at a frequency of 1 GHz or below; or

b.

A 'Vπ' less than 5 V when measured at a frequency of more than 1 GHz.

Note:

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 3A001.i., a 'half-wave voltage' ('Vπ') is the applied voltage necessary to make a phase change of 180 degrees in the wavelength of light propagating through the optical modulator.

3A002

a.

Recording equipment and oscilloscopes as follows:

1.

Not used;

2.

Not used;

3.

Not used;

4.

Not used;

5.

Not used;

6.

Digital data recorders having all of the following:

a.

A sustained 'continuous throughput' of more than 6,4 Gbit/s to disk or solid-state drive memory; and

b.

"Signal processing" of the radio frequency signal data while it is being recorded;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

7.

Real-time oscilloscopes having a vertical root-mean-square (rms) noise voltage of less than 2% of full-scale at the vertical scale setting that provides the lowest noise value for any input 3dB bandwidth of 60 GHz or greater per channel;

Note:

b.

Not used;

c.

"Signal analysers" as follows:

1.

"Signal analysers" having a 3 dB resolution bandwidth (RBW) exceeding 40 MHz anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz;

2.

"Signal analysers" having Displayed Average Noise Level (DANL) less (better) than -150 dBm/Hz anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;

3.

"Signal analysers" having a frequency exceeding 90 GHz;

4.

"Signal analysers" having all of the following:

a.

'Real-time bandwidth' exceeding 170 MHz; and

b.

Having any of the following:

1.

100% probability of discovery with less than a 3 dB reduction from full amplitude due to gaps or windowing effects of signals having a duration of 15 μs or less; or

2.

A 'frequency mask trigger' function with 100% probability of trigger (capture) for signals having a duration of 15 μs or less;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Note:

5.

Not used;

d.

Signal generators having any of the following:

1.

Specified to generate pulse-modulated signals having all of the following, anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz:

a.

'Pulse duration' of less than 25 ns; and

b.

On/off ratio equal to or exceeding 65 dB;

2.

An output power exceeding 100 mW (20 dBm) anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;

3.

A "frequency switching time" as specified by any of the following:

a.

Not used;

b.

Less than 100 μs for any frequency change exceeding 2,2 GHz within the frequency range exceeding 4,8 GHz but not exceeding 31,8 GHz;

c.

Not used;

d.

Less than 500 μs for any frequency change exceeding 550 MHz within the frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz; or

e.

Less than 100 μs for any frequency change exceeding 2,2 GHz within the frequency range exceeding 37 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;

f.

Not used;

4.

Single sideband (SSB) phase noise, in dBc/Hz, specified as being any of the following:

a.

Less (better) than -(126 + 20log 10 F - 20log 10 f) anywhere within the range of 10 Hz ≤ F ≤ 10 kHz anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 3,2 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz; or

b.

Less (better) than -(206 - 20log 10 f) anywhere within the range of 10 kHz< F≤ 100 kHz anywhere within the frequency range exceeding 3,2 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;

Technical Note:

In 3A002.d.4., F is the offset from the operating frequency in Hz and f is the operating frequency in MHz;

5.

An 'RF modulation bandwidth’ of digital baseband signals as specified by any of the following:

a.

Exceeding 2,2 GHz within the frequency range exceeding 4,8 GHz but not exceeding 31,8 GHz;

b.

Exceeding 550 MHz within the frequency range exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37 GHz; or

c.

Exceeding 2,2 GHz within the frequency range exceeding 37 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz; or

Technical Note:

'RF modulation bandwidth' is the Radio Frequency (RF) bandwidth occupied by a digitally encoded baseband signal modulated onto an RF signal. It is also referred to as information bandwidth or vector modulation bandwidth. I/Q digital modulation is the technical method for producing a vector-modulated RF output signal, and that output signal is typically specified as having an 'RF modulation bandwidth'.

6.

A maximum frequency exceeding 90 GHz;

Note 1:

Note 2:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

e.

Network analysers having any of the following:

1.

An output power exceeding 31,62 mW (15 dBm) anywhere within the operating frequency range exceeding 43,5 GHz but not exceeding 90 GHz;

2.

An output power exceeding 1 mW (0 dBm) anywhere within the operating frequency range exceeding 90 GHz but not exceeding 110 GHz;

3.

'Nonlinear vector measurement functionality' at frequencies exceeding 50 GHz but not exceeding 110 GHz; or

Technical Note:

'Nonlinear vector measurement functionality' is an instrument’s ability to analyse the test results of devices driven into the large-signal domain or the non-linear distortion range.

4.

A maximum operating frequency exceeding 110 GHz;

f.

Microwave test receivers having all of the following:

1.

A maximum operating frequency exceeding 110 GHz; and

2.

Being capable of measuring amplitude and phase simultaneously;

g.

Atomic frequency standards being any of the following:

1.

"Space-qualified";

2.

Non-rubidium and having a long-term stability less (better) than 1 x 10 -11 /month; or

3.

Non-"space-qualified" and having all of the following:

a.

Being a rubidium standard;

b.

Long-term stability less (better) than 1 x 10 -11 /month; and

c.

Total power consumption of less than 1 W;

h.

"Electronic assemblies", modules, or equipment, specified to perform all of the following:

1.

Analogue-to-digital conversions meeting any of the following:

a.

A resolution of 8 bit or more, but less than 10 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,3 Giga Samples Per Second (GSPS);

b.

A resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,0 GSPS;

c.

A resolution of 12 bit or more, but less than 14 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 1,0 GSPS;

d.

A resolution of 14 bit or more but less than 16 bit, with a "sample rate" greater than 400 Mega Samples Per Second (MSPS); or

e.

A resolution of 16 bit or more with a "sample rate" greater than 180 MSPS; and

2.

Any of the following:

a.

Output of digitised data;

b.

Storage of digitised data; or

c.

Processing of digitised data;

N.B.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Note:

3A003

3A101

a.

Analogue-to-digital converters, usable in "missiles", designed to meet military specifications for ruggedized equipment;

b.

Accelerators capable of delivering electromagnetic radiation produced by bremsstrahlung from accelerated electrons of 2 MeV or greater, and systems containing those accelerators.

Note:

3A102

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3A201

a.

Capacitors having either of the following sets of characteristics:

1.

a.

Voltage rating greater than 1,4 kV;

b.

Energy storage greater than 10 J;

c.

Capacitance greater than 0,5 μF; and

d.

Series inductance less than 50 nH; or

2.

a.

Voltage rating greater than 750 V;

b.

Capacitance greater than 0,25 μF; and

c.

Series inductance less than 10 nH;

b.

Superconducting solenoidal electromagnets having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Capable of creating magnetic fields greater than 2 T;

2.

A ratio of length to inner diameter greater than 2;

3.

Inner diameter greater than 300 mm; and

4.

Magnetic field uniform to better than 1% over the central 50% of the inner volume;

Note:

c.

Flash X-ray generators or pulsed electron accelerators having either of the following sets of characteristics:

1.

a.

An accelerator peak electron energy of 500 keV or greater but less than 25 MeV; and

b.

With a 'figure of merit' (K) of 0,25 or greater; or

2.

a.

An accelerator peak electron energy of 25 MeV or greater; and

b.

A 'peak power' greater than 50 MW.

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

K = 1,7 x 10 3 V 2,65 Q

V is the peak electron energy in million electron volts.

If the accelerator beam pulse duration is less than or equal to 1 μs, then Q is the total accelerated charge in Coulombs. If the accelerator beam pulse duration is greater than 1 μs, then Q is the maximum accelerated charge in 1 μs.

Q equals the integral of i with respect to t, over the lesser of 1 μs or the time duration of the beam pulse (Q = ∫ idt), where i is beam current in amperes and t is time in seconds.

2.

3.

4.

3A225

N.B.1.

N.B.2.

a.

Multiphase output providing a power of 40 VA or greater;

b.

Operating at a frequency of 600 Hz or more; and

c.

Frequency control better (less) than 0,2%.

Note:

1.

They need to be returned to the original manufacturer to make the enhancements or release the constraints;

2.

They require "software" as specified in 3D225 to enhance or release the performance to meet the characteristics of 3A225; or

3.

They require "technology" in the form of keys or codes as specified in 3E225 to enhance or release the performance to meet the characteristics of 3A225.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3A226

a.

Capable of continuously producing, over a time period of 8 hours, 100 V or greater with current output of 500 A or greater; and

b.

Current or voltage stability better than 0,1% over a time period of 8 hours.

3A227

a.

Capable of continuously producing, over a time period of 8 hours, 20 kV or greater with current output of 1 A or greater; and

b.

Current or voltage stability better than 0,1% over a time period of 8 hours.

3A228

a.

Cold-cathode tubes, whether gas filled or not, operating similarly to a spark gap, having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Containing three or more electrodes;

2.

Anode peak voltage rating of 2,5 kV or more;

3.

Anode peak current rating of 100 A or more; and

4.

Anode delay time of 10 μs or less;

Note:

b.

Triggered spark-gaps having both of the following characteristics:

1.

An anode delay time of 15 μs or less; and

2.

Rated for a peak current of 500 A or more;

c.

Modules or assemblies with a fast switching function, other than those specified in 3A001.g. or 3A001.h., having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Anode peak voltage rating greater than 2 kV;

2.

Anode peak current rating of 500 A or more; and

3.

Turn-on time of 1 μs or less.

3A229

N.B.

a.

Detonator firing sets (initiator systems, firesets), including electronically-charged, explosively-driven and optically-driven firing sets, other than those specified in 1A007.a., designed to drive multiple controlled detonators specified in 1A007.b.;

b.

Modular electrical pulse generators (pulsers) having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Designed for portable, mobile, or ruggedized-use;

2.

Capable of delivering their energy in less than 15 μs into loads of less than 40 ohms;

3.

Having an output greater than 100 A;

4.

No dimension greater than 30 cm;

5.

Weight less than 30 kg; and

6.

Specified for use over an extended temperature range 223 K (-50 o C) to 373 K (100 o C) or specified as suitable for aerospace applications.

Note:

c.

Micro-firing units having all of the following characteristics:

1.

No dimension greater than 35 mm;

2.

Voltage rating of equal to or greater than 1 kV; and

3.

Capacitance of equal to or greater than 100 nF.

3A230

a.

Output voltage greater than 6 V into a resistive load of less than 55 ohms; and

b.

'Pulse transition time' less than 500 ps.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3A231

a.

Designed for operation without an external vacuum system; and

b.

Utilizing any of the following:

1.

Electrostatic acceleration to induce a tritium-deuterium nuclear reaction; or

2.

Electrostatic acceleration to induce a deuterium-deuterium nuclear reaction and capable of an output of 3 x 10 9 neutrons/s or greater.

3A232

N.B.

a.

Not used;

b.

Arrangements using single or multiple detonators designed to nearly simultaneously initiate an explosive surface over an area greater than 5 000 mm 2 from a single firing signal with an initiation timing spread over the surface of less than 2,5 μs.

Note:

3A233

a.

Inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometers (ICP/MS);

b.

Glow discharge mass spectrometers (GDMS);

c.

Thermal ionisation mass spectrometers (TIMS);

d.

Electron bombardment mass spectrometers having both of the following features:

1.

A molecular beam inlet system that injects a collimated beam of analyte molecules into a region of the ion source where the molecules are ionised by an electron beam; and

2.

One or more 'cold traps' that can be cooled to a temperature of 193 K (-80°C);

e.

Not used;

f.

Mass spectrometers equipped with a microfluorination ion source designed for actinides or actinide fluorides.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3A234

a.

Voltage rating greater than 2 kV; and

b

Inductance of less than 20 nH.

3B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

3B001

N.B.

a.

Equipment designed for epitaxial growth as follows:

1.

Equipment designed or modified to produce a layer of any material other than silicon with a thickness uniform to less than ± 2,5% across a distance of 75 mm or more;

Note:

2.

Metal Organic Chemical Vapour Deposition (MOCVD) reactors designed for compound semiconductor epitaxial growth of material having two or more of the following elements: aluminium, gallium, indium, arsenic, phosphorus, antimony, or nitrogen;

3.

Molecular beam epitaxial growth equipment using gas or solid sources;

b.

Equipment designed for ion implantation and having any of the following:

1.

Not used;

2.

Being designed and optimised to operate at a beam energy of 20 keV or more and a beam current of 10 mA or more for hydrogen, deuterium or helium implant;

3.

Direct write capability;

4.

A beam energy of 65 keV or more and a beam current of 45 mA or more for high energy oxygen implant into a heated semiconductor material "substrate"; or

5.

Being designed and optimised to operate at a beam energy of 20 keV or more and a beam current of 10 mA or more for silicon implant into a semiconductor material "substrate" heated to 600°C or greater;

c.

Not used;

d.

Not used;

e.

Automatic loading multi-chamber central wafer handling systems having all of the following:

1.

Interfaces for wafer input and output, to which more than two functionally different 'semiconductor process tools' specified in 3B001.a.1., 3B001.a.2., 3B001.a.3. or 3B001.b. are designed to be connected; and

2.

Designed to form an integrated system in a vacuum environment for 'sequential multiple wafer processing';

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

f.

Lithography equipment as follows:

1.

Align and expose step and repeat (direct step on wafer) or step and scan (scanner) equipment for wafer processing using photo-optical or X-ray methods and having any of the following:

a.

A light source wavelength shorter than 193 nm; or

b.

Capable of producing a pattern with a 'Minimum Resolvable Feature size' (MRF) of 45 nm or less;

Technical Note:

The 'Minimum Resolvable Feature size' (MRF) is calculated by the following formula:

where the K factor = 0,35

2.

Imprint lithography equipment capable of producing features of 45 nm or less;

Note:

Micro contact printing tools

Hot embossing tools

Nano-imprint lithography tools

Step and flash imprint lithography (S-FIL) tools

3.

Equipment specially designed for mask making having all of the following:

a.

A deflected focussed electron beam, ion beam or "laser" beam; and

b.

Having any of the following:

1.

A full-width half-maximum (FWHM) spot size smaller than 65 nm and an image placement less than 17 nm (mean + 3 sigma); or

2.

Not used;

3.

A second-layer overlay error of less than 23 nm (mean + 3 sigma) on the mask;

4.

Equipment designed for device processing using direct writing methods, having all of the following:

a.

A deflected focused electron beam; and

b.

Having any of the following:

1.

A minimum beam size equal to or smaller than 15 nm; or

2.

An overlay error less than 27 nm (mean + 3 sigma);

g.

Masks and reticles, designed for integrated circuits specified in 3A001;

h.

Multi-layer masks with a phase shift layer not specified in 3B001.g. and designed to be used by lithography equipment having a light source wavelength less than 245 nm;

Note:

N.B.

i.

Imprint lithography templates designed for integrated circuits specified in 3A001.

j.

Mask "substrate blanks" with multilayer reflector structure consisting of molybdenum and silicon, and having all of the following:

1.

Specially designed for 'Extreme Ultraviolet' ('EUV') lithography; and

2.

Compliant with SEMI Standard P37.

Technical Note:

'Extreme Ultraviolet' ('EUV') refers to electromagnetic spectrum wavelengths greater than 5 nm and less than 124 nm.

3B002

a.

For testing S-parameters of items specified in 3A001.b.3.;

b.

Not used;

c.

For testing items specified in 3A001.b.2.

3C Materials

3C001

a.

Silicon (Si);

b.

Germanium (Ge);

c.

Silicon carbide (SiC); or

d.

"III/V compounds" of gallium or indium.

Note:

3C002

a.

Resists designed for semiconductor lithography as follows:

1.

Positive resists adjusted (optimised) for use at wavelengths less than 193 nm but equal to or greater than 15 nm;

2.

Resists adjusted (optimised) for use at wavelengths less than 15 nm but greater than 1 nm;

b.

All resists designed for use with electron beams or ion beams, with a sensitivity of 0,01 μcoulomb/mm 2 or better;

c.

Not used;

d.

All resists optimised for surface imaging technologies;

e.

All resists designed or optimised for use with imprint lithography equipment specified in 3B001.f.2. that use either a thermal or photo-curable process.

3C003

a.

Organo-metallic compounds of aluminium, gallium or indium, having a purity (metal basis) better than 99,999%;

b.

Organo-arsenic, organo-antimony and organo-phosphorus compounds, having a purity (inorganic element basis) better than 99,999%.

Note:

3C004

Note:

3C005

a.

Silicon carbide (SiC), gallium nitride (GaN), aluminium nitride (AlN) or aluminium gallium nitride (AlGaN) semiconductor "substrates", or ingots, boules, or other preforms of those materials, having resistivities greater than 10 000 ohm-cm at 20°C;

b.

Polycrystalline "substrates" or polycrystalline ceramic "substrates", having resistivities greater than 10 000 ohm-cm at 20°C and having at least one non-epitaxial single-crystal layer of silicon (Si), silicon carbide (SiC), gallium nitride (GaN), aluminium nitride (AlN), or aluminium gallium nitride (AlGaN) on the surface of the "substrate".

3C006

3D Software

3D001

3D002

3D003

Technical Note:

'Computational lithography' is the use of computer modelling to predict, correct, optimise and verify imaging performance of the lithography process over a range of patterns, processes, and system conditions.

3D004

3D005

3D101

3D225

3E Technology

3E001

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

b.

Note 3:

Technical Note:

A 'Process Design Kit' ('PDK') is a software tool provided by a semiconductor manufacturer to ensure that the required design practices and rules are taken into account in order to successfully produce a specific integrated circuit design in a specific semiconductor process, in accordance with technological and manufacturing constraints (each semiconductor manufacturing process has its particular 'PDK').

3E002

a.

A 'vector processor unit' designed to perform more than two calculations on 'floating-point' vectors (one-dimensional arrays of 32-bit or larger numbers) simultaneously;

Technical Note:

A 'vector processor unit' is a processor element with built-in instructions that perform multiple calculations on 'floating-point' vectors (one-dimensional arrays of 32-bit or larger numbers) simultaneously, having at least one vector arithmetic logic unit and vector registers of at least 32 elements each.

b.

Designed to perform more than four 64-bit or larger 'floating-point' operation results per cycle; or

c.

Designed to perform more than eight 16-bit 'fixed-point' multiply-accumulate results per cycle (e.g., digital manipulation of analogue information that has been previously converted into digital form, also known as digital "signal processing").

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

Using "technology" at or above 0,130 μm; and

b.

Incorporating multi-layer structures with five or fewer metal layers.

Note 3:

3E003

a.

Vacuum microelectronic devices;

b.

Hetero-structure semiconductor electronic devices such as high electron mobility transistors (HEMT), hetero-bipolar transistors (HBT), quantum well and super lattice devices;

Note:

c.

"Superconductive" electronic devices;

d.

Substrates of films of diamond for electronic components.

e.

Substrates of silicon-on-insulator (SOI) for integrated circuits in which the insulator is silicon dioxide;

f.

Substrates of silicon carbide for electronic components;

g.

"Vacuum electronic devices" operating at frequencies of 31,8 GHz or higher.

3E004

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 3E004 'SFQR' is the range of maximum deviation and minimum deviation from front reference plane, calculated by least square method with all front surface data including site boundary within a site.

3E101

3E102

3E201

3E225

PART VI – Category 4

CATEGORY 4 - COMPUTERS

Note 1:

Note 2:

N.B.

Technical Note:

'Main storage' is the primary storage for data or instructions for rapid access by a central processing unit. It consists of the internal storage of a "digital computer" and any hierarchical extension thereto, such as cache storage or non-sequentially accessed extended storage.

4A Systems, Equipment and Components

4A001

N.B.

a.

Specially designed to have any of the following:

1.

Rated for operation at an ambient temperature below 228 K (-45°C) or above 358 K (85°C); or

Note:

2.

Radiation hardened to exceed any of the following specifications:

a.

Total Dose 5 x 10 3 Gy (silicon);

b.

Dose Rate Upset 5 x 10 6 Gy (silicon)/s; or

c.

Single Event Upset 1 x 10 -8 Error/bit/day;

Note:

b.

Not used.

4A003

Note 1:

—

'Vector processors';

—

Array processors;

—

Digital signal processors;

—

Logic processors;

—

Equipment designed for "image enhancement".

Note 2:

a.

The "digital computers" or related equipment are essential for the operation of the other equipment or systems;

b.

The "digital computers" or related equipment are not a "principal element" of the other equipment or systems; and

N.B.1.

N.B.2.

c.

The "technology" for the "digital computers" and related equipment is determined by 4E.

a.

Not used;

b.

"Digital computers" having an "Adjusted Peak Performance" ("APP") exceeding 29 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT);

c.

"Electronic assemblies" specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the "APP" of the aggregation exceeds the limit specified in 4A003.b.;

Note 1:

Note 2:

d.

Not used;

e.

Not used;

f.

Not used;

g.

Equipment specially designed for aggregating the performance of "digital computers" by providing external interconnections which allows communications at unidirectional data rates exceeding 2,0 Gbyte/s per link.

Note:

4A004

a.

'Systolic array computers';

b.

'Neural computers';

c.

'Optical computers'.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4A005

4A101

4A102

Note:

4B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

None.

4C Materials

None.

4D Software

Note:

4D001

a.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development" or "production" of equipment or "software" specified in 4A001 to 4A004, or 4D.

b.

"Software", other than that specified in 4D001.a., specially designed or modified for the "development" or "production" of equipment as follows:

1.

"Digital computers" having an "Adjusted Peak Performance" ("APP") exceeding 15 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT);

2.

"Electronic assemblies" specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the "APP" of the aggregation exceeds the limit in 4D001.b.1.

4D002

4D003

4D004

Note:

a.

The update or upgrade operates only with the authorisation of the owner or administrator of the system receiving it; and

b.

After the update or upgrade, the "software" updated or upgraded is not any of the following:

1.

"Software" specified in 4D004; or

2.

"Intrusion software".

4E Technology

4E001

a.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note, for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment or "software" specified in 4A or 4D.

b.

"Technology", according to the General Technology Note, other than that specified in 4E001.a., for the "development" or "production" of equipment as follows:

1.

"Digital computers" having an "Adjusted Peak Performance" ("APP") exceeding 15 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT);

2.

"Electronic assemblies" specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the "APP" of the aggregation exceeds the limit in 4E001.b.1.

c.

"Technology" for the "development" of "intrusion software".

Note 1:

Note 2:

TECHNICAL NOTE ON "ADJUSTED PEAK PERFORMANCE" ("APP")

"APP" is an adjusted peak rate at which "digital computers" perform 64-bit or larger floating point additions and multiplications.

"APP" is expressed in Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT), in units of 10 12 adjusted floating point operations per second.

Abbreviations used in this Technical Note

n

number of processors in the "digital computer"

i

processor number (i,...n)

t i

processor cycle time (t i = 1/F i )

F i

processor frequency

R i

peak floating point calculating rate

W i

architecture adjustment factor

Outline of "APP" calculation method

1.

Note:

2.

3.

4.

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

Note 4:

Note 5:

Note 6:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

Note 7:

PART VII – Category 5

CATEGORY 5 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND "INFORMATION SECURITY"

Part 1 - TELECOMMUNICATIONS

Note 1:

N.B.

Note 2:

5A1 Systems, Equipment and Components

5A001

a.

Any type of telecommunications equipment having any of the following characteristics, functions or features:

1.

Specially designed to withstand transitory electronic effects or electromagnetic pulse effects, both arising from a nuclear explosion;

2.

Specially hardened to withstand gamma, neutron or ion radiation;

3.

Specially designed to operate below 218 K (-55°C); or

4.

Specially designed to operate above 397 K (124°C);

Note 1:

Note 2:

b.

Telecommunication systems and equipment, and specially designed components and accessories therefor, having any of the following characteristics, functions or features:

1.

Being underwater untethered communications systems having any of the following:

a.

An acoustic carrier frequency outside the range from 20 kHz to 60 kHz;

b.

Using an electromagnetic carrier frequency below 30 kHz;

c.

Using electronic beam steering techniques; or

d.

Using "lasers" or light-emitting diodes (LEDs) with an output wavelength greater than 400 nm and less than 700 nm, in a "local area network";

2.

Being radio equipment operating in the 1,5 MHz to 87,5 MHz band and having all of the following:

a.

Automatically predicting and selecting frequencies and "total digital transfer rates" per channel to optimise the transmission; and

b.

Incorporating a linear power amplifier configuration having a capability to support multiple signals simultaneously at an output power of 1 kW or more in the frequency range of 1,5 MHz or more but less than 30 MHz, or 250 W or more in the frequency range of 30 MHz or more but not exceeding 87,5 MHz, over an "instantaneous bandwidth" of one octave or more and with an output harmonic and distortion content of better than -80 dB;

3.

Being radio equipment employing "spread spectrum" techniques, including "frequency hopping" techniques, other than those specified in 5A001.b.4. and having any of the following:

a.

User programmable spreading codes; or

b.

A total transmitted bandwidth which is 100 or more times the bandwidth of any one information channel and in excess of 50 kHz;

Note:

a.

Civil cellular radio-communications systems; or

b.

Fixed or mobile satellite earth stations for commercial civil telecommunications.

Note:

4.

Being radio equipment employing ultra-wideband modulation techniques, having user programmable channelising codes, scrambling codes or network identification codes and having any of the following:

a.

A bandwidth exceeding 500 MHz; or

b.

A "fractional bandwidth" of 20% or more;

5.

Being digitally controlled radio receivers having all of the following:

a.

More than 1 000 channels;

b.

A 'channel switching time' of less than 1 ms;

c.

Automatic searching or scanning of a part of the electromagnetic spectrum; and

d.

Identification of the received signals or the type of transmitter; or

Note:

Technical Note:

'Channel switching time' means the time (i.e., delay) to change from one receiving frequency to another, to arrive at or within ±0,05% of the final specified receiving frequency. Items having a specified frequency range of less than ±0,05% around their centre frequency are defined to be incapable of channel frequency switching.

6.

Employing functions of digital "signal processing" to provide 'voice coding' output at rates of less than 700 bit/s.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

c.

Optical fibres of more than 500 m in length and specified by the manufacturer as being capable of withstanding a 'proof test' tensile stress of 2 x 10 9 N/m 2 or more;

N.B. For underwater umbilical cables, see 8A002.a.3.

Technical Note:

'Proof Test': on-line or off-line production screen testing that dynamically applies a prescribed tensile stress over a 0,5 to 3 m length of fibre at a running rate of 2 to 5 m/s while passing between capstans approximately 150 mm in diameter. The ambient temperature is a nominal 293 K (20 o C) and relative humidity 40%. Equivalent national standards may be used for executing the proof test.

d.

'Electronically steerable phased array antennae' as follows:

1.

Rated for operation above 31,8 GHz, but not exceeding 57 GHz, and having an Effective Radiated Power (ERP) equal to or greater than +20 dBm (22,15 dBm Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP));

2.

Rated for operation above 57 GHz, but not exceeding 66 GHz, and having an ERP equal to or greater than +24 dBm (26,15 dBm EIRP);

3.

Rated for operation above 66 GHz, but not exceeding 90 GHz, and having an ERP equal to or greater than +20 dBm (22,15 dBm EIRP);

4.

Rated for operation above 90 GHz;

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

Civil cellular or WLAN radio-communications systems;

b.

IEEE 802.15 or wireless HDMI; or

c.

Fixed or mobile satellite earth stations for commercial civil telecommunications.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 5A001.d. 'electronically steerable phased array antenna' is an antenna which forms a beam by means of phase coupling, (i.e., the beam direction is controlled by the complex excitation coefficients of the radiating elements) and the direction of that beam can be varied (both in transmission and reception) in azimuth or in elevation, or both, by application of an electrical signal.

e.

Radio direction finding equipment operating at frequencies above 30 MHz and having all of the following, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

"Instantaneous bandwidth" of 10 MHz or more; and

2.

Capable of finding a Line Of Bearing (LOB) to non-cooperating radio transmitters with a signal duration of less than 1 ms;

f

Mobile telecommunications interception or jamming equipment, and monitoring equipment therefor, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

Interception equipment designed for the extraction of voice or data, transmitted over the air interface;

2.

Interception equipment not specified in 5A001.f.1., designed for the extraction of client device or subscriber identifiers (e.g., IMSI, TIMSI or IMEI), signalling, or other metadata transmitted over the air interface;

3.

Jamming equipment specially designed or modified to intentionally and selectively interfere with, deny, inhibit, degrade or seduce mobile telecommunication services and performing any of the following:

a.

Simulate the functions of Radio Access Network (RAN) equipment;

b.

Detect and exploit specific characteristics of the mobile telecommunications protocol employed (e.g., GSM); or

c.

Exploit specific characteristics of the mobile telecommunications protocol employed (e.g. GSM);

4.

RF monitoring equipment designed or modified to identify the operation of items specified in 5A001.f.1., 5A001.f.2. or 5A001.f.3.;

Note:

a.

Equipment specially designed for the interception of analogue Private Mobile Radio (PMR), IEEE 802.11 WLAN;

b.

Equipment designed for mobile telecommunications network operators; or

c.

Equipment designed for the "development" or "production" of mobile telecommunications equipment or systems.

N.B.1.

N.B.2.

g.

Passive Coherent Location (PCL) systems or equipment, specially designed for detecting and tracking moving objects by measuring reflections of ambient radio frequency emissions, supplied by non-radar transmitters;

Technical Note:

Non-radar transmitters may include commercial radio, television or cellular telecommunications base stations.

Note:

a.

Radio-astronomical equipment; or

b.

Systems or equipment, that require any radio transmission from the target.

h.

Counter Improvised Explosive Device (IED) equipment and related equipment, as follows:

1.

Radio Frequency (RF) transmitting equipment, not specified in 5A001.f., designed or modified for prematurely activating or preventing the initiation of Improvised Explosive Devices (IEDs);

2.

Equipment using techniques designed to enable radio communications in the same frequency channels on which co-located equipment specified in 5A001.h.1. is transmitting;

N.B.

i.

Not used;

j.

Internet Protocol (IP) network communications surveillance systems or equipment, and specially designed components therefor, having all of the following:

1.

Performing all of the following on a carrier class Internet Protocol (IP) network (e.g., national grade IP backbone):

a.

Analysis at the application layer (e.g., Layer 7 of Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) model (ISO/IEC 7498-1));

b.

Extraction of selected metadata and application content (e.g., voice, video, messages, attachments); and

c.

Indexing of extracted data; and

2.

Being specially designed to carry out all of the following:

a.

Execution of searches on the basis of "hard selectors"; and

b.

Mapping of the relational network of an individual or of a group of people.

Note:

a.

Marketing purpose;

b.

Network Quality of Service (QoS); or

c.

Quality of Experience (QoE).

5A101

Technical Note:

In 5A101 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

Note:

a.

Equipment designed or modified for manned aircraft or satellites;

b.

Ground based equipment designed or modified for terrestrial or marine applications;

c.

Equipment designed for commercial, civil or ‘Safety of Life’ (e.g., data integrity, flight safety) GNSS services;

5B1 Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

5B001

a.

Equipment and specially designed components or accessories therefor, specially designed for the "development" or "production" of equipment, functions or features, specified in 5A001;

Note:

b.

Equipment and specially designed components or accessories therefor, specially designed for the "development" of any of the following telecommunication transmission or switching equipment:

1.

Not used;

2.

Equipment employing a "laser" and having any of the following:

a.

A transmission wavelength exceeding 1 750 nm; or

b.

Not used;

c.

Not used;

d.

Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz; or

Note:

3.

Not used;

4.

Radio equipment employing Quadrature-Amplitude-Modulation (QAM) techniques above level 1 024;

5.

Not used.

5C1 Materials

None5D1 Software

5D001

a.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment, functions or features, specified in 5A001;

b.

Not used;

c.

Specific "software" specially designed or modified to provide characteristics, functions or features of equipment, specified in 5A001 or 5B001;

d.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development" of any of the following telecommunication transmission or switching equipment:

1.

Not used;

2.

Equipment employing a "laser" and having any of the following:

a.

A transmission wavelength exceeding 1 750 nm; or

b.

Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz; or

Note:

3.

Not used;

4.

Radio equipment employing Quadrature-Amplitude-Modulation (QAM) techniques above level 1 024.

e.

"Software", other than that specified in 5D001.a. or 5D001.c., specially designed or modified for monitoring or analysis by law enforcement, providing all of the following:

1.

Execution of searches on the basis of "hard selectors" of either the content of communication or metadata acquired from a communications service provider using a 'handover interface'; and

2.

Mapping of the relational network or tracking the movement of targeted individuals based on the results of searches on content of communication or metadata or searches as described in 5D001.e.1.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

Note:

a.

Billing purposes;

b.

Network Quality of Service (QoS);

c.

Quality of Experience (QoE);

d.

Mediation devices; or

e.

Mobile payment or banking use.

5D101

5E1 Technology

5E001

a.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development", "production" or "use" (excluding operation) of equipment, functions or features specified in 5A001 or "software" specified in 5D001.a. or 5D001.e.;

b.

Specific "technology" as follows:

1.

"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of telecommunications equipment specially designed to be used on board satellites;

2.

"Technology" for the "development" or "use" of "laser" communication techniques with the capability of automatically acquiring and tracking signals and maintaining communications through exoatmosphere or sub-surface (water) media;

3.

"Technology" for the "development" of digital cellular radio base station receiving equipment whose reception capabilities that allow multi-band, multi-channel, multi-mode, multi-coding algorithm or multi-protocol operation can be modified by changes in "software";

4.

"Technology" for the "development" of "spread spectrum" techniques, including "frequency hopping" techniques;

Note:

a.

Civil cellular radio-communications systems; or

b.

Fixed or mobile satellite earth stations for commercial civil telecommunications.

c.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of any of the following:

1.

Not used;

2.

Equipment employing a "laser" and having any of the following:

a.

A transmission wavelength exceeding 1 750 nm; or

b.

Not used;

c.

Not used;

d.

Employing wavelength division multiplexing techniques of optical carriers at less than 100 GHz spacing; or

e.

Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz;

Note:

N.B.

3.

Equipment employing "optical switching" and having a switching time less than 1 ms;

4.

Radio equipment having any of the following:

a.

Quadrature-Amplitude-Modulation (QAM) techniques above level 1 024;

b.

Operating at input or output frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz; or

Note:

c.

Operating in the 1,5 MHz to 87,5 MHz band and incorporating adaptive techniques providing more than 15 dB suppression of an interfering signal; or

5.

Not used;

6.

Mobile equipment having all of the following:

a.

Operating at an optical wavelength greater than or equal to 200 nm and less than or equal to 400 nm; and

b.

Operating as a "local area network";

d.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of "Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit" ("MMIC") amplifiers specially designed for telecommunications and that are any of the following:

Technical Note:

For purposes of 5E001.d., the parameter peak saturated power output may also be referred to on product data sheets as output power, saturated power output, maximum power output, peak power output, or peak envelope power output.

1.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 15%, and having any of the following:

a.

A peak saturated power output greater than 75 W (48,75 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,7 GHz up to and including 2,9 GHz;

b.

A peak saturated power output greater than 55 W (47,4 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 2,9 GHz up to and including 3,2 GHz;

c.

A peak saturated power output greater than 40 W (46 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 3,7 GHz; or

d.

A peak saturated power output greater than 20 W (43 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 3,7 GHz up to and including 6,8 GHz;

2.

Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 16 GHz with a "fractional bandwidth" greater than 10%, and having any of the following:

a.

A peak saturated power output greater than 10W (40 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 6,8 GHz up to and including 8,5 GHz; or

b.

A peak saturated power output greater than 5W (37 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 8,5 GHz up to and including 16 GHz;

3.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 3 W (34,77 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;

4.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37 GHz;

5.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 1 W (30 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 37 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;

6.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 31,62 mW (15 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz up to and including 75 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 10%;

7.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 10 mW (10 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 75 GHz up to and including 90 GHz, and with a "fractional bandwidth" of greater than 5%; or

8.

Rated for operation with a peak saturated power output greater than 0,1 nW (-70 dBm) at any frequency exceeding 90 GHz;

e.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of electronic devices and circuits, specially designed for telecommunications and containing components manufactured from "superconductive" materials, specially designed for operation at temperatures below the "critical temperature" of at least one of the "superconductive" constituents and having any of the following:

1.

Current switching for digital circuits using "superconductive" gates with a product of delay time per gate (in seconds) and power dissipation per gate (in watts) of less than 10 -14 J; or

2.

Frequency selection at all frequencies using resonant circuits with Q-values exceeding 10 000.

5E101

Part 2 - "INFORMATION SECURITY"

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

5A002, 5D002.a.1., 5D002.b. and 5D002.c.1. do not control items as follows:

a.

Items that meet all of the following:

1.

Generally available to the public by being sold, without restriction, from stock at retail selling points by means of any of the following:

a.

Over-the-counter transactions;

b.

Mail order transactions;

c.

Electronic transactions; or

d.

Telephone call transactions;

2.

The cryptographic functionality cannot easily be changed by the user;

3.

Designed for installation by the user without further substantial support by the supplier; and

4.

When necessary, details of the goods are accessible and will be provided, upon request, to the competent authorities of the EU Member State in which the exporter is established in order to ascertain compliance with conditions described in paragraphs 1. to 3. above;

b.

Hardware components or 'executable software', of existing items described in paragraph a. of this Note, that have been designed for these existing items, meeting all of the following:

1.

"Information security" is not the primary function or set of functions of the component or 'executable software';

2.

The component or 'executable software' does not change any cryptographic functionality of the existing items, or add new cryptographic functionality to the existing items;

3.

The feature set of the component or 'executable software' is fixed and is not designed or modified to customer specification; and

4.

When necessary as determined by the competent authorities of the EU Member State in which the exporter is established, details of the component or 'executable software' and details of relevant end-items are accessible and will be provided to the competent authority upon request, in order to ascertain compliance with conditions described above.

Technical Note:

For the purpose of the Cryptography Note, 'executable software' means "software" in executable form, from an existing hardware component excluded from 5A002 by the Cryptography Note.

Note:

Note to the Cryptography Note:

1.

a.

The item is of potential interest to a wide range of individuals and businesses; and

b.

The price and information about the main functionality of the item are available before purchase without the need to consult the vendor or supplier. A simple price enquiry is not considered to be a consultation.

2.

5A2 Systems, Equipment and Components

5A002

N.B.

a.

Designed or modified to use 'cryptography for data confidentiality' having a 'described security algorithm', where that cryptographic capability is usable, has been activated, or can be activated by any means other than secure "cryptographic activation", as follows:

1.

Items having "information security" as a primary function;

2.

Digital communication or networking systems, equipment or components, not specified in 5A002.a.1.;

3.

Computers, other items having information storage or processing as a primary function, and components therefor, not specified in 5A002.a.1. or 5A002.a.2.;

N.B.

4.

Items, not specified in 5A002.a.1. to 5A002.a.3., where the 'cryptography for data confidentiality' having a 'described security algorithm' meets all of the following:

a.

It supports a non-primary function of the item; and

b.

It is performed by incorporated equipment or "software" that would, as a standalone item, be specified in Category 5, Part 2.

Technical Notes:

1.

a.

"Authentication";

b.

Digital signature;

c.

Data integrity;

d.

Non-repudiation;

e.

Digital rights management, including the execution of copy-protected "software";

f.

Encryption or decryption in support of entertainment, mass commercial broadcasts or medical records management; or

g.

Key management in support of any function described in paragraph a. to f. above.

2.

a.

A "symmetric algorithm" employing a key length in excess of 56 bits, not including parity bits;

b.

An "asymmetric algorithm" where the security of the algorithm is based on any of the following:

1.

Factorisation of integers in excess of 512 bits (e.g., RSA);

2.

Computation of discrete logarithms in a multiplicative group of a finite field of size greater than 512 bits (e.g., Diffie-Hellman over Z/pZ); or

3.

Discrete logarithms in a group other than mentioned in paragraph b.2. in excess of 112 bits (e.g., Diffie-Hellman over an elliptic curve); or

c.

An "asymmetric algorithm" where the security of the algorithm is based on any of the following:

1.

Shortest vector or closest vector problems associated with lattices (e.g., NewHope, Frodo, NTRUEncrypt, Kyber, Titanium);

2.

Finding isogenies between Supersingular elliptic curves (e.g., Supersingular Isogeny Key Encapsulation); or

3.

Decoding random codes (e.g., McEliece, Niederreiter).

Technical Note:

An algorithm described by Technical Note 2.c. may be referred to as being post-quantum, quantum-safe or quantum-resistant.

Note 1:

a.

Whether the item meets the criteria of 5A002.a.1. to 5A002.a.4.; or

b.

Whether the cryptographic capability for data confidentiality specified in 5A002.a. is usable without "cryptographic activation".

Note 2:

a.

Smart cards and smart card 'readers/writers' as follows:

1.

A smart card or an electronically readable personal document (e.g., token coin, e-passport) that meets any of the following:

a.

The cryptographic capability meets all of the following:

1.

It is restricted for use in any of the following:

a.

Equipment or systems not described by 5A002.a.1. to 5A002.a.4.;

b.

Equipment or systems not using 'cryptography for data confidentiality' having a 'described security algorithm'; or

c.

Equipment or systems, excluded from 5A002.a., by paragraphs b. to f. of this Note; and

2.

It cannot be reprogrammed for any other use; or:

b.

Having all of the following:

1.

It is specially designed and limited to allow protection of 'personal data' stored within;

2.

Has been, or can only be, personalised for public or commercial transactions or individual identification; and

3.

Where the cryptographic capability is not user-accessible;

Technical Note:

'Personal data' includes any data specific to a particular person or entity, such as the amount of money stored and data necessary for "authentication".

2.

'Readers/writers' specially designed or modified, and limited, for items specified in paragraph a.1. of this Note.

Technical Note:

'Readers/writers' include equipment that communicates with smart cards or electronically readable documents through a network.

b.

Cryptographic equipment specially designed and limited for banking use or 'money transactions';

Technical Note:

'Money transactions' in 5A002.a. Note 2.b. includes the collection and settlement of fares or credit functions.

c.

Portable or mobile radiotelephones for civil use (e.g., for use with commercial civil cellular radio communication systems) that are not capable of transmitting encrypted data directly to another radiotelephone or equipment (other than Radio Access Network (RAN) equipment), nor of passing encrypted data through RAN equipment (e.g., Radio Network Controller (RNC) or Base Station Controller (BSC));

d.

Cordless telephone equipment not capable of end-to-end encryption where the maximum effective range of unboosted cordless operation (i.e. a single, unrelayed hop between terminal and home base station) is less than 400 metres according to the manufacturer's specifications;

e.

Portable or mobile radiotelephones and similar client wireless devices for civil use, that implement only published or commercial cryptographic standards (except for anti-piracy functions, which may be non-published) and also meet the provisions of paragraphs a.2. to a.4. of the Cryptography Note (Note 3 in Category 5, Part 2), that have been customised for a specific civil industry application with features that do not affect the cryptographic functionality of these original non-customised devices;

f.

Items, where the "information security" functionality is limited to wireless "personal area network" functionality, implementing only published or commercial cryptographic standards;

g.

Mobile telecommunications Radio Access Network (RAN) equipment designed for civil use, which also meet the provisions of paragraphs a.2. to a.4. of the Cryptography Note (Note 3 in Category 5, Part 2), having an RF output power limited to 0,1W (20 dBm) or less, and supporting 16 or fewer concurrent users;

h.

Routers, switches, gateways or relays, where the "information security" functionality is limited to the tasks of "Operations, Administration or Maintenance" ("OAM") implementing only published or commercial cryptographic standards; or

i.

General purpose computing equipment or servers, where the "information security" functionality meets all of the following:

1.

Uses only published or commercial cryptographic standards; and

2.

Is any of the following:

a.

Integral to a CPU that meets the provisions of Note 3 to Category 5, Part 2;

b.

Integral to an operating system that is not specified in 5D002; or

c.

Limited to "OAM" of the equipment.

j.

Items specially designed for a 'connected civil industry application', meeting all of the following:

1.

Being any of the following:

a.

A network-capable endpoint device meeting any of the following:

1.

The "information security" functionality is limited to securing 'non-arbitrary data' or the tasks of "Operations, Administration or Maintenance" ("OAM"); or

2.

The device is limited to a specific 'connected civil industry application'; or

b.

Networking equipment meeting all of the following:

1.

Being specially designed to communicate with the devices specified in paragraph j.1.a. above; and

2.

The "information security" functionality is limited to supporting the 'connected civil industry application' of devices specified in paragraph j.1.a. above, or the tasks of "OAM" of this networking equipment or of other items specified in paragraph j. of this Note; and

2.

Where the "information security" functionality implements only published or commercial cryptographic standards, and the cryptographic functionality cannot easily be changed by the user.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

b.

Being a 'cryptographic activation token';

Technical Note:

A 'cryptographic activation token' is an item designed or modified for any of the following:

1.

Converting, by means of "cryptographic activation", an item not specified in Category 5, Part 2 into an item specified in 5A002.a. or 5D002.c.1., and not released by the Cryptography Note (Note 3 in Category 5, Part 2); or

2.

Enabling, by means of "cryptographic activation", additional functionality specified in 5A002.a. of an item already specified in Category 5, Part 2.

c.

Designed or modified to use or perform "quantum cryptography";

Technical Note:

"Quantum cryptography" is also known as Quantum Key Distribution (QKD).

d.

Designed or modified to use cryptographic techniques to generate channelising codes, scrambling codes or network identification codes, for systems using ultra-wideband modulation techniques and having any of the following:

1.

A bandwidth exceeding 500 MHz; or

2.

A "fractional bandwidth" of 20% or more;

e.

Designed or modified to use cryptographic techniques to generate the spreading code for "spread spectrum" systems, other than those specified in 5A002.d., including the hopping code for "frequency hopping" systems.

5A003

a.

Communications cable systems designed or modified using mechanical, electrical or electronic means to detect surreptitious intrusion;

Note:

b.

Specially designed or modified to reduce the compromising emanations of information-bearing signals beyond what is necessary for health, safety or electromagnetic interference standards.

5A004

a.

Designed or modified to perform 'cryptanalytic functions'.

Note:

Technical Note:

'Cryptanalytic functions' are functions designed to defeat cryptographic mechanisms in order to derive confidential variables or sensitive data, including clear text, passwords or cryptographic keys.

b.

Items, not specified in 4A005 or 5A004.a., designed to perform all of the following:

1.

'Extract raw data' from a computing or communications device; and

2.

Circumvent "authentication" or authorisation controls of the device, in order to perform the function described in 5A004.b.1.

Technical Note:

'Extract raw data' from a computing or communications device means to retrieve binary data from a storage medium (e.g., RAM, flash or hard disk) of the device without interpretation by the device’s operating system or filesystem.

Note1:

Note 2:

a.

Debuggers, hypervisors;

b.

Items limited to logical data extraction;

c.

Data extraction items using chip-off or JTAG; or

d.

Items specially designed and limited to jail-breaking or rooting.

5B2 Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

5B002

a.

Equipment specially designed for the "development" or "production" of equipment specified in 5A002, 5A003, 5A004 or 5B002.b.;

b.

Measuring equipment specially designed to evaluate and validate the "information security" functions of the equipment specified in 5A002, 5A003 or 5A004, or of "software" specified in 5D002.a. or 5D002.c.

5C2 Materials

None.

5D2 Software

5D002

a.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of any of the following:

1.

Equipment specified in 5A002 or "software" specified in 5D002.c.1.;

2.

Equipment specified in 5A003 or "software" specified in 5D002.c.2.; or

3.

Equipment or "software", as follows:

a.

Equipment specified in 5A004.a. or "software" specified in 5D002.c.3.a.;

b.

Equipment specified in 5A004.b. or "software" specified in 5D002.c.3.b.

b.

"Software" having the characteristics of a 'cryptographic activation token' specified in 5A002.b.;

c.

"Software" having the characteristics of, or performing or simulating the functions of, any of the following:

1.

Equipment specified in 5A002.a., 5A002.c., 5A002.d. or 5A002.e.;

Note:

2.

Equipment specified in 5A003; or

3.

Equipment, as follows:

a.

Equipment specified in 5A004.a.;

b.

Equipment specified in 5A004.b.

Note:

d.

Not used.

5E2 Technology

5E002

a.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development", "production" or "use" of equipment specified in 5A002, 5A003, 5A004 or 5B002, or of "software" specified in 5D002.a. or 5D002.c.

Note:

b.

"Technology" having the characteristics of a 'cryptographic activation token' specified in 5A002.b.

Note:

PART VIII – Category 6

CATEGORY 6 - SENSORS AND LASERS

6A Systems, Equipment and Components

6A001

a.

Marine acoustic systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

1.

Active (transmitting or transmitting-and-receiving) systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

Note:

a.

Depth sounders operating vertically below the apparatus, not including a scanning function exceeding ± 20°, and limited to measuring the depth of water, the distance of submerged or buried objects or fish finding;

b.

Acoustic beacons, as follows:

1.

Acoustic emergency beacons;

2.

Pingers specially designed for relocating or returning to an underwater position.

a.

Acoustic seabed survey equipment as follows:

1.

Surface vessel survey equipment designed for seabed topographic mapping and having all of the following:

a.

Designed to take measurements at an angle exceeding 20° from the vertical;

b.

Designed to measure seabed topography at seabed depths exceeding 600 m;

c.

'Sounding resolution' less than 2; and

d.

'Enhancement' of the depth "accuracy" through compensation for all the following:

1.

Motion of the acoustic sensor;

2.

In-water propagation from sensor to the seabed and back; and

3.

Sound speed at the sensor;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

Underwater survey equipment designed for seabed topographic mapping and having any of the following:

Technical Note:

The acoustic sensor pressure rating determines the depth rating of the equipment specified in 6A001.a.1.a.2.

a.

Having all of the following:

1.

Designed or modified to operate at depths exceeding 300 m; and

2.

'Sounding rate' greater than 3 800 m/s; or

Technical Note:

'Sounding rate' is the product of the maximum speed (m/s) at which the sensor can operate and the maximum number of soundings per swath assuming 100% coverage. For systems that produce soundings in two directions (3D sonars), the maximum of the 'sounding rate' in either direction should be used.

b.

Survey equipment, not specified in 6A001.a.1.a.2.a., having all of the following:

1.

Designed or modified to operate at depths exceeding 100 m;

2.

Designed to take measurements at an angle exceeding 20° from the vertical;

3.

Having any of the following:

a.

Operating frequency below 350 kHz; or

b.

Designed to measure seabed topography at a range exceeding 200 m from the acoustic sensor; and

4.

'Enhancement' of the depth "accuracy" through compensation of all of the following:

a.

Motion of the acoustic sensor;

b.

In-water propagation from sensor to the seabed and back; and

c.

Sound speed at the sensor;

3.

Side Scan Sonar (SSS) or Synthetic Aperture Sonar (SAS), designed for seabed imaging and having all of the following, and specially designed transmitting and receiving acoustic arrays therefor:

a.

Designed or modified to operate at depths exceeding 500 m;

b.

An 'area coverage rate' of greater than 570 m 2 /s while operating at the maximum range that it can operate with an 'along track resolution' of less than 15 cm; and

c.

An 'across track resolution' of less than 15 cm;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

b.

Systems or transmitting and receiving arrays, designed for object detection or location, having any of the following:

1.

A transmitting frequency below 10 kHz;

2.

Sound pressure level exceeding 224 dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) for equipment with an operating frequency in the band from 10 kHz to 24 kHz inclusive;

3.

Sound pressure level exceeding 235 dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) for equipment with an operating frequency in the band between 24 kHz and 30 kHz;

4.

Forming beams of less than 1° on any axis and having an operating frequency of less than 100 kHz;

5.

Designed to operate with an unambiguous display range exceeding 5 120 m; or

6.

Designed to withstand pressure during normal operation at depths exceeding 1 000 m and having transducers with any of the following:

a.

Dynamic compensation for pressure; or

b.

Incorporating other than lead zirconate titanate as the transduction element;

c.

Acoustic projectors (including transducers), incorporating piezoelectric, magnetostrictive, electrostrictive, electrodynamic or hydraulic elements operating individually or in a designed combination and having any of the following:

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

1.

Operating at frequencies below 10 kHz and having any of the following:

a.

Not designed for continuous operation at 100% duty cycle and having a radiated 'free-field Source Level (SL RMS )' exceeding (10log(f) + 169,77) dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) where f is the frequency in Hertz of maximum Transmitting Voltage Response (TVR) below 10kHz; or

b.

Designed for continuous operation at 100% duty cycle and having a continuously radiated 'free-field Source Level (SL RMS )' at 100% duty cycle exceeding (10log(f) + 159,77) dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) where f is the frequency in Hertz of maximum Transmitting Voltage Response (TVR) below 10kHz; or

Technical Note:

The 'free-field Source Level ( SL RMS )' is defined along the maximum response axis and in the far field of the acoustic projector. It can be obtained from the Transmitting Voltage Response using the following equation: SL RMS = (TVR + 20log V RMS ) dB (ref 1μPa at 1 m), where SL RMS is the source level, TVR is the Transmitting Voltage Response and V RMS is the Driving Voltage of the Projector.

2.

Not used;

3.

Side-lobe suppression exceeding 22 dB;

d.

Acoustic systems and equipment, designed to determine the position of surface vessels or underwater vehicles and having all the following, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

Detection range exceeding 1 000 m; and

2.

Determined position error of less than 10 m rms (root mean square) when measured at a range of 1 000 m;

Note: 6A001.a.1.d. includes:

a.

Equipment using coherent "signal processing" between two or more beacons and the hydrophone unit carried by the surface vessel or underwater vehicle;

b.

Equipment capable of automatically correcting speed-of-sound propagation errors for calculation of a point.

e.

Active individual sonars, specially designed or modified to detect, locate and automatically classify swimmers or divers, having all of the following, and specially designed transmitting and receiving acoustic arrays therefor:

1.

Detection range exceeding 530 m;

2.

Determined position error of less than 15 m rms (root mean square) when measured at a range of 530 m; and

3.

Transmitted pulse signal bandwidth exceeding 3 kHz;

N.B.

Note:

2.

Passive systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

Note:

a.

Hydrophones having any of the following:

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

1.

Incorporating continuous flexible sensing elements;

2.

Incorporating flexible assemblies of discrete sensing elements with either a diameter or length less than 20 mm and with a separation between elements of less than 20 mm;

3.

Having any of the following sensing elements:

a.

Optical fibres;

b.

'Piezoelectric polymer films' other than polyvinylidene-fluoride (PVDF) and its co-polymers {P(VDF-TrFE) and P(VDF-TFE)};

c.

'Flexible piezoelectric composites';

d.

Lead-magnesium-niobate/lead-titanate (i.e., Pb(Mg 1/3 Nb 2/3 )O 3 -PbTiO 3 , or PMN-PT) piezoelectric single crystals grown from solid solution; or

e.

Lead-indium-niobate/lead-magnesium niobate/lead-titanate (i.e., Pb(In 1/2 Nb 1/2 )O 3 –Pb(Mg 1/3 Nb 2/3 )O 3 –PbTiO 3 , or PIN-PMN-PT) piezoelectric single crystals grown from solid solution;

4.

A 'hydrophone sensitivity' better than -180 dB at any depth with no acceleration compensation;

5.

Designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m with acceleration compensation; or

6.

Designed for operation at depths exceeding 1 000 m and having a 'hydrophone sensitivity' better than -230 dB below 4 kHz;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

b.

Towed acoustic hydrophone arrays having any of the following:

Technical Note:

Hydrophone arrays consist of a number of hydrophones providing multiple acoustic output channels.

1.

Hydrophone group spacing of less than 12,5 m or 'able to be modified' to have hydrophone group spacing of less than 12,5 m;

2.

Designed or 'able to be modified' to operate at depths exceeding 35 m;

Technical note:

'Able to be modified' in 6A001.a.2.b.1. and 2. means having provisions to allow a change of the wiring or interconnections to alter hydrophone group spacing or operating depth limits. These provisions are: spare wiring exceeding 10% of the number of wires, hydrophone group spacing adjustment blocks or internal depth limiting devices that are adjustable or that control more than one hydrophone group.

3.

Heading sensors specified in 6A001.a.2.d.;

4.

Longitudinally reinforced array hoses;

5.

An assembled array of less than 40 mm in diameter;

6.

Not used;

7.

Hydrophone characteristics specified in 6A001.a.2.a.; or

8.

Accelerometer-based hydro-acoustic sensors specified in 6A001.a.2.g.;

c.

Processing equipment, specially designed for towed acoustic hydrophone arrays, having "user-accessible programmability" and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;

d.

Heading sensors having all of the following:

1.

An "accuracy" of better than 0,5°; and

2.

Designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m or having an adjustable or removable depth sensing device in order to operate at depths exceeding 35 m;

N.B.

e.

Bottom or bay-cable hydrophone arrays, having any of the following:

1.

Incorporating hydrophones specified in 6A001.a.2.a.;

2.

Incorporating multiplexed hydrophone group signal modules having all of the following characteristics:

a.

Designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m or having an adjustable or removable depth sensing device in order to operate at depths exceeding 35 m; and

b.

Capable of being operationally interchanged with towed acoustic hydrophone array modules; or

3.

Incorporating accelerometer-based hydro-acoustic sensors specified in 6A001.a.2.g.;

f.

Processing equipment, specially designed for bottom or bay cable systems, having "user-accessible programmability" and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;

g.

Accelerometer-based hydro-acoustic sensors having all of the following:

1.

Composed of three accelerometers arranged along three distinct axes;

2.

Having an overall 'acceleration sensitivity' better than 48 dB (reference 1 000 mV rms per 1g);

3.

Designed to operate at depths greater than 35 meters; and

4.

Operating frequency below 20 kHz.

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

b.

Correlation-velocity and Doppler-velocity sonar log equipment, designed to measure the horizontal speed of the equipment carrier relative to the sea bed, as follows:

1.

Correlation-velocity sonar log equipment having any of the following characteristics:

a.

Designed to operate at distances between the carrier and the sea bed exceeding 500 m; or

b.

Having speed "accuracy" better than 1% of speed;

2.

Doppler-velocity sonar log equipment having speed "accuracy" better than 1% of speed.

Note 1:

a.

Measuring the depth of water;

b.

Measuring the distance of submerged or buried objects; or

c.

Fish finding.

Note 2:

c.

Not used.

6A002

N.B.

a.

Optical detectors as follows:

1.

"Space-qualified" solid-state detectors as follows:

Note:

a.

"Space-qualified" solid-state detectors having all of the following:

1.

A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm but not exceeding 300 nm; and

2.

A response of less than 0,1% relative to the peak response at a wavelength exceeding 400 nm;

b.

"Space-qualified" solid-state detectors having all of the following:

1.

A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 900 nm but not exceeding 1 200 nm; and

2.

A response "time constant" of 95 ns or less;

c.

"Space-qualified" solid-state detectors having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 200 nm but not exceeding 30 000 nm;

d.

"Space-qualified""focal plane arrays" having more than 2 048 elements per array and having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 300 nm but not exceeding 900 nm;

2.

Image intensifier tubes and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

Note:

a.

A single metal anode; or

b.

Metal anodes with a centre to centre spacing greater than 500 μm.

Technical Note:

'Charge multiplication' is a form of electronic image amplification and is defined as the generation of charge carriers as a result of an impact ionisation gain process. 'Charge multiplication' sensors may take the form of an image intensifier tube, solid state detector or "focal plane array".

a.

Image intensifier tubes having all of the following:

1.

A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 1 050 nm;

2.

Electron image amplification using any of the following:

a.

A microchannel plate with a hole pitch (centre-to-centre spacing) of 12 μm or less; or

b.

An electron sensing device with a non-binned pixel pitch of 500 μm or less, specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' other than by a microchannel plate; and

3.

Any of the following photocathodes:

a.

Multialkali photocathodes (e.g., S-20 and S-25) having a luminous sensitivity exceeding 350 μA/lm;

b.

GaAs or GaInAs photocathodes; or

c.

Other "III/V compound" semiconductor photocathodes having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 10 mA/W;

b.

Image intensifier tubes having all of the following:

1.

A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 050 nm but not exceeding 1 800 nm;

2.

Electron image amplification using any of the following:

a.

A microchannel plate with a hole pitch (centre-to-centre spacing) of 12 μm or less; or

b.

An electron sensing device with a non-binned pixel pitch of 500 μm or less, specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' other than by a microchannel plate; and

3.

"III/V compound" semiconductor (e.g., GaAs or GaInAs) photocathodes and transferred electron photocathodes, having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 15 mA/W;

c.

Specially designed components as follows:

1.

Microchannel plates having a hole pitch (centre-to-centre spacing) of 12 μm or less;

2.

An electron sensing device with a non-binned pixel pitch of 500 μm or less, specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' other than by a microchannel plate;

3.

"III/V compound" semiconductor (e.g., GaAs or GaInAs) photocathodes and transferred electron photocathodes;

Note: 6A002.a.2.c.3. does not control compound semiconductor photocathodes designed to achieve a maximum "radiant sensitivity" of any of the following:

a.

10 mA/W or less at the peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 1 050 nm; or

b.

15 mA/W or less at the peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 050 nm but not exceeding 1 800 nm.

3.

Non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" as follows:

N.B.

Technical Note:

Linear or two-dimensional multi-element detector arrays are referred to as "focal plane arrays";

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

Multi-element (not to exceed 16 elements) encapsulated photoconductive cells using either lead sulphide or lead selenide;

b.

Pyroelectric detectors using any of the following:

1.

Triglycine sulphate and variants;

2.

Lead-lanthanum-zirconium titanate and variants;

3.

Lithium tantalate;

4.

Polyvinylidene fluoride and variants; or

5.

Strontium barium niobate and variants;

c.

"Focal plane arrays" specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' and limited by design to have a maximum "radiant sensitivity" of 10 mA/W or less for wavelengths exceeding 760 nm, having all of the following:

1.

Incorporating a response limiting mechanism designed not to be removed or modified; and

2.

Any of the following:

a.

The response limiting mechanism is integral to or combined with the detector element; or

b.

The "focal plane array" is only operable with the response limiting mechanism in place.

Technical Note:

A response limiting mechanism integral to the detector element is designed not to be removed or modified without rendering the detector inoperable.

d.

Thermopile arrays having less than 5 130 elements.

Technical Note:

'Charge multiplication' is a form of electronic image amplification and is defined as the generation of charge carriers as a result of an impact ionisation gain process. 'Charge multiplication' sensors may take the form of an image intensifier tube, solid state detector or "focal plane array".

a.

Non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" having all of the following:

1.

Individual elements with a peak response within the wavelength range exceeding 900 nm but not exceeding 1 050 nm; and

2.

Any of the following:

a.

A response "time constant" of less than 0,5 ns; or

b.

Specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' and having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 10 mA/W;

b.

Non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" having all of the following:

1.

Individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 050 nm but not exceeding 1 200 nm; and

2.

Any of the following:

a.

A response "time constant" of 95 ns or less; or

b.

Specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' and having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 10 mA/W;

c.

Non-"space-qualified" non-linear (2-dimensional) "focal plane arrays" having individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 200 nm but not exceeding 30 000 nm;

N.B.

d.

Non-"space-qualified" linear (1-dimensional) "focal plane arrays" having all of the following:

1.

Individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1 200 nm but not exceeding 3 000 nm; and

2.

Any of the following:

a.

A ratio of 'scan direction' dimension of the detector element to the 'cross-scan direction' dimension of the detector element of less than 3,8; or

b.

Signal processing in the detector elements;

Note:

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 6A002.a.3.d., 'cross-scan direction' is defined as the axis parallel to the linear array of detector elements and the 'scan direction' is defined as the axis perpendicular to the linear array of detector elements.

e.

Non-"space-qualified" linear (1-dimensional) "focal plane arrays" having individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 3 000 nm but not exceeding 30 000 nm;

f.

Non-"space-qualified" non-linear (2-dimensional) infrared "focal plane arrays" based on 'microbolometer' material having individual elements with an unfiltered response in the wavelength range equal to or exceeding 8 000 nm but not exceeding 14 000 nm;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 6A002.a.3.f., 'microbolometer' is defined as a thermal imaging detector that, as a result of a temperature change in the detector caused by the absorption of infrared radiation, is used to generate any usable signal.

g.

Non-"space-qualified""focal plane arrays" having all of the following:

1.

Individual detector elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 900 nm;

2.

Specially designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication' and having a maximum "radiant sensitivity" exceeding 10 mA/W for wavelengths exceeding 760 nm; and

3.

Greater than 32 elements;

b.

"Monospectral imaging sensors" and "multispectral imaging sensors", designed for remote sensing applications and having any of the following:

1.

An Instantaneous-Field-Of-View (IFOV) of less than 200 μrad (microradians); or

2.

Specified for operation in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 30 000 nm and having all the following;

a.

Providing output imaging data in digital format; and

b.

Having any of the following characteristics:

1.

"Space-qualified"; or

2.

Designed for airborne operation, using other than silicon detectors, and having an IFOV of less than 2,5 mrad (milliradians);

Note:

1.

Charge Coupled Devices (CCD) not designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication'; or

2.

Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS) devices not designed or modified to achieve 'charge multiplication'.

c.

'Direct view' imaging equipment incorporating any of the following:

1.

Image intensifier tubes specified in 6A002.a.2.a. or 6A002.a.2.b.;

2.

"Focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.; or

3.

Solid state detectors specified in 6A002.a.1.;

Technical Note:

'Direct view' refers to imaging equipment that presents a visual image to a human observer without converting the image into an electronic signal for television display, and that cannot record or store the image photographically, electronically or by any other means.

Note:

a.

Industrial or civilian intrusion alarm, traffic or industrial movement control or counting systems;

b.

Medical equipment;

c.

Industrial equipment used for inspection, sorting or analysis of the properties of materials;

d.

Flame detectors for industrial furnaces;

e.

Equipment specially designed for laboratory use.

d.

Special support components for optical sensors, as follows:

1.

"Space-qualified" cryocoolers;

2.

Non-"space-qualified" cryocoolers having a cooling source temperature below 218 K (-55°C), as follows:

a.

Closed cycle type with a specified Mean-Time-To-Failure (MTTF) or Mean-Time-Between-Failures (MTBF), exceeding 2 500 hours;

b.

Joule-Thomson (JT) self-regulating minicoolers having bore (outside) diameters of less than 8 mm;

3.

Optical sensing fibres specially fabricated either compositionally or structurally, or modified by coating, to be acoustically, thermally, inertially, electromagnetically or nuclear radiation sensitive;

Note:

e.

Not used.

f.

'Read-out integrated circuits' ('ROIC') specially designed for "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.

Note:

Technical Note:

A 'Read-Out Integrated Circuit' ('ROIC') is an integrated circuit designed to underlie or be bonded to a "focal plane array" ("FPA") and used to read-out (i.e., extract and register) signals produced by the detector elements. At a minimum the 'ROIC' reads the charge from the detector elements by extracting the charge and applying a multiplexing function in a manner that retains the relative spatial position and orientation information of the detector elements for processing inside or outside the 'ROIC'.

6A003

N.B.

a.

Instrumentation cameras and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

Note:

1.

Not used;

2.

Not used;

3.

Electronic streak cameras having temporal resolution better than 50 ns;

4.

Electronic framing cameras having a speed exceeding 1 000 000 frames/s;

5.

Electronic cameras having all of the following:

a.

An electronic shutter speed (gating capability) of less than 1 μs per full frame; and

b.

A read out time allowing a framing rate of more than 125 full frames per second;

6.

Plug-ins having all of the following characteristics:

a.

Specially designed for instrumentation cameras which have modular structures and which are specified in 6A003.a.; and

b.

Enabling these cameras to meet the characteristics specified in 6A003.a.3., 6A003.a.4., or 6A003.a.5., according to the manufacturer's specifications;

b.

Imaging cameras as follows:

Note:

1.

Video cameras incorporating solid state sensors, having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm, but not exceeding 30 000 nm and having all of the following:

a.

Having any of the following:

1.

More than 4 x 10 6 "active pixels" per solid state array for monochrome (black and white) cameras;

2.

More than 4 x 10 6 "active pixels" per solid state array for colour cameras incorporating three solid state arrays; or

3.

More than 12 x 10 6 "active pixels" for solid state array colour cameras incorporating one solid state array; and

b.

Having any of the following:

1.

Optical mirrors specified in 6A004.a.;

2.

Optical control equipment specified in 6A004.d.; or

3.

The capability for annotating internally generated 'camera tracking data';

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

Scanning cameras and scanning camera systems, having all of the following:

a.

A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm, but not exceeding 30 000 nm;

b.

Linear detector arrays with more than 8 192 elements per array; and

c.

Mechanical scanning in one direction;

Note:

a.

Industrial or civilian photocopiers;

b.

Image scanners specially designed for civil, stationary, close proximity scanning applications (e.g., reproduction of images or print contained in documents, artwork or photographs); or

c.

Medical equipment.

3.

Imaging cameras incorporating image intensifier tubes specified in 6A002.a.2.a. or 6A002.a.2.b.;

4.

Imaging cameras incorporating "focal plane arrays" having any of the following:

a.

Incorporating "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.a. to 6A002.a.3.e.;

b.

Incorporating "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.f.; or

c.

Incorporating "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.g.;

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

Industrial or civilian intrusion alarm, traffic or industrial movement control or counting systems;

b.

Industrial equipment used for inspection or monitoring of heat flows in buildings, equipment or industrial processes;

c.

Industrial equipment used for inspection, sorting or analysis of the properties of materials;

d.

Equipment specially designed for laboratory use; or

e.

Medical equipment.

Note 3:

a.

A maximum frame rate equal to or less than 9 Hz ;

b.

Having all of the following:

1.

Having a minimum horizontal or vertical 'Instantaneous-Field-of-View (IFOV)' of at least 2 mrad (milliradians);

2.

Incorporating a fixed focal-length lens that is not designed to be removed;

3.

Not incorporating a 'direct view' display, and

4.

Having any of the following:

a.

No facility to obtain a viewable image of the detected field-of-view, or

b.

The camera is designed for a single kind of application and designed not to be user modified; or

c.

The camera is specially designed for installation into a civilian passenger land vehicle and having all of the following:

1

The placement and configuration of the camera within the vehicle are solely to assist the driver in the safe operation of the vehicle;

2.

Is only operable when installed in any of the following:

a.

The civilian passenger land vehicle for which it was intended and the vehicle weighs less than 4 500 kg (gross vehicle weight); or

b.

A specially designed, authorised maintenance test facility; and

3.

Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when it is removed from the vehicle for which it was intended.

Technical Notes:

1.

'Horizontal IFOV' = horizontal Field of View (FOV) / number of horizontal detector elements

'Vertical IFOV' = vertical Field of View (FOV) / number of vertical detector elements.

2.

Note 4:

a.

Having all of the following:

1.

Where the camera is specially designed for installation as an integrated component into indoor and wall-plug-operated systems or equipment, limited by design for a single kind of application, as follows;

a.

Industrial process monitoring, quality control, or analysis of the properties of materials;

b.

Laboratory equipment specially designed for scientific research;

c.

Medical equipment;

d.

Financial fraud detection equipment; and

2.

Is only operable when installed in any of the following:

a.

The system(s) or equipment for which it was intended; or

b.

A specially designed, authorised maintenance facility; and

3.

Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when it is removed from the system(s) or equipment for which it was intended;

b.

Where the camera is specially designed for installation into a civilian passenger land vehicle or passenger and vehicle ferries, and having all of the following:

1.

The placement and configuration of the camera within the vehicle or ferry is solely to assist the driver or operator in the safe operation of the vehicle or ferry;

2.

Is only operable when installed in any of the following:

a.

The civilian passenger land vehicle for which it was intended and the vehicle weighs less than 4 500 kg (gross vehicle weight);

b.

The passenger and vehicle ferry for which it was intended and having a length overall (LOA) 65 m or greater; or

c.

A specially designed, authorised maintenance test facility; and

3.

Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when it is removed from the vehicle for which it was intended;

c.

Limited by design to have a maximum "radiant sensitivity" of 10 mA/W or less for wavelengths exceeding 760 nm, having all of the following:

1.

Incorporating a response limiting mechanism designed not to be removed or modified;

2.

Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when the response limiting mechanism is removed; and

3.

Not specially designed or modified for underwater use: or

d.

Having all of the following:

1.

Not incorporating a 'direct view' or electronic image display;

2.

Has no facility to output a viewable image of the detected field of view;

3.

The "focal plane array" is only operable when installed in the camera for which it was intended; and

4.

The "focal plane array" incorporates an active mechanism that forces it to be permanently inoperable when removed from the camera for which it was intended.

5.

Imaging cameras incorporating solid-state detectors specified in 6A002.a.1.

6A004

a.

Optical mirrors (reflectors) as follows:

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 6A004.a., Laser Induced Damage Threshold (LIDT) is measured according to ISO 21254-1:2011.

N.B.

1.

'Deformable mirrors' having an active optical aperture greater than 10 mm and having any of the following, and specially designed components therefor,

a.

Having all the following:

1.

A mechanical resonant frequency of 750 Hz or more; and

2.

More than 200 actuators; or

b.

A Laser Induced Damage Threshold (LIDT) being any of the following:

1.

Greater than 1 kW/ cm 2 using a "CW laser"; or

2.

Greater than 2 J/ cm 2 using 20 ns "laser" pulses at 20 Hz repetition rate;

Technical Note:

'Deformable mirrors' are mirrors having any of the following:

a.

A single continuous optical reflecting surface which is dynamically deformed by the application of individual torques or forces to compensate for distortions in the optical waveform incident upon the mirror; or

b.

Multiple optical reflecting elements that can be individually and dynamically repositioned by the application of torques or forces to compensate for distortions in the optical waveform incident upon the mirror.

'Deformable mirrors' are also known as adaptive optic mirrors.

2.

Lightweight monolithic mirrors having an average "equivalent density" of less than 30 kg/m 2 and a total mass exceeding 10 kg;

Note:

3.

Lightweight "composite" or foam mirror structures having an average "equivalent density" of less than 30 kg/m 2 and a total mass exceeding 2 kg;

Note:

4.

Mirrors specially designed for beam steering mirror stages specified in 6A004.d.2.a. with a flatness of λ/10 or better (λ is equal to 633 nm)and having any of the following:

a.

Diameter or major axis length greater than or equal to 100 mm; or

b.

Having all of the following:

1.

Diameter or major axis length greater than 50 mm but less than 100 mm; and

2.

A Laser Induced Damage Threshold (LIDT) being any of the following:

a.

Greater than 10 kW/cm 2 using a "CW laser"; or

b.

Greater than 20 J/cm 2 using 20 ns "laser" pulses at 20 Hz repetition rate;

b.

Optical components made from zinc selenide (ZnSe) or zinc sulphide (ZnS) with transmission in the wavelength range exceeding 3 000 nm but not exceeding 25 000 nm and having any of the following:

1.

Exceeding 100 cm 3 in volume; or

2.

Exceeding 80 mm in diameter or length of major axis and 20 mm in thickness (depth);

c.

"Space-qualified" components for optical systems, as follows:

1.

Components lightweighted to less than 20% "equivalent density" compared with a solid blank of the same aperture and thickness;

2.

Raw substrates, processed substrates having surface coatings (single-layer or multi-layer, metallic or dielectric, conducting, semiconducting or insulating) or having protective films;

3.

Segments or assemblies of mirrors designed to be assembled in space into an optical system with a collecting aperture equivalent to or larger than a single optic 1 m in diameter;

4.

Components manufactured from "composite" materials having a coefficient of linear thermal expansion, in any coordinate direction, equal to or less than 5 x 10 -6 /K;

d.

Optical control equipment as follows:

1.

Equipment specially designed to maintain the surface figure or orientation of the "space-qualified" components specified in 6A004.c.1. or 6A004.c.3.;

2.

Steering, tracking, stabilisation and resonator alignment equipment as follows:

a.

Beam steering mirror stages designed to carry mirrors having diameter or major axis length greater than 50 mm and having all of the following, and specially designed electronic control equipment therefor:

1.

A maximum angular travel of ±26 mrad or more;

2.

A mechanical resonant frequency of 500 Hz or more; and

3.

An angular "accuracy" of 10 μrad (microradians) or less (better);

b.

Resonator alignment equipment having bandwidths equal to or more than 100 Hz and an "accuracy" of 10 μrad or less (better);

3.

Gimbals having all of the following:

a.

A maximum slew exceeding 5°;

b.

A bandwidth of 100 Hz or more;

c.

Angular pointing errors of 200 μrad (microradians) or less; and

d.

Having any of the following:

1.

Exceeding 0,15 m but not exceeding 1 m in diameter or major axis length and capable of angular accelerations exceeding 2 rad (radians)/s 2 ; or

2.

Exceeding 1 m in diameter or major axis length and capable of angular accelerations exceeding 0,5 rad (radians)/s 2 ;

4.

Not used

e.

'Aspheric optical elements' having all of the following:

1.

Largest dimension of the optical-aperture greater than 400 mm;

2.

Surface roughness less than 1 nm (rms) for sampling lengths equal to or greater than 1 mm; and

3.

Coefficient of linear thermal expansion's absolute magnitude less than 3 x 10 -6 /K at 25°C.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

Note

a.

Largest optical-aperture dimension less than 1 m and focal length to aperture ratio equal to or greater than 4,5:1;

b.

Largest optical-aperture dimension equal to or greater than 1 m and focal length to aperture ratio equal to or greater than 7:1;

c.

Designed as Fresnel, flyeye, stripe, prism or diffractive optical elements;

d.

Fabricated from borosilicate glass having a coefficient of linear thermal expansion greater than 2,5 x 10 -6 /K at 25 °C; or

e.

An X-ray optical element having inner mirror capabilities (e.g., tube-type mirrors).

N.B.

f.

Dynamic wavefront measuring equipment having all of the following:

1.

'Frame rates' equal to or more than 1 kHz; and

2.

A wavefront accuracy equal to or less (better) than λ/20 at the designed wavelength.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 6A004.f., 'frame rate' is a frequency at which all "active pixels" in the "focal plane array" are integrated for recording images projected by the wavefront sensor optics.

6A005

N.B.

Note 1:

Note 2:

Technical Note:

'Non-repetitive pulsed' refers to "lasers" that produce either a single output pulse or that have a time interval between pulses exceeding one minute.

Note 3:

Note 4:

Note 5:

a.

Ruby with output energy below 20 J;

b.

Nitrogen;

c.

Krypton.

Note 6:

Technical Note:

In 6A005 'Wall-plug efficiency' is defined as the ratio of "laser" output power (or "average output power") to total electrical input power required to operate the "laser", including the power supply/conditioning and thermal conditioning/heat exchanger.

a.

Non-"tunable" continuous wave "(CW) lasers" having any of the following:

1.

Output wavelength less than 150 nm and output power exceeding 1 W;

2.

Output wavelength of 150 nm or more but not exceeding 510 nm and output power exceeding 30 W;

Note:

3.

Output wavelength exceeding 510 nm but not exceeding 540 nm and any of the following:

a.

'Single transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 50 W; or

b.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 150 W;

4.

Output wavelength exceeding 540 nm but not exceeding 800 nm and output power exceeding 30 W;

5.

Output wavelength exceeding 800 nm but not exceeding 975 nm and any of the following:

a.

'Single transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 50 W; or

b.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 80 W;

6.

Output wavelength exceeding 975 nm but not exceeding 1 150 nm and any of the following:

a.

'Single transverse mode' output and any of the following:

1.

Output power exceeding 1 000 W; or

2.

Having all of the following:

a.

Output power exceeding 500 W; and

b.

Spectral bandwidth less than 40 GHz; or

b.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and any of the following:

1.

'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 18% and output power exceeding 1 000 W; or

2.

Output power exceeding 2 kW;

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

Not used;

b.

Output power exceeding 1 kW but not exceeding 1,6 kW and having a BPP exceeding 1,25 mm•mrad

c.

Output power exceeding 1,6 kW but not exceeding 2,5 kW and having a BPP exceeding 1,7 mm•mrad;

d.

Output power exceeding 2,5 kW but not exceeding 3,3 kW and having a BPP exceeding 2,5 mm•mrad;

e.

Output power exceeding 3,3 kW but not exceeding 6 kW and having a BPP exceeding 3,5 mm•mrad;

f.

Not used;

g.

Not used;

h.

Output power exceeding 6 kW but not exceeding 8 kW and having a BPP exceeding 12 mm•mrad; or

i.

Output power exceeding 8 kW but not exceeding 10 kW and having a BPP exceeding 24 mm•mrad.

7.

Output wavelength exceeding 1 150 nm but not exceeding 1 555 nm and any of the following:

a.

'Single transverse mode' and output power exceeding 50 W; or

b.

'Multiple transverse mode' and output power exceeding 80 W;

8.

Output wavelength exceeding 1 555 nm but not exceeding 1 850 nm and output power exceeding 1 W;

9.

Output wavelength exceeding 1 850 nm but not exceeding 2 100 nm, and any of the following:

a.

'Single transverse mode' and output power exceeding 1 W; or

b.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and output power exceeding 120 W; or

10.

Output wavelength exceeding 2 100 nm and output power exceeding 1 W;

b.

Non-"tunable""pulsed lasers" having any of the following:

1.

Output wavelength less than 150 nm and any of the following:

a.

Output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; or

b.

"Average output power" exceeding 1 W;

2.

Output wavelength of 150 nm or more but not exceeding 510 nm and any of the following:

a.

Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 30 W; or

b.

"Average output power" exceeding 30 W;

Note:

3.

Output wavelength exceeding 510 nm but not exceeding 540 nm and any of the following:

a.

'Single transverse mode' output and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 50 W; or

b.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 150 W; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 150 W;

4.

Output wavelength exceeding 540 nm but not exceeding 800 nm and any of the following:

a.

"Pulse duration" less than 1 ps and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 0,005 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 5 GW; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 20 W; or

b.

"Pulse duration" equal to or exceeding 1 ps and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 30 W; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 30 W;

5.

Output wavelength exceeding 800 nm but not exceeding 975 nm and any of the following:

a.

"Pulse duration" less than 1 ps and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 0,005 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 5 GW; or

2.

'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 20 W;

b.

"Pulse duration" equal to or exceeding 1 ps and not exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 0,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W;

2.

'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 20 W; or

3.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 50 W; or

c.

"Pulse duration" exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W;

2.

'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 50 W; or

3.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 80 W;

6.

Output wavelength exceeding 975 nm but not exceeding 1 150 nm and any of the following:

a.

"Pulse duration" of less than 1 ps, and any of the following:

1.

Output "peak power" exceeding 2 GW per pulse;

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 30 W; or

3.

Output energy exceeding 0,002 J per pulse;

b.

"Pulse duration" equal to or exceeding 1 ps and less than 1 ns and any of the following:

1.

Output "peak power" exceeding 5 GW per pulse;

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 50 W; or

3.

Output energy exceeding 0,1 J per pulse;

c.

"Pulse duration" equal to or exceeding 1 ns but not exceeding 1 μs, and any of the following:

1.

'Single transverse mode' output and any of the following:

a.

"Peak power" exceeding 100 MW;

b.

"Average output power" exceeding 20 W limited by design to a maximum pulse repetition frequency less than or equal to 1 kHz;

c.

'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 12%, "average output power" exceeding 100 W and capable of operating at a pulse repetition frequency greater than 1 kHz;

d.

"Average output power" exceeding 150 W and capable of operating at a pulse repetition frequency greater than 1 kHz; or

e.

Output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse; or

2.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and any of the following:

a.

"Peak power" exceeding 400 MW;

b.

'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 18% and "average output power" exceeding 500 W;

c.

"Average output power" exceeding 2 kW; or

d.

Output energy exceeding 4 J per pulse; or

d.

"Pulse duration" exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:

1.

'Single transverse mode' output and any of the following:

a.

"Peak power" exceeding 500 kW;

b.

'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 12% and "average output power" exceeding 100 W; or

c.

"Average output power" exceeding 150 W; or

2.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and any of the following:

a.

"Peak power" exceeding 1 MW;

b.

'Wall-plug efficiency' exceeding 18% and "average output power" exceeding 500 W; or

c.

"Average output power" exceeding 2 kW;

7.

Output wavelength exceeding 1 150 nm but not exceeding 1 555 nm, and any of the following:

a.

"Pulse duration" not exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 0,5 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W;

2.

'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 20 W; or

3.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 50 W; or

b.

"Pulse duration" exceeding 1 μs and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 50 W;

2.

'Single transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 50 W; or

3.

'Multiple transverse mode' output and "average output power" exceeding 80 W;

8.

Output wavelength exceeding 1 555 nm but not exceeding 1 850 nm, and any of the following:

a.

Output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; or

b.

"Average output power" exceeding 1 W;

9.

Output wavelength exceeding 1 850 nm but not exceeding 2 100 nm, and any of the following

a.

'Single transverse mode' and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 1 W; or

b.

'Multiple transverse mode' and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 10 kW; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 120 W; or

10.

Output wavelength exceeding 2 100 nm and any of the following:

a.

Output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; or

b.

"Average output power" exceeding 1 W;

c.

"Tunable""lasers" having any of the following:

1.

Output wavelength less than 600 nm and any of the following:

a.

Output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; or

b.

Average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

Note:

1.

Output energy less than 1,5 J per pulse or a "peak power" less than 20 W; and

2.

Average or CW output power less than 20 W.

2.

Output wavelength of 600 nm or more but not exceeding 1 400 nm, and any of the following:

a.

Output energy exceeding 1 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 20 W; or

b.

Average or CW output power exceeding 20 W; or

3.

Output wavelength exceeding 1 400 nm and any of the following:

a.

Output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 1 W; or

b.

Average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

d.

Other "lasers", not specified in 6A005.a., 6A005.b. or 6A005.c. as follows:

1.

Semiconductor "lasers" as follows:

Note 1:

Note 2:

a.

Individual single-transverse mode semiconductor "lasers" having any of the following:

1.

Wavelength equal to or less than 1 510 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 1,5 W; or

2.

Wavelength greater than 1 510 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 500 mW;

b.

Individual multiple-transverse mode semiconductor "lasers" having any of the following:

1.

Wavelength of less than 1 400 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 15W;

2.

Wavelength equal to or greater than 1 400 nm and less than 1 900 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 2,5 W; or

3.

Wavelength equal to or greater than 1 900 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 1 W;

c.

Individual semiconductor "laser" 'bars', having any of the following:

1.

Wavelength of less than 1 400 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 100 W;

2.

Wavelength equal to or greater than 1 400 nm and less than 1 900 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 25 W; or

3.

Wavelength equal to or greater than 1 900 nm and average or CW output power, exceeding 10 W;

d.

Semiconductor "laser" 'stacked arrays' (two-dimensional arrays) having any of the following:

1.

Wavelength less than 1 400 nm and having any of the following:

a.

Average or CW total output power less than 3 kW and having average or CW output 'power density' greater than 500 W/cm 2 ;

b.

Average or CW total output power equal to or exceeding 3 kW but less than or equal to 5 kW, and having average or CW output 'power density' greater than 350 W/cm 2 ;

c.

Average or CW total output power exceeding 5 kW;

d.

Peak pulsed 'power density' exceeding 2 500 W/cm 2 ; or

Note:

e.

Spatially coherent average or CW total output power, greater than 150 W;

2.

Wavelength greater than or equal to 1 400 nm but less than 1 900 nm, and having any of the following:

a.

Average or CW total output power less than 250 W and average or CW output 'power density' greater than 150 W/cm 2 ;

b.

Average or CW total output power equal to or exceeding 250 W but less than or equal to 500 W, and having average or CW output 'power density' greater than 50 W/cm 2 ;

c.

Average or CW total output power exceeding 500 W;

d.

Peak pulsed 'power density' exceeding 500 W/cm 2 ; or

Note:

e.

Spatially coherent average or CW total output power, exceeding 15 W;

3.

Wavelength greater than or equal to 1 900 nm and having any of the following:

a.

Average or CW output 'power density' greater than 50 W/cm 2 ;

b.

Average or CW output power greater than 10 W; or

c.

Spatially coherent average or CW total output power, exceeding 1,5 W; or

4.

At least one "laser" 'bar' specified in 6A005.d.1.c.;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 6A005.d.1.d., 'power density' means the total "laser" output power divided by the emitter surface area of the 'stacked array'.

e.

Semiconductor "laser" 'stacked arrays', other than those specified in 6A005.d.1.d., having all of the following:

1.

Specially designed or modified to be combined with other 'stacked arrays' to form a larger 'stacked array'; and

2.

Integrated connections, common for both electronics and cooling;

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

2.

Carbon monoxide (CO) "lasers" having any of the following:

a.

Output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse and "peak power" exceeding 5 kW; or

b.

Average or CW output power exceeding 5 kW;

3.

Carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) "lasers" having any of the following:

a.

CW output power exceeding 15 kW;

b.

Pulsed output with a "pulse duration" exceeding 10 μs and any of the following:

1.

"Average output power" exceeding 10 kW; or

2.

"Peak power" exceeding 100 kW; or

c.

Pulsed output with a "pulse duration" equal to or less than 10 μs and any of the following:

1.

Pulse energy exceeding 5 J per pulse; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 2,5 kW;

4.

Excimer "lasers" having any of the following:

a.

Output wavelength not exceeding 150 nm and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 1 W;

b.

Output wavelength exceeding 150 nm but not exceeding 190 nm and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 120 W;

c.

Output wavelength exceeding 190 nm but not exceeding 360 nm and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 10 J per pulse; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 500 W; or

d.

Output wavelength exceeding 360 nm and any of the following:

1.

Output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse; or

2.

"Average output power" exceeding 30 W;

N.B.

5.

"Chemical lasers" as follows:

a.

Hydrogen Fluoride (HF) "lasers";

b.

Deuterium Fluoride (DF) "lasers";

c.

'Transfer lasers' as follows:

1.

Oxygen Iodine (O 2 -I) "lasers";

2.

Deuterium Fluoride-Carbon dioxide (DF-CO 2 ) "lasers";

Technical Note:

'Transfer lasers' are "lasers" in which the lasing species are excited through the transfer of energy by collision of a non- lasing atom or molecule with a lasing atom or molecule species.

6.

'Non-repetitive pulsed' Nd: glass "lasers" having any of the following:

a.

"Pulse duration" not exceeding 1 μs and output energy exceeding 50 J per pulse; or

b.

"Pulse duration" exceeding 1 μs and output energy exceeding 100 J per pulse;

Note:

e.

Components as follows:

1.

Mirrors cooled either by 'active cooling' or by heat pipe cooling;

Technical Note:

'Active cooling' is a cooling technique for optical components using flowing fluids within the subsurface (nominally less than 1 mm below the optical surface) of the optical component to remove heat from the optic.

2.

Optical mirrors or transmissive or partially transmissive optical or electro-optical components, other than fused tapered fibre combiners and Multi-Layer Dielectric gratings (MLDs), specially designed for use with specified "lasers";

Note:

3.

Fibre "laser" components as follows:

a.

Multimode to multimode fused tapered fibre combiners having all of the following:

1.

An insertion loss better (less) than or equal to 0,3 dB maintained at a rated total average or CW output power (excluding output power transmitted through the single mode core if present) exceeding 1 000 W; and

2.

Number of input fibres equal to or greater than 3;

b.

Single mode to multimode fused tapered fibre combiners having all of the following:

1.

An insertion loss better (less) than 0,5 dB maintained at a rated total average or CW output power exceeding 4 600 W;

2.

Number of input fibres equal to or greater than 3; and

3.

Having any of the following:

a.

A Beam Parameter Product (BPP) measured at the output not exceeding 1,5 mm mrad for a number of input fibres less than or equal to 5; or

b.

A BPP measured at the output not exceeding 2,5 mm mrad for a number of input fibres greater than 5;

c.

MLDs having all of the following:

1.

Designed for spectral or coherent beam combination of 5 or more fibre "lasers"; and

2.

CW "Laser" Induced Damage Threshold (LIDT) greater than or equal to 10 kW/cm 2 .

f.

Optical equipment as follows:

N.B.

1.

Not used;

2.

"Laser" diagnostic equipment specially designed for dynamic measurement of "SHPL" system angular beam steering errors and having an angular "accuracy" of 10 μrad (microradians) or less (better);

3.

Optical equipment and components, specially designed for coherent beam combination in a phased-array "SHPL" system and having any of the following:

a.

An "accuracy" of 0,1 μm or less, for wavelengths greater than 1 μm; or

b.

An "accuracy" of λ/10 or less (better) at the designed wavelength, for wavelengths equal to or less than 1 μm;

4.

Projection telescopes specially designed for use with "SHPL" systems;

g.

'Laser acoustic detection equipment' having all of the following:

1.

CW "laser" output power equal to or exceeding 20 mW;

2.

"Laser" frequency stability equal to or better (less) than 10 MHz;

3.

"Laser" wavelengths equal to or exceeding 1 000 nm but not exceeding 2 000 nm;

4.

Optical system resolution better (less) than 1 nm; and

5.

Optical Signal to Noise ratio equal to or exceeding 10 3 .

Technical Note:

'Laser acoustic detection equipment' is sometimes referred to as a "Laser" Microphone or Particle Flow Detection Microphone.

6A006

N.B.

Note:

a.

"Magnetometers" and subsystems as follows:

1.

"Magnetometers" using "superconductive" (SQUID) "technology" and having any of the following:

a.

SQUID systems designed for stationary operation, without specially designed subsystems designed to reduce in-motion noise, and having a 'sensitivity' equal to or lower (better) than 50 fT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz; or

b.

SQUID systems having an in-motion-magnetometer 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 20 pT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz and specially designed to reduce in-motion noise;

2.

"Magnetometers" using optically pumped or nuclear precession (proton/Overhauser) "technology" having a 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 20 pT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz;

3.

"Magnetometers" using fluxgate "technology" having a 'sensitivity' equal to or lower (better) than 10 pT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz;

4.

Induction coil "magnetometers" having a 'sensitivity' lower (better) than any of the following:

a.

0,05 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies of less than 1 Hz;

b.

1 x 10 -3 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies of 1 Hz or more but not exceeding 10 Hz; or

c.

1 x 10 -4 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies exceeding 10 Hz;

5.

Fibre optic "magnetometers" having a 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 1 nT (rms) per square root Hz;

b.

Underwater electric field sensors having a 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 8 nanovolt per metre per square root Hz when measured at 1 Hz;

c.

"Magnetic gradiometers" as follows:

1.

"Magnetic gradiometers" using multiple "magnetometers" specified in 6A006.a.;

2.

Fibre optic "intrinsic magnetic gradiometers" having a magnetic gradient field 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 0,3 nT/m rms per square root Hz;

3.

"Intrinsic magnetic gradiometers", using "technology" other than fibre-optic "technology", having a magnetic gradient field 'sensitivity' lower (better) than 0,015 nT/m rms per square root Hz;

d.

"Compensation systems" for magnetic or underwater electric field sensors resulting in a performance equal to or better than the specified parameters of 6A006.a., 6A006.b. or 6A006.c.;

e.

Underwater electromagnetic receivers incorporating magnetic field sensors specified in 6A006.a. or underwater electric field sensors specified in 6A006.b.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 6A006, 'sensitivity' (noise level) is the root mean square of the device-limited noise floor which is the lowest signal that can be measured.

6A007

N.B.

a.

Gravity meters designed or modified for ground use and having a static "accuracy" of less (better) than 10 μGal;

Note:

b.

Gravity meters designed for mobile platforms and having all of the following:

1.

A static "accuracy" of less (better) than 0,7 mGal; and

2.

An in-service (operational) "accuracy" of less (better) than 0,7 mGal having a "time-to-steady-state registration" of less than 2 minutes under any combination of attendant corrective compensations and motional influences;

c.

Gravity gradiometers.

6A008

N.B.

Note:

—

Secondary surveillance radar (SSR);

Civil Automotive Radar;

Displays or monitors used for air traffic control (ATC);

Meteorological (weather) radar;

Precision approach radar (PAR) equipment conforming to ICAO standards and employing electronically steerable linear (1-dimensional) arrays or mechanically positioned passive antennae.

a.

Operating at frequencies from 40 GHz to 230 GHz and having any of the following:

1.

An average output power exceeding 100 mW; or

2.

Locating "accuracy" of 1 m or less (better) in range and 0,2 degree or less (better) in azimuth;

b.

A tunable bandwidth exceeding ± 6,25% of the 'centre operating frequency';

Technical Note:

The 'centre operating frequency' equals one half of the sum of the highest plus the lowest specified operating frequencies.

c.

Capable of operating simultaneously on more than two carrier frequencies;

d.

Capable of operating in synthetic aperture (SAR), inverse synthetic aperture (ISAR) radar mode, or sidelooking airborne (SLAR) radar mode;

e.

Incorporating electronically scanned array antennae;

Technical Note:

Electronically scanned array antennae are also known as electronically steerable array antennae.

f.

Capable of heightfinding non-cooperative targets;

g.

Specially designed for airborne (balloon or airframe mounted) operation and having Doppler "signal processing" for the detection of moving targets;

h.

Employing processing of radar signals and using any of the following:

1.

"Radar spread spectrum" techniques; or

2.

"Radar frequency agility" techniques;

i.

Providing ground-based operation with a maximum 'instrumented range' exceeding 185 km;

Note:

a.

Fishing ground surveillance radar;

b.

Ground radar equipment specially designed for enroute air traffic control and having all the following:

1.

A maximum 'instrumented range' of 500 km or less;

2.

Configured so that radar target data can be transmitted only one way from the radar site to one or more civil ATC centres;

3.

Contains no provisions for remote control of the radar scan rate from the enroute ATC centre; and

4.

Permanently installed;

c.

Weather balloon tracking radars.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 6A008.i. 'instrumented range' is the specified unambiguous display range of a radar.

j.

Being "laser" radar or Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) equipment and having any of the following:

1.

"Space-qualified";

2.

Employing coherent heterodyne or homodyne detection techniques and having an angular resolution of less (better) than 20 μrad (microradians); or

3.

Designed for carrying out airborne bathymetric littoral surveys to International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) Order 1a Standard (5 th Edition February 2008) for Hydrographic Surveys or better, and using one or more "lasers" with a wavelength exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 600 nm;

Note 1:

Note 2:

Note 3:

—

Horizontal Accuracy (95% Confidence Level) = 5 m + 5% of depth.

Depth Accuracy for Reduced Depths (95% confidence level) = ±√(a 2 +(b*d) 2 ), where:

a = 0,5 m = constant depth error,

i.e., the sum of all constant depth errors

b = 0,013 = factor of depth dependent error

b*d = depth dependent error,

i.e., the sum of all depth dependent errors

d = depth

Feature Detection = Cubic features > 2 m in depths up to 40 m; 10% of depth beyond 40 m.

k.

Having "signal processing" sub-systems using "pulse compression" and having any of the following:

1.

A "pulse compression" ratio exceeding 150; or

2.

A compressed pulse width of less than 200 ns; or

Note:

a.

"Pulse compression" ratio not exceeding 150;

b.

Compressed pulse width of greater than 30 ns;

c.

Single and rotating mechanically scanned antenna;

d.

Peak output power not exceeding 250 W; and

e.

Not capable of "frequency hopping".

l.

Having data processing sub-systems and having any of the following:

1.

'Automatic target tracking' providing, at any antenna rotation, the predicted target position beyond the time of the next antenna beam passage; or

Note:

Technical Note:

'Automatic target tracking' is a processing technique that automatically determines and provides as output an extrapolated value of the most probable position of the target in real time.

2.

Not used;

3.

Not used;

4.

Configured to provide superposition and correlation, or fusion, of target data within six seconds from two or more 'geographically dispersed' radar sensors to improve the aggregate performance beyond that of any single sensor specified in 6A008.f. or 6A008.i.

Technical Note:

Sensors are considered 'geographically dispersed' when each location is distant from any other more than 1 500 m in any direction. Mobile sensors are always considered 'geographically dispersed'.

N.B.

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

6A102

Technical Note:

In 6A102, a 'detector' is defined as a mechanical, electrical, optical or chemical device that automatically identifies and records, or registers a stimulus such as an environmental change in pressure or temperature, an electrical or electromagnetic signal or radiation from a radioactive material. This includes devices that sense by one time operation or failure.

6A107

a.

Gravity meters, other than those specified in 6A007.b., designed or modified for airborne or marine use, and having a static or operational accuracy equal to or less (better) than 0,7 milligal (mgal), and having a time-to-steady-state registration of two minutes or less;

b.

Specially designed components for gravity meters specified in 6A007.b. or 6A107.a. and gravity gradiometers specified in 6A007.c.

6A108

a.

Radar and laser radar systems designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;

Note:

a.

Terrain contour mapping equipment;

b.

Scene mapping and correlation (both digital and analogue) equipment;

c.

Doppler navigation radar equipment;

d.

Passive interferometer equipment;

e.

Imaging sensor equipment (both active and passive).

b.

Precision tracking systems, usable for 'missiles', as follows:

1.

Tracking systems which use a code translator in conjunction with either surface or airborne references or navigation satellite systems to provide real-time measurements of in-flight position and velocity;

2.

Range instrumentation radars including associated optical/infrared trackers with all of the following capabilities:

a.

Angular resolution better than 1,5 milliradians;

b.

Range of 30 km or greater with a range resolution better than 10 m rms; and

c.

Velocity resolution better than 3 m/s;

Technical Note:

In 6A108.b. 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

c.

Radomes designed to withstand a combined thermal shock greater than 4,184 x 10 6 J/m 2 accompained by a peak over pressure of greater than 50 kPa, and usable in "missiles" for protecting against nuclear effects (e.g. electromagnetic pulse (EMP), X-rays, combined blast and thermal effects).

6A202

a.

Photocathode area of greater than 20 cm 2 ; and

b.

Anode pulse rise time of less than 1 ns.

6A203

N.B.1.

N.B.2.

Note:

1.

They need to be returned to the original manufacturer to make the enhancements or release the constraints;

2.

They require "software" as specified in 6D203 to enhance or release the performance to meet the characteristics of 6A203; or

3.

They require "technology" in the form of keys or codes as specified in 6E203 to enhance or release the performance to meet the characteristics of 6A203.

a.

Streak cameras, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

1.

Streak cameras with writing speeds greater than 0,5 mm/μs;

2.

Electronic streak cameras capable of 50 ns or less time resolution;

3.

Streak tubes for cameras specified in 6A203.a.2.;

4.

Plug-ins specially designed for use with streak cameras which have modular structures and that enable the performance specifications in 6A203.a.1. or 6A203.a.2.;

5.

Synchronizing electronics units, rotor assemblies consisting of turbines, mirrors and bearings specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.a.1.;

b.

Framing cameras, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

1.

Framing cameras with recording rates greater than 225 000 frames per second;

2.

Framing cameras capable of 50 ns or less frame exposure time;

3.

Framing tubes and solid-state imaging devices having a fast image gating (shutter) time of 50 ns or less specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.b.1. or 6A203.b.2.;

4.

Plug-ins specially designed for use with framing cameras which have modular structures and that enable the performance specifications in 6A203.b.1. or 6A203.b.2.;

5.

Synchronizing electronics units, rotor assemblies consisting of turbines, mirrors and bearings specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.b.1. or 6A203.b.2.;

Technical Note:

In 6A203.b., high speed single frame cameras can be used alone to produce a single image of a dynamic event, or several such cameras can be combined in a sequentially-triggered system to produce multiple images of an event.

c.

Solid state or electron tube cameras, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

1.

Solid-state cameras or electron tube cameras with a fast image gating (shutter) time of 50 ns or less;

2.

Solid-state imaging devices and image intensifiers tubes having a fast image gating (shutter) time of 50 ns or less specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.c.1.;

3.

Electro-optical shuttering devices (Kerr or Pockels cells) with a fast image gating (shutter) time of 50 ns or less;

4.

Plug-ins specially designed for use with cameras which have modular structures and that enable the performance specifications in 6A203.c.1.

d.

Radiation-hardened TV cameras, or lenses therefor, specially designed or rated as radiation hardened to withstand a total radiation dose greater than 50 x 10 3 Gy(silicon) (5 x 10 6 rad (silicon)) without operational degradation.

Technical Note:

The term Gy(silicon) refers to the energy in Joules per kilogram absorbed by an unshielded silicon sample when exposed to ionising radiation.

6A205

N.B.

a.

Argon ion "lasers" having both of the following characteristics:

1.

Operating at wavelengths between 400 nm and 515 nm; and

2.

An "average output power" greater than 40 W;

b.

Tunable pulsed single-mode dye laser oscillators having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Operating at wavelengths between 300 nm and 800 nm;

2.

An "average output power" greater than 1 W;

3.

A repetition rate greater than 1 kHz; and

4.

Pulse width less than 100 ns;

c.

Tunable pulsed dye laser amplifiers and oscillators, having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Operating at wavelengths between 300 nm and 800 nm;

2.

An "average output power" greater than 30 W;

3.

A repetition rate greater than 1 kHz; and

4.

Pulse width less than 100 ns;

Note:

d.

Pulsed carbon dioxide (CO 2 ) "lasers" having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Operating at wavelengths between 9 000 nm and 11 000 nm;

2.

A repetition rate greater than 250 Hz;

3.

An "average output power" greater than 500 W; and

4.

Pulse width of less than 200 ns;

e.

Para-hydrogen Raman shifters designed to operate at 16 μm output wavelength and at a repetition rate greater than 250 Hz;

f.

Neodymium-doped (other than glass) "lasers" with an output wavelength between 1 000 and 1 100 nm having either of the following:

1.

Pulse-excited and Q-switched with a pulse duration equal to or more than 1 ns, and having either of the following:

a.

A single–transverse mode output with an "average output power" greater than 40W; or

b.

A multiple-transverse mode output having an average power greater than 50 W; or

2.

Incorporating frequency doubling to give an output wavelength between 500 and 550 nm with an "average output power" of more than 40 W;

g.

Pulsed carbon monoxide (CO) "lasers", other than those specified in 6A005.d.2., having all of the following:

1.

Operating at wavelengths between 5 000 and 6 000 nm;

2.

A repetition rate greater than 250 Hz;

3.

An "average output power" greater than 200 W; and

4.

Pulse width of less than 200 ns.

6A225

Note:

6A226

a.

Shock pressure gauges capable of measuring pressures greater than 10 GPa, including gauges made with manganin, ytterbium, and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) / polyvinyl difluoride (PVF 2 );

b.

Quartz pressure transducers for pressures greater than 10 GPa.

6B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

6B002

6B004

a.

Equipment for measuring absolute reflectance to an "accuracy" of equal to or better than 0,1% of the reflectance value;

b.

Equipment other than optical surface scattering measurement equipment, having an unobscured aperture of more than 10 cm, specially designed for the non-contact optical measurement of a non-planar optical surface figure (profile) to an "accuracy" of 2 nm or less (better) against the required profile.

Note:

6B007

6B008

N.B.

6B108

Technical Note:

In 6B108 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

6C Materials

6C002

a.

Elemental tellurium (Te) of purity levels of 99,9995% or more;

b.

Single crystals (including epitaxial wafers) of any of the following:

1.

Cadmium zinc telluride (CdZnTe), with zinc content of less than 6% by 'mole fraction';

2.

Cadmium telluride (CdTe) of any purity level; or

3.

Mercury cadmium telluride (HgCdTe) of any purity level.

Technical Note:

'Mole fraction' is defined as the ratio of moles of ZnTe to the sum of moles of CdTe and ZnTe present in the crystal.

6C004

a.

Zinc selenide (ZnSe) and zinc sulphide (ZnS) "substrate blanks", produced by the chemical vapour deposition process and having any of the following:

1.

A volume greater than 100 cm 3 ; or

2.

A diameter greater than 80 mm and a thickness of 20 mm or more;

b.

Electro-optic materials and non-linear optical materials, as follows:

1.

Potassium titanyl arsenate (KTA) (CAS 59400-80-5);

2.

Silver gallium selenide (AgGaSe 2 , also known as AGSE) (CAS 12002-67-4);

3.

Thallium arsenic selenide (Tl 3 AsSe 3 , also known as TAS) (CAS 16142-89-5);

4.

Zinc germanium phosphide (ZnGeP 2 , also known as ZGP, zinc germanium biphosphide or zinc germanium diphosphide); or

5.

Gallium selenide (GaSe) (CAS 12024-11-2);

c.

Non-linear optical materials, other than those specified in 6C004.b., having any of the following:

1.

Having all of the following:

a.

Dynamic (also known as non-stationary) third order non-linear susceptibility (χ (3) , chi 3) of 10 -6 m 2 /V 2 or more; and

b.

Response time of less than 1 ms; or

2.

Second order non-linear susceptibility (χ (2) , chi 2) of 3,3×10 -11 m/V or more;

d.

"Substrate blanks" of silicon carbide or beryllium beryllium (Be/Be) deposited materials, exceeding 300 mm in diameter or major axis length;

e.

Glass, including fused silica, phosphate glass, fluorophosphate glass, zirconium fluoride (ZrF 4 ) (CAS 7783-64-4) and hafnium fluoride (HfF 4 ) (CAS 13709-52-9) and having all of the following:

1.

A hydroxyl ion (OH - ) concentration of less than 5 ppm;

2.

Integrated metallic purity levels of less than 1 ppm; and

3.

High homogeneity (index of refraction variance) less than 5 x 10 -6 ;

f.

Synthetically produced diamond material with an absorption of less than 10 -5 cm -1 for wavelengths exceeding 200 nm but not exceeding 14 000 nm.

6C005

a.

Synthetic crystalline "laser" host material in unfinished form as follows:

1.

Titanium doped sapphire;

2.

Not used.

b.

Rare-earth-metal doped double-clad fibres having any of the following:

1.

Nominal "laser" wavelength of 975 nm to 1 150 nm and having all of the following:

a.

Average core diameter equal to or greater than 25 μm; and

b.

Core 'Numerical Aperture' ('NA') less than 0,065; or

Note:

2.

Nominal "laser" wavelength exceeding 1 530 nm and having all of the following:

a.

Average core diameter equal to or greater than 20 μm; and

b.

Core 'Numerical Aperture' ('NA') less than 0,1.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

6D Software

6D001

6D002

6D003

a.

"Software" as follows:

1.

"Software" specially designed for acoustic beam forming for the "real-time processing" of acoustic data for passive reception using towed hydrophone arrays;

2.

"Source code" for the "real-time processing" of acoustic data for passive reception using towed hydrophone arrays;

3.

"Software" specially designed for acoustic beam forming for "real-time processing" of acoustic data for passive reception using bottom or bay cable systems;

4.

"Source code" for "real-time processing" of acoustic data for passive reception using bottom or bay cable systems;

5.

"Software" or "source code", specially designed for all of the following:

a.

"Real-time processing" of acoustic data from sonar systems specified in 6A001.a.1.e.; and

b.

Automatically detecting, classifying and determining the location of divers or swimmers;

N.B.

b.

Not used;

c.

"Software" designed or modified for cameras incorporating "focal plane arrays" specified in 6A002.a.3.f. and designed or modified to remove a frame rate restriction and allow the camera to exceed the frame rate specified in 6A003.b.4. Note 3.a.

d.

"Software" specially designed to maintain the alignment and phasing of segmented mirror systems consisting of mirror segments having a diameter or major axis length equal to or larger than 1 m;

e.

Not used;

f.

"Software" as follows:

1.

"Software" specially designed for magnetic and electric field "compensation systems" for magnetic sensors designed to operate on mobile platforms;

2.

"Software" specially designed for magnetic and electric field anomaly detection on mobile platforms;

3.

"Software" specially designed for "real-time processing" of electromagnetic data using underwater electromagnetic receivers specified in 6A006.e.;

4.

"Source code" for "real time processing" of electromagnetic data using underwater electromagnetic receivers specified in 6A006.e.;

g.

"Software" specially designed to correct motional influences of gravity meters or gravity gradiometers;

h.

"Software" as follows:

1.

Air Traffic Control (ATC) "software" application "programs" designed to be hosted on general purpose computers located at Air Traffic Control centres and capable of accepting radar target data from more than four primary radars;

2.

"Software" for the design or "production" of radomes having all of the following:

a.

Specially designed to protect the electronically scanned array antennae specified in 6A008.e.; and

b.

Resulting in an antenna pattern having an 'average side lobe level' more than 40 dB below the peak of the main beam level.

Technical Note:

'Average side lobe level' in 6D003.h.2.b. is measured over the entire array excluding the angular extent of the main beam and the first two side lobes on either side of the main beam.

6D102

6D103

Technical Note:

In 6D103 'missiles' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

6D203

6E Technology

6E001

6E002

6E003

a.

"Technology" as follows:

1.

"Technology""required" for the coating and treatment of optical surfaces to achieve an 'optical thickness' uniformity of 99,5% or better for optical coatings 500 mm or more in diameter or major axis length and with a total loss (absorption and scatter) of less than 5 x 10 -3 ;

N.B.

Technical Note:

'Optical thickness' is the mathematical product of the index of refraction and the physical thickness of the coating.

2.

"Technology" for the fabrication of optics using single point diamond turning techniques to produce surface finish "accuracies" of better than 10 nm rms on non-planar surfaces exceeding 0,5 m 2 ;

b.

"Technology""required" for the "development", "production" or "use" of specially designed diagnostic instruments or targets in test facilities for "SHPL" testing or testing or evaluation of materials irradiated by "SHPL" beams;

6E101

Note:

6E201

Note 1:

Note 2:

6E203

PART IX – Category 7

CATEGORY 7 - NAVIGATION AND AVIONICS

7A Systems, Equipment and Components

N.B.

For radar, see Category 6.

7A001

N.B.

a.

Linear accelerometers having any of the following:

1.

Specified to function at linear acceleration levels less than or equal to 15 g and having any of the following:

a.

A "bias""stability" of less (better) than 130 micro g with respect to a fixed calibration value over a period of one year; or

b.

A "scale factor""stability" of less (better) than 130 ppm with respect to a fixed calibration value over a period of one year;

2.

Specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 15 g but less than or equal to 100 g and having all of the following:

a.

A "bias""repeatability" of less (better) than 1 250 micro g over a period of one year; and

b.

A "scale factor""repeatability" of less (better) than 1 250 ppm over a period of one year; or

3.

Designed for use in inertial navigation or guidance systems and specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 100 g;

Note:

b.

Angular or rotational accelerometers, specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 100 g.

7A002

N.B.

a.

Specified to function at linear acceleration levels less than or equal to 100 g and having any of the following:

1.

An angular rate range of less than 500 degrees per second and having any of the following:

a.

A "bias""stability" of less (better) than 0,5 degree per hour, when measured in a 1 g environment over a period of one month, and with respect to a fixed calibration value; or

b.

An "angle random walk" of less (better) than or equal to 0,0035 degree per square root hour; or

Note:

2.

An angular rate range greater than or equal to 500 degrees per second and having any of the following:

a.

A "bias""stability" of less (better) than 4 degrees per hour, when measured in a 1 g environment over a period of three minutes, and with respect to a fixed calibration value; or

b.

An "angle random walk" of less (better) than or equal to 0,1 degree per square root hour; or

Note:

b.

Specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 100 g.

7A003

N.B.

Note 1:

—

Attitude and Heading Reference Systems (AHRSs);

Gyrocompasses;

Inertial Measurement Units (IMUs);

Inertial Navigation Systems (INSs);

Inertial Reference Systems (IRSs);

Inertial Reference Units (IRUs).

Note 2:

Technical Note:

'Positional aiding references' independently provide position, and include:

a.

"Satellite navigation system";

b.

"Data-Based Referenced Navigation" ("DBRN").

a.

Designed for "aircraft", land vehicles or vessels, providing position without the use of 'positional aiding references', and having any of the following "accuracies" subsequent to normal alignment:

1.

0,8 nautical miles per hour (nm/hr) "Circular Error Probable" ("CEP") rate or less (better);

2.

0,5 % distanced travelled "CEP" or less (better); or

3.

Total drift of 1 nautical mile "CEP" or less (better) in a 24 hr period;

Technical Note:

The performance parameters in 7A003.a.1., 7A003.a.2. and 7A003.a.3. typically apply to 'inertial measurement equipment or systems' designed for "aircraft", vehicles and vessels, respectively. These parameters result from the utilisation of specialised non-positional aiding references (e.g., altimeter, odometer, velocity log). As a consequence, the specified performance values cannot be readily converted between these parameters. Equipment designed for multiple platforms are evaluated against each applicable entry 7A003.a.1., 7A003.a.2., or 7A003.a.3.

b.

Designed for "aircraft", land vehicles or vessels, with an embedded 'positional aiding reference' and providing position after loss of all 'positional aiding references' for a period of up to 4 minutes, having an "accuracy" of less (better) than 10 meters "CEP";

Technical Note:

7A003.b. refers to systems in which 'inertial measurement equipment or systems' and other independent 'positional aiding references' are built into a single unit (i.e., embedded) in order to achieve improved performance.

c.

Designed for "aircraft", land vehicles or vessels, providing heading or True North determination and having any of the following:

1.

A maximum operating angular rate less (lower) than 500 deg/s and a heading "accuracy" without the use of 'positional aiding references' equal to or less (better) than 0,07 deg sec(Lat) (equivalent to 6 arc minutes rms at 45 degrees latitude); or

2.

A maximum operating angular rate equal to or greater (higher) than 500 deg/s and a heading "accuracy" without the use of 'positional aiding references' equal to or less (better) than 0,2 deg sec(Lat) (equivalent to 17 arc minutes rms at 45 degrees latitude); or

d.

Providing acceleration measurements or angular rate measurements, in more than one dimension, and having any of the following:

1.

Performance specified in 7A001 or 7A002 along any axis, without the use of any aiding references; or

2.

Being "space-qualified" and providing angular rate measurements having an "angle random walk" along any axis of less (better) than or equal to 0,1 degree per square root hour.

Note:

7A004

N.B.

a.

'Star trackers' with a specified azimuth "accuracy" of equal to or less (better) than 20 seconds of arc throughout the specified lifetime of the equipment;

b.

Components specially designed for equipment specified in 7A004.a. as follows:

1.

Optical heads or baffles;

2.

Data processing units.

Technical Note:

'Star trackers' are also referred to as stellar attitude sensors or gyro-astro compasses.

7A005

N.B.

a.

Employing a decryption algorithm specially designed or modified for government use to access the ranging code for position and time; or

b.

Employing 'adaptive antenna systems'.

Note:

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 7A005.b. 'adaptive antenna systems' dynamically generate one or more spatial nulls in an antenna array pattern by signal processing in the time domain or frequency domain.

7A006

N.B.

a.

'Power management'; or

b.

Using phase shift key modulation.

Technical Note:

'Power management' is changing the transmitted power of the altimeter signal so that received power at the "aircraft" altitude is always at the minimum necessary to determine the altitude.

7A008

Note:

N.B.

See 8A002 for other marine systems.

7A101

a.

A "bias""repeatability" of less (better) than 1 250 micro g; and

b.

A "scale factor""repeatability" of less (better) than 1 250 ppm;

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

7A102

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

7A103

a.

'Inertial measurement equipment or systems', using accelerometers or gyros as follows:

1.

Accelerometers specified in 7A001.a.3., 7A001.b. or 7A101 or gyros specified in 7A002 or 7A102; or

Note:

2.

Accelerometers specified in 7A001.a.1. or 7A001.a.2., designed for use in inertial navigation systems or in guidance systems of all types, and usable in 'missiles';

Note:

Technical Note:

'Inertial measurement equipment or systems' specified in 7A103.a. incorporate accelerometers or gyros to measure changes in velocity and orientation in order to determine or maintain heading or position without requiring an external reference once aligned.

Note:

—

Attitude and Heading Reference Systems (AHRSs);

—

Gyrocompasses;

—

Inertial Measurement Units (IMUs);

—

Inertial Navigation Systems (INSs);

—

Inertial Reference Systems (IRSs);

—

Inertial Reference Units (IRUs).

b.

Integrated flight instrument systems which include gyrostabilisers or automatic pilots, designed or modified for use in 'missiles';

c.

'Integrated navigation systems', designed or modified for 'missiles' and capable of providing a navigational accuracy of 200 m 'CEP' or less;

Technical Notes:

1.

a.

An inertial measurement device (e.g., an attitude and heading reference system, inertial reference unit, or inertial navigation system);

b.

One or more external sensors used to update the position and/or velocity, either periodically or continuously throughout the flight (e.g., satellite navigation receiver, radar altimeter, and/or Doppler radar); and

c.

Integration hardware and software;

2.

d.

Three axis magnetic heading sensors, designed or modified to be integrated with flight control and navigation systems, other than those specified in 6A006, having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

Internal tilt compensation in pitch (± 90 degrees) and roll (± 180 degrees) axes; and

2.

Azimuthal accuracy better (less) than 0,5 degrees rms at latitude of ± 80 degrees, reference to local magnetic field.

Note:

Technical Note:

In 7A103 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

7A104

7A105

a.

Designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a.; or

b.

Designed or modified for airborne applications and having any of the following:

1.

Capable of providing navigation information at speeds in excess of 600 m/s;

2.

Employing decryption, designed or modified for military or governmental services, to gain access to a 'navigation satellite system' secured signal/data; or

3.

Being specially designed to employ anti-jam features (e.g., null steering antenna or electronically steerable antenna) to function in an environment of active or passive countermeasures.

Note:

Technical Note:

In 7A105, 'navigation satellite system' includes Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS; e.g., GPS, GLONASS, Galileo or BeiDou) and Regional Navigation Satellite Systems (RNSS; e.g., NavIC, QZSS).

7A106

7A115

Note:

a.

Terrain contour mapping equipment;

b.

Scene mapping and correlation (both digital and analogue) equipment;

c.

Doppler navigation radar equipment;

d.

Passive interferometer equipment;

e.

Imaging sensor equipment (both active and passive).

7A116

a.

Pneumatic, hydraulic, mechanical, electro-optical, or electro-mechanical flight control systems (including fly-by-wire and fly-by-light systems);

b.

Attitude control equipment;

c.

Flight control servo valves designed or modified for the systems specified in 7A116.a. or 7A116.b., and designed or modified to operate in a vibration environment greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz.

Note:

7A117

Technical Note:

In 7A117 'CEP' (Circular Error Probable or Circle of Equal Probability) is a measure of accuracy, defined as the radius of the circle centred at the target, at a specific range, in which 50% of the payloads impact.

7B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

7B001

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

'Maintenance Level I'

2.

'Maintenance Level II'

7B002

N.B.

a.

Scatterometers having a measurement "accuracy" of 10 ppm or less (better);

b.

Profilometers having a measurement "accuracy" of 0,5 nm (5 angstrom) or less (better).

7B003

Note:

—

Gyro tuning test stations;

Gyro dynamic balance stations;

Gyro run-in/motor test stations;

Gyro evacuation and fill stations;

Centrifuge fixtures for gyro bearings;

Accelerometer axis align stations;

Fibre optic gyro coil winding machines.

7B102

7B103

a.

"Production facilities" specially designed for equipment specified in 7A117;

b.

"Production equipment", and other test, calibration and alignment equipment, other than that specified in 7B001 to 7B003, designed or modified to be used with equipment specified in 7A.

7C Materials

None.

7D Software

7D001

7D002

Note:

Technical Note:

'AHRS' generally differ from Inertial Navigation Systems (INS) in that an 'AHRS' provides attitude and heading information and normally does not provide the acceleration, velocity and position information associated with an INS.

7D003

a.

"Software" specially designed or modified to improve the operational performance or reduce the navigational error of systems to the levels specified in 7A003, 7A004 or 7A008;

b.

"Source code" for hybrid integrated systems which improves the operational performance or reduces the navigational error of systems to the level specified in 7A003 or 7A008 by continuously combining heading data with any of the following:

1.

Doppler radar or sonar velocity data;

2.

"Satellite navigation system" reference data; or

3.

Data from "Data-Based Referenced Navigation" ("DBRN") systems;

c.

Not used;

d.

Not used;

e.

Computer-Aided-Design (CAD) "software" specially designed for the "development" of "active flight control systems", helicopter multi-axis fly-by-wire or fly-by-light controllers or helicopter "circulation controlled anti-torque or circulation-controlled direction control systems", whose "technology" is specified in 7E004.b.1., 7E004.b.3. to 7E004.b.5., 7E004.b.7., 7E004.b.8., 7E004.c.1. or 7E004.c.2.

7D004

a.

Digital flight management systems for "total control of flight";

b.

Integrated propulsion and flight control systems;

c.

"Fly-by-wire systems" or "fly-by-light systems";

d.

Fault-tolerant or self-reconfiguring "active flight control systems";

e.

Not used;

f.

Air data systems based on surface static data; or

g.

Three dimensional displays.

Note:

7D005

7D101

7D102

a.

Integration "software" for the equipment specified in 7A103.b.;

b.

Integration "software" specially designed for the equipment specified in 7A003 or 7A103.a.;

c.

Integration "software" designed or modified for the equipment specified in 7A103.c.

Note:

7D103

Note:

7D104

Note:

7E Technology

7E001

Note:

7E002

7E003

Note:

N.B.

7E004

a.

"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of any of the following:

1.

Not used;

2.

Air data systems based on surface static data only, i.e., which dispense with conventional air data probes;

3.

Three dimensional displays for "aircraft";

4.

Not used;

5.

Electric actuators (i.e., electromechanical, electrohydrostatic and integrated actuator package) specially designed for 'primary flight control';

Technical Note:

'Primary flight control' is "aircraft" stability or manoeuvring control using force/moment generators, i.e. aerodynamic control surfaces or propulsive thrust vectoring.

6.

'Flight control optical sensor array' specially designed for implementing "active flight control systems"; or

Technical Note:

A 'flight control optical sensor array' is a network of distributed optical sensors, using "laser" beams, to provide real-time flight control data for on-board processing.

7.

"DBRN" systems designed to navigate underwater, using sonar or gravity databases, that provide a positioning "accuracy" equal to or less (better) than 0,4 nautical miles;

b.

"Development""technology", as follows, for "active flight control systems" (including "fly-by-wire systems" or "fly-by-light systems"):

1.

Photonic-based "technology" for sensing "aircraft" or flight control component state, transferring flight control data, or commanding actuator movement, "required" for "fly-by-light systems""active flight control systems";

2.

Not used;

3.

Real-time algorithms to analyse component sensor information to predict and preemptively mitigate impending degradation and failures of components within an "active flight control system";

Note:

4.

Real-time algorithms to identify component failures and reconfigure force and moment controls to mitigate "active flight control system" degradations and failures;

Note:

5.

Integration of digital flight control, navigation and propulsion control data, into a digital flight management system for "total control of flight";

Note:

a.

"Technology" for integration of digital flight control, navigation and propulsion control data, into a digital flight management system for 'flight path optimisation';

b.

"Technology" for "aircraft" flight instrument systems integrated solely for VOR, DME, ILS or MLS navigation or approaches.

Technical Note:

'Flight path optimisation' is a procedure that minimises deviations from a four-dimensional (space and time) desired trajectory based on maximising performance or effectiveness for mission tasks.

6.

Not used;

7.

"Technology""required" for deriving the functional requirements for "fly-by-wire systems" having all of the following:

a.

'Inner-loop' airframe stability controls requiring loop closure rates of 40 Hz or greater; and

Technical Note:

'Inner-loop' refers to functions of "active flight control systems" that automate airframe stability controls.

b.

Having any of the following:

1.

Corrects an aerodynamically unstable airframe, measured at any point in the design flight envelope, that would lose recoverable control if not corrected within 0,5 seconds;

2.

Couples controls in two or more axes while compensating for 'abnormal changes in aircraft state';

Technical Note:

'Abnormal changes in aircraft state' include in-flight structural damage, loss of engine thrust, disabled control surface, or destabilising shifts in cargo load.

3.

Performs the functions specified in 7E004.b.5.; or

Note:

4.

Enables "aircraft" to have stable controlled flight, other than during take-off or landing, at greater than 18 degrees angle of attack, 15 degrees side slip, 15 degrees/second pitch or yaw rate, or 90 degrees/second roll rate;

8.

"Technology""required" for deriving the functional requirements for "fly-by-wire systems" to achieve all of the following:

a.

No loss of control of the "aircraft" in the event of a consecutive sequence of any two individual faults within the "fly-by-wire system"; and

b.

Probability of loss of control of the "aircraft" being less (better) than 1 x 10 -9 failures per flight hour;

Note:

c.

"Technology" for the "development" of helicopter systems, as follows:

1.

Multi-axis fly-by-wire or fly-by-light controllers, which combine the functions of at least two of the following into one controlling element:

a.

Collective controls;

b.

Cyclic controls;

c.

Yaw controls;

2.

"Circulation-controlled anti-torque or circulation-controlled direction control systems";

3.

Rotor blades incorporating 'variable geometry airfoils', for use in systems using individual blade control.

Technical Note:

'Variable geometry airfoils' use trailing edge flaps or tabs, or leading edge slats or pivoted nose droop, the position of which can be controlled in flight.

7E101

7E102

a.

Design "technology" for shielding systems;

b.

Design "technology" for the configuration of hardened electrical circuits and subsystems;

c.

Design "technology" for the determination of hardening criteria of 7E102.a. and 7E102.b.

7E104

PART X – Category 8

CATEGORY 8 - MARINE

8A Systems, Equipment and Components

8A001

N.B.

—

Category 6 for sensors;

Categories 7 and 8 for navigation equipment;

Category 8A for underwater equipment.

a.

Manned, tethered submersible vehicles designed to operate at depths exceeding 1 000 m;

b.

Manned, untethered submersible vehicles having any of the following:

1.

Designed to 'operate autonomously' and having a lifting capacity of all of the following:

a.

10% or more of their weight in air; and

b.

15 kN or more;

2.

Designed to operate at depths exceeding 1 000 m; or

3.

Having all of the following:

a.

Designed to continuously 'operate autonomously' for 10 hours or more; and

b.

'Range' of 25 nautical miles or more;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

c.

Unmanned submersible vehicles, as follows:

1.

Unmanned submersible vehicles having any of the following:

a.

Designed for deciding a course relative to any geographical reference without real-time human assistance;

b.

Acoustic data or command link; or

c.

Optical data or command link exceeding 1 000 m;

2.

Unmanned submersible vehicles, not specified in 8A001.c.1, having all of the following:

a.

Designed to operate with a tether;

b.

Designed to operate at depths exceeding 1 000 m;

c.

Having any of the following:

1.

Designed for self-propelled manoeuvre using propulsion motors or thrusters specified in 8A002.a.2.; or

2.

Fibre optic data link;

d.

Not used;

e.

Ocean salvage systems with a lifting capacity exceeding 5 MN for salvaging objects from depths exceeding 250 m and having any of the following:

1.

Dynamic positioning systems capable of position keeping within 20 m of a given point provided by the navigation system; or

2.

Seafloor navigation and navigation integration systems, for depths exceeding 1 000 m and with positioning "accuracies" to within 10 m of a predetermined point;

f.

Not used;

g.

Not used;

h.

Not used;

i.

Not used.

8A002

Note:

a.

Systems, equipment and components, specially designed or modified for submersible vehicles and designed to operate at depths exceeding 1 000 m, as follows:

1.

Pressure housings or pressure hulls with a maximum inside chamber diameter exceeding 1,5 m;

2.

Direct current propulsion motors or thrusters;

3.

Umbilical cables, and connectors therefor, using optical fibre and having synthetic strength members;

4.

Components manufactured from material specified in 8C001;

Technical Note:

The objective of 8A002.a.4. should not be defeated by the export of 'syntactic foam' specified in 8C001 when an intermediate stage of manufacture has been performed and it is not yet in the final component form.

b.

Systems specially designed or modified for the automated control of the motion of submersible vehicles specified in 8A001, using navigation data, having closed loop servo-controls and having any of the following:

1.

Enabling a vehicle to move within 10 m of a predetermined point in the water column;

2.

Maintaining the position of the vehicle within 10 m of a predetermined point in the water column; or

3.

Maintaining the position of the vehicle within 10 m while following a cable on or under the seabed;

c.

Fibre optic pressure hull penetrators;

d.

Underwater vision systems having all of the following:

1.

Specially designed or modified for remote operation with an underwater vehicle; and

2.

Employing any of the following techniques to minimise the effects of back scatter:

a.

Range-gated illuminators; or

b.

Range-gated laser systems;

e.

Not used;

f.

Not used;

g.

Light systems specially designed or modified for underwater use, as follows:

1.

Stroboscopic light systems capable of a light output energy of more than 300 J per flash and a flash rate of more than 5 flashes per second;

2.

Argon arc light systems specially designed for use below 1 000 m;

h.

"Robots" specially designed for underwater use, controlled by using a dedicated computer and having any of the following:

1.

Systems that control the "robot" using information from sensors which measure force or torque applied to an external object, distance to an external object, or tactile sense between the "robot" and an external object; or

2.

The ability to exert a force of 250 N or more or a torque of 250 Nm or more and using titanium based alloys or "composite""fibrous or filamentary materials" in their structural members;

i.

Remotely controlled articulated manipulators specially designed or modified for use with submersible vehicles and having any of the following:

1.

Systems which control the manipulator using information from sensors which measure any of the following:

a.

Torque or force applied to an external object; or

b.

Tactile sense between the manipulator and an external object; or

2.

Controlled by proportional master-slave techniques and having 5 degrees of 'freedom of movement' or more;

Technical Note:

Only functions having proportionally related motion control using positional feedback are counted when determining the number of degrees of 'freedom of movement'.

j.

Air independent power systems specially designed for underwater use, as follows:

1.

Brayton or Rankine cycle engine air independent power systems having any of the following:

a.

Chemical scrubber or absorber systems, specially designed to remove carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and particulates from recirculated engine exhaust;

b.

Systems specially designed to use a monoatomic gas;

c.

Devices or enclosures, specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; or

d.

Systems having all of the following:

1.

Specially designed to pressurise the products of reaction or for fuel reformation;

2.

Specially designed to store the products of the reaction; and

3.

Specially designed to discharge the products of the reaction against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;

2.

Diesel cycle engine air independent systems having all of the following:

a.

Chemical scrubber or absorber systems, specially designed to remove carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and particulates from recirculated engine exhaust;

b.

Systems specially designed to use a monoatomic gas;

c.

Devices or enclosures, specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; and

d.

Specially designed exhaust systems that do not exhaust continuously the products of combustion;

3.

"Fuel cell" air independent power systems with an output exceeding 2 kW and having any of the following:

a.

Devices or enclosures, specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; or

b.

Systems having all of the following:

1.

Specially designed to pressurise the products of reaction or for fuel reformation;

2.

Specially designed to store the products of the reaction; and

3.

Specially designed to discharge the products of the reaction against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;

4.

Stirling cycle engine air independent power systems having all of the following:

a.

Devices or enclosures, specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; and

b.

Specially designed exhaust systems which discharge the products of combustion against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;

k.

Not used;

l.

Not used;

m.

Not used;

n.

Not used;

o.

Propellers, power transmission systems, power generation systems and noise reduction systems, as follows:

1.

Not used

2.

Water-screw propeller, power generation systems or transmission systems, designed for use on vessels, as follows:

a.

Controllable-pitch propellers and hub assemblies, rated at more than 30 MW;

b.

Internally liquid-cooled electric propulsion engines with a power output exceeding 2,5 MW;

c.

"Superconductive" propulsion engines or permanent magnet electric propulsion engines, with a power output exceeding 0,1 MW;

d.

Power transmission shaft systems incorporating "composite" material components and capable of transmitting more than 2 MW;

e.

Ventilated or base-ventilated propeller systems, rated at more than 2,5 MW;

3.

Noise reduction systems designed for use on vessels of 1 000 tonnes displacement or more, as follows:

a.

Systems that attenuate underwater noise at frequencies below 500 Hz and consist of compound acoustic mounts for the acoustic isolation of diesel engines, diesel generator sets, gas turbines, gas turbine generator sets, propulsion motors or propulsion reduction gears, specially designed for sound or vibration isolation and having an intermediate mass exceeding 30% of the equipment to be mounted;

b.

'Active noise reduction or cancellation systems' or magnetic bearings, specially designed for power transmission systems;

Technical Note:

'Active noise reduction or cancellation systems' incorporate electronic control systems capable of actively reducing equipment vibration by the generation of anti-noise or anti-vibration signals directly to the source.

p.

Pumpjet propulsion systems having all of the following:

1.

Power output exceeding 2,5 MW; and

2.

Using divergent nozzle and flow conditioning vane techniques to improve propulsive efficiency or reduce propulsion-generated underwater-radiated noise;

q.

Underwater swimming and diving equipment as follows:

1.

Closed circuit rebreathers;

2.

Semi-closed circuit rebreathers;

Note:

N.B.

r.

Diver deterrent acoustic systems specially designed or modified to disrupt divers and having a sound pressure level equal to or exceeding 190 dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) at frequencies of 200 Hz and below.

Note 1:

Note 2:

8B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

8B001

8C Materials

8C001

N.B.

a.

Designed for marine depths exceeding 1 000 m; and

b.

A density less than 561 kg/m 3 .

Technical Note:

'Syntactic foam' consists of hollow spheres of plastic or glass embedded in a resin "matrix".

8D Software

8D001

8D002

8E Technology

8E001

8E002

a.

"Technology" for the "development", "production", repair, overhaul or refurbishing (re-machining) of propellers specially designed for underwater noise reduction;

b.

"Technology" for the overhaul or refurbishing of equipment specified in 8A001, 8A002.b., 8A002.j., 8A002.o. or 8A002.p.

c.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of any of the following:

1.

Surface-effect vehicles (fully skirted variety) having all of the following:

a.

Maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 30 knots in a significant wave height of 1,25 m or more;

b.

Cushion pressure exceeding 3 830 Pa; and

c.

Light-ship-to-full-load displacement ratio of less than 0,70;

2.

Surface-effect vehicles (rigid sidewalls) with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 40 knots in a significant wave height of 3,25 m or more;

3.

Hydrofoil vessels with active systems for automatically controlling foil systems, with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, of 40 knots or more in a significant wave height of 3,25 m or more; or

4.

'Small waterplane area vessels' having any of the following:

a.

Full load displacement exceeding 500 tonnes with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 35 knots in a significant wave height of 3,25 m or more; or

b.

Full load displacement exceeding 1 500 tonnes with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 25 knots in a significant wave height of 4 m or more.

Technical Note:

A 'small waterplane area vessel' is defined by the following formula: waterplane area at an operational design draft less than 2 x (displaced volume at the operational design draft) 2/3 .

PART XI – Category 9

CATEGORY 9 – AEROSPACE AND PROPULSION

9A Systems, Equipment and Components

N.B.

9A001

N.B.

a.

Incorporating any of the "technologies" specified in 9E003.a., 9E003.h. or 9E003.i.; or

Note 1:

a.

Certified by the civil aviation authorities of one or more EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States; and

b.

Intended to power non-military manned "aircraft" for which any of the following has been issued by civil aviation authorities of one or more EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States for the "aircraft" with this specific engine type:

1.

A civil type certificate; or

2.

An equivalent document recognised by the International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO).

Note 2:

b.

Designed to power an "aircraft" to cruise at Mach 1 or higher, for more than thirty minutes.

9A002

a.

Maximum continuous power when operating in "steady state mode" at standard reference conditions specified by ISO 3977-2:1997 (or national equivalent) of 24 245 kW or more; and

b.

'Corrected specific fuel consumption' not exceeding 0,219 kg/kWh at 35% of the maximum continuous power when using liquid fuel.

Note:

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9A002, 'corrected specific fuel consumption' is the specific fuel consumption of the engine corrected to a marine distillate liquid fuel having a net specific energy (i.e. net heating value) of 42MJ/kg (ISO 3977-2:1997).

9A003

a.

Specified in 9A001; or

b.

Whose design or production origins are either non-EU Member States or Wassenaar Arrangement Participating States or unknown to the manufacturer.

9A004

N.B.

a.

Space launch vehicles;

b.

"Spacecraft";

c.

"Spacecraft buses";

d.

"Spacecraft payloads" incorporating items specified in 3A001.b.1.a.4., 3A002.g., 5A001.a.1., 5A001.b.3., 5A002.c., 5A002.e., 6A002.a.1., 6A002.a.2., 6A002.b., 6A002.d., 6A003.b., 6A004.c., 6A004.e., 6A008.d., 6A008.e., 6A008.k., 6A008.l. or 9A010.c.;

e.

On-board systems or equipment, specially designed for "spacecraft" and having any of the following functions:

1.

'Command and telemetry data handling';

Note:

2.

'Payload data handling'; or

Note:

3.

'Attitude and orbit control';

Note:

N.B.

f.

Terrestrial equipment specially designed for "spacecraft", as follows:

1.

Telemetry and telecommand equipment specially designed for any of the following data processing functions:

a.

Telemetry data processing of frame synchronisation and error corrections, for monitoring of operational status (also known as health and safe status) of the "spacecraft bus"; or

b.

Command data processing for formatting command data being sent to the "spacecraft" to control the "spacecraft bus";

2.

Simulators specially designed for 'verification of operational procedures' of "spacecraft";

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9A004.f.2., 'verification of operational procedures' is any of the following:

1.

Command sequence confirmation;

2.

Operational training;

3.

Operational rehearsals; or

4.

Operational analysis.

g.

"Aircraft" specially designed or modified to be air-launch platforms for space launch vehicles;

h.

"Sub-orbital craft".

9A005

N.B.

9A006

N.B.

a.

Cryogenic refrigerators, flightweight dewars, cryogenic heat pipes or cryogenic systems, specially designed for use in space vehicles and capable of restricting cryogenic fluid losses to less than 30% per year;

b.

Cryogenic containers or closed-cycle refrigeration systems, capable of providing temperatures of 100 K (-173°C) or less for "aircraft" capable of sustained flight at speeds exceeding Mach 3, launch vehicles or "spacecraft";

c.

Slush hydrogen storage or transfer systems;

d.

High pressure (exceeding 17,5 MPa) turbo pumps, pump components or their associated gas generator or expander cycle turbine drive systems;

e.

High-pressure (exceeding 10,6 MPa) thrust chambers and nozzles therefor;

f.

Propellant storage systems using the principle of capillary containment or positive expulsion (i.e., with flexible bladders);

g.

Liquid propellant injectors with individual orifices of 0,381 mm or smaller in diameter (an area of 1,14 x 10 -3 cm 2 or smaller for non-circular orifices) and specially designed for liquid rocket engines;

h.

One-piece carbon-carbon thrust chambers or one-piece carbon-carbon exit cones, with densities exceeding 1,4 g/cm 3 and tensile strengths exceeding 48 MPa.

9A007

N.B.

a.

Total impulse capacity exceeding 1,1 MNs;

b.

Specific impulse of 2,4 kNs/kg or more, when the nozzle flow is expanded to ambient sea level conditions for an adjusted chamber pressure of 7 MPa;

c.

Stage mass fractions exceeding 88% and propellant solid loadings exceeding 86%;

d.

Components specified in 9A008; or

e.

Insulation and propellant bonding systems, using direct-bonded motor designs to provide a 'strong mechanical bond' or a barrier to chemical migration between the solid propellant and case insulation material.

Technical Note:

'Strong mechanical bond' means bond strength equal to or more than propellant strength.

9A008

N.B.

a.

Insulation and propellant bonding systems, using liners to provide a 'strong mechanical bond' or a barrier to chemical migration between the solid propellant and case insulation material;

Technical Note:

'Strong mechanical bond' means bond strength equal to or more than propellant strength.

b.

Filament-wound "composite" motor cases exceeding 0,61 m in diameter or having 'structural efficiency ratios (PV/W)' exceeding 25 km;

Technical Note:

'Structural efficiency ratio (PV/W)' is the burst pressure (P) multiplied by the vessel volume (V) divided by the total pressure vessel weight (W).

c.

Nozzles with thrust levels exceeding 45 kN or nozzle throat erosion rates of less than 0,075 mm/s;

d.

Movable nozzle or secondary fluid injection thrust vector control systems, capable of any of the following:

1.

Omni-axial movement exceeding ± 5°;

2.

Angular vector rotations of 20°/s or more; or

3.

Angular vector accelerations of 40°/s 2 or more.

9A009

N.B.

a.

Total impulse capacity exceeding 1,1 MNs; or

b.

Thrust levels exceeding 220 kN in vacuum exit conditions.

9A010

N.B.

a.

Components and structures, each exceeding 10 kg and specially designed for launch vehicles manufactured using any of the following:

1.

"Composite" materials consisting of "fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.e. and resins specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b.;

2.

Metal "matrix""composites" reinforced by any of the following:

a.

Materials specified in 1C007;

b.

"Fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010; or

c.

Aluminides specified in 1C002.a.; or

3.

Ceramic "matrix""composite" materials specified in 1C007;

Note:

b.

Components and structures, specially designed for launch vehicle propulsion systems specified in 9A005 to 9A009 manufactured using any of the following:

1.

"Fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010.e. and resins specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b.;

2.

Metal "matrix""composites" reinforced by any of the following:

a.

Materials specified in 1C007;

b.

"Fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010; or

c.

Aluminides specified in 1C002.a.; or

3.

Ceramic "matrix""composite" materials specified in 1C007;

c.

Structural components and isolation systems, specially designed to control actively the dynamic response or distortion of "spacecraft" structures;

d.

Pulsed liquid rocket engines with thrust-to-weight ratios equal to or more than 1 kN/kg and a 'response time' of less than 30 ms.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9A010.d., 'response time' is the time required to achieve 90% of total rated thrust from start-up.

9A011

N.B.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9A011, 'combined cycle engines' combine two or more of the following types of engines:

—

Gas turbine engine (turbojet, turboprop and turbofan);

Ramjet or scramjet;

Rocket motor or engine (liquid/gel/solid-propellant and hybrid).

9A012

N.B.1.

N.B.2.

a.

"UAVs" or unmanned "airships", designed to have controlled flight out of the direct 'natural vision' of the 'operator' and having any of the following:

1.

Having all of the following:

a.

A maximum 'endurance' greater than or equal to 30 minutes but less than 1 hour; and

b.

Designed to take-off and have stable controlled flight in wind gusts equal to or exceeding 46,3 km/h (25 knots); or

2.

A maximum 'endurance' of 1 hour or greater;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

b.

Related equipment and components, as follows:

1.

Not used;

2.

Not used;

3.

Equipment or components, specially designed to convert a manned "aircraft" or manned "airship", to a "UAV" or unmanned "airship", specified in 9A012.a.;

4.

Air breathing reciprocating or rotary internal combustion type engines, specially designed or modified to propel "UAVs" or unmanned "airships", at altitudes above 15 240 metres (50 000 feet).

9A101

a.

Engines having all of the following characteristics:

1.

'Maximum thrust value' greater than 400 N excluding civil certified engines with a 'maximum thrust value' greater than 8 890 N;

2.

Specific fuel consumption of 0,15 kg N -1 h -1 or less;

3.

'Dry weight' less than 750 kg; and

4.

'First-stage rotor diameter' less than 1 m;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

b.

Engines designed or modified for use in "missiles" or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or 9A112.a.

9A102

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

For the purposes of 9A102, a 'turboprop engine system' incorporates all of the following:

a.

Turboshaft engine; and

b.

Power transmission system to transfer the power to a propeller.

2.

For the purposes of 9A102, the 'maximum power' is achieved un-installed at sea level static conditions using ICAO standard atmosphere.

9A104

N.B.

9A105

N.B.

a.

Liquid propellant rocket engines or gel propellant rocket motors, usable in "missiles", other than those specified in 9A005, integrated, or designed or modified to be integrated, into a liquid propellant or gel propellant propulsion system which has a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 1,1 MNs;

b.

Liquid propellant rocket engines or gel propellant rocket motors, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A005 or 9A105.a., integrated, or designed or modified to be integrated, into a liquid propellant or gel propellant propulsion system which has a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 0,841 MNs.

9A106

a.

Not used;

b.

Not used;

c.

Thrust vector control sub-systems, usable in "missiles";

Technical Note:

Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A106.c. are:

1.

Flexible nozzle;

2.

Fluid or secondary gas injection;

3.

Movable engine or nozzle;

4.

Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or

5.

Thrust tabs.

d.

Liquid, slurry and gel propellant (including oxidisers) control systems, and specially designed components therefor, usable in "missiles", designed or modified to operate in vibration environments greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz;

Note:

a.

Servo valves designed for flow rates equal to or greater than 24 litres per minute, at an absolute pressure equal to or greater than 7 MPa, that have an actuator response time of less than 100 ms;

b.

Pumps, for liquid propellants, with shaft speeds equal to or greater than 8 000 r.p.m. at a maximum operating mode or with discharge pressures equal to or greater than 7 MPa;

c.

Gas turbines, for liquid propellant turbopumps, with shaft speeds equal to or greater than 8 000 r.p.m. at the maximum operating mode.

e.

Combustion chambers and nozzles for liquid propellant rocket engines or gel propellant rocket motors specified in 9A005 or 9A105.

9A107

N.B.

9A108

a.

Rocket motor cases and "insulation" components therefor, usable in subsystems specified in 9A007, 9A009, 9A107 or 9A109.a.;

b.

Rocket nozzles, usable in subsystems specified in 9A007, 9A009, 9A107 or 9A109.a.;

c.

Thrust vector control sub-systems, usable in "missiles".

Technical Note:

Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A108.c. are:

1.

Flexible nozzle;

2.

Fluid or secondary gas injection;

3.

Movable engine or nozzle;

4.

Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or

5.

Thrust tabs.

9A109

a.

Hybrid rocket motors usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A009, having a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 0,841 MNs, and specially designed components therefor;

b.

Specially designed components for hybrid rocket motors specified in 9A009 that are usable in "missiles".

N.B.

9A110

N.B.

Technical Note:

In 9A110 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

9A111

N.B.

Technical Note:

In 9A111 detonation engines utilise detonation to produce a rise in effective pressure across the combustion chamber. Examples of detonation engines include pulse detonation engines, rotating detonation engines or continuous wave detonation engines.

9A112

a.

"Unmanned aerial vehicles" ("UAVs") capable of a range of 300 km;

b.

"Unmanned aerial vehicles" ("UAVs") having all of the following:

1.

Having any of the following:

a.

An autonomous flight control and navigation capability; or

b.

Capability of controlled flight out of the direct vision range involving a human operator; and

2.

Having any of the following:

a.

Incorporating an aerosol dispensing system/mechanism with a capacity greater than 20 litres; or

b.

Designed or modified to incorporate an aerosol dispensing system/mechanism with a capacity greater than 20 litres.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

9A115

a.

Apparatus and devices for handling, control, activation or launching, designed or modified for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or 'missiles';

Technical Note:

In 9A115.a. 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

b.

Vehicles for transport, handling, control, activation or launching, designed or modified for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or "missiles".

9A116

a.

Reentry vehicles;

b.

Heat shields and components therefor, fabricated of ceramic or ablative materials;

c.

Heat sinks and components therefor, fabricated of light-weight, high heat capacity materials;

d.

Electronic equipment specially designed for reentry vehicles.

9A117

N.B. SEE ALSO 9A121.

9A118

9A119

9A120

Note:

9A121

Technical Note:

Interstage connectors referred to in 9A121 also include electrical connectors installed between the "missile", space launch vehicle or sounding rocket and their payload.

9A350

a.

Complete spraying or fogging systems capable of delivering, from a liquid suspension, an initial droplet 'VMD' of less than 50 μm at a flow rate of greater than two litres per minute;

b.

Spray booms or arrays of aerosol generating units capable of delivering, from a liquid suspension, an initial droplet 'VMD' of less than 50 μm at a flow rate of greater than two litres per minute;

c.

Aerosol generating units specially designed for fitting to systems specified in 9A350.a. and .b.

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

a.

Doppler laser method;

b.

Forward laser diffraction method.

2.

9B Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

9B001

N.B.

a.

Directional solidification or single crystal casting equipment designed for "superalloys";

b.

Casting tooling, specially designed for manufacturing gas turbine engine blades, vanes or "tip shrouds", manufactured from refractory metals or ceramics, as follows:

1.

Cores;

2.

Shells (moulds);

3.

Combined core and shell (mould) units;

c.

Directional-solidification or single-crystal additive-manufacturing equipment, specially designed for manufacturing gas turbine engine blades, vanes or "tip shrouds".

9B002

a.

Specially designed for the "development" of gas turbine engines, assemblies or components; and

b.

Incorporating any of the "technologies" specified in 9E003.h. or 9E003.i.

9B003

9B004

9B005

N.B.

a.

Wind tunnels designed for speeds of Mach 1,2 or more;

Note:

Technical Note:

'Test section size' means the diameter of the circle, or the side of the square, or the longest side of the rectangle, at the largest test section location.

b.

Devices for simulating flow-environments at speeds exceeding Mach 5, including hot-shot tunnels, plasma arc tunnels, shock tubes, shock tunnels, gas tunnels and light gas guns; or

c.

Wind tunnels or devices, other than two-dimensional sections, capable of simulating Reynolds number flows exceeding 25 x 10 6 .

9B006

N.B.

9B007

9B008

9B009

a.

Designed to operate at stress levels of 60% of Ultimate Tensile Strength (UTS) or more measured at a temperature of 873 K (600°C); and

b.

Designed to operate at 873 K (600°C) or more.

Note:

9B010

9B105

N.B.

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

9B106

a.

Environmental chambers having all of the following:

1.

Capable of simulating any of the following flight conditions:

a.

Altitude equal to or greater than 15 km; or

b.

Temperature range from below 223 K (-50 o C) to above 398 K (125 o C); and

2.

Incorporating, or 'designed or modified' to incorporate, a shaker unit or other vibration test equipment to produce vibration environments equal to or greater than 10 g rms, measured 'bare table', between 20 Hz and 2 kHz while imparting forces equal to or greater than 5 kN;

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

b.

Environmental chambers capable of simulating the following flight conditions:

1.

Acoustic environments at an overall sound pressure level of 140 dB or greater (referenced to 20 μPa) or with a total rated acoustic power output of 4 kW or greater; and

2.

Altitude equal to or greater than 15 km; or

3.

Temperature range from below 223 K (-50 o C) to above 398 K (125 o C).

9B107

a.

An electrical power supply equal to or greater than 5 MW; or

b.

A gas supply total pressure equal to or greater than 3 MPa.

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

9B115

9B116

Technical Note:

In 9B116 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

9B117

a.

The capacity to handle more than 68 kN of thrust; or

b.

Capable of simultaneously measuring the three axial thrust components.

9C Materials

9C108

9C110

N.B.

Note:

9D Software

9D001

9D002

9D003

9D004

a.

2D or 3D viscous "software", validated with wind tunnel or flight test data required for detailed engine flow modelling;

b.

"Software" for testing aero gas turbine engines, assemblies or components, having all of the following:

1.

Specially designed for testing any of the following:

a.

Aero gas turbine engines, assemblies or components, incorporating "technology" specified in 9E003.a., 9E003.h. or 9E003.i.; or

b.

Multi-stage compressors providing either bypass or core flow, specially designed for aero gas turbine engines incorporating "technology" specified in 9E003.a. or 9E003.h.; and

2.

Specially designed for all of the following:

a.

Acquisition and processing of data, in real time; and

b.

Feedback control of the test article or test conditions (e.g. temperature, pressure, flow rate) while the test is in progress;

Note:

c.

"Software" specially designed to control directional solidification or single crystal material growth in equipment specified in 9B001.a. or 9B001.c.;

d.

Not used;

e.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the operation of items specified in 9A012;

f.

"Software" specially designed to design the internal cooling passages of aero gas turbine blades, vans and "tip shrouds";

g.

"Software" having all of the following:

1.

Specially designed to predict aero thermal, aeromechanical and combustion conditions in aero gas turbine engines; and

2.

Theoretical modelling predictions of the aero thermal, aeromechanical and combustion conditions, which have been validated with actual aero gas turbine engine (experimental or production) performance data.

9D005

N.B.

9D101

9D103

Note:

9D104

a.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the "use" of goods specified in 9A001, 9A005, 9A006.d., 9A006.g., 9A007.a., 9A009.a., 9A010.d., 9A011, 9A101, 9A102, 9A105, 9A106.d., 9A107, 9A109, 9A111, 9A115.a., 9A117 or 9A118.

b.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the operation or maintenance of subsystems or equipment specified in 9A008.d., 9A106.c., 9A108.c. or 9A116.d.

9D105

Note:

a.

"Software" specially designed or modified to integrate the conversion equipment with the "aircraft" system functions; and

b.

"Software" specially designed or modified to operate the "aircraft" as an "unmanned aerial vehicle".

Technical Note:

In 9D105 'missile' means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

9E Technology

Note:

9E001

9E002

N.B.

9E003

a.

"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of any of the following gas turbine engine components or systems:

1.

Gas turbine blades, vanes or "tip shrouds", made from directionally solidified (DS) or single crystal (SC) alloys and having (in the 001 Miller Index Direction) a stress-rupture life exceeding 400 hours at 1 273 K (1 000°C) at a stress of 200 MPa, based on the average property values;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9E003.a.1., stress-rupture life testing is typically conducted on a test specimen.

2.

Combustors having any of the following:

a.

'Thermally decoupled liners' designed to operate at 'combustor exit temperature' exceeding 1 883K (1 610°C);

b.

Non-metallic liners;

c.

Non-metallic shells; or

d.

Liners designed to operate at 'combustor exit temperature' exceeding 1 883 K (1 610°C) and having holes that meet the parameters specified in 9E003.c.;

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

N.B.

3.

Components that are any of the following:

a.

Manufactured from organic "composite" materials designed to operate above 588 K (315°C);

b.

Manufactured from any of the following:

1.

Metal "matrix""composites" reinforced by any of the following:

a.

Materials specified in 1C007;

b.

"Fibrous or filamentary materials" specified in 1C010; or

c.

Aluminides specified in 1C002.a.; or

2.

Ceramic "matrix""composites" specified in 1C007.; or

c.

Stators, vanes, blades, tip seals (shrouds), rotating blings, rotating blisks, or 'splitter ducts', that are all of the following:

1.

Not specified in 9E003.a.3.a.;

2.

Designed for compressors or fans; and

3.

Manufactured from material specified in 1C010.e. with resins specified in 1C008;

Technical Note:

A 'splitter duct' performs the initial separation of the air-mass flow between the bypass and core sections of the engine.

4.

Uncooled turbine blades, vanes or "tip-shrouds", designed to operate at a 'gas path temperature' of 1 373 K (1 100°C) or more;

5.

Cooled turbine blades, vanes, "tip-shrouds" other than those described in 9E003.a.1., designed to operate at a 'gas path temperature' of 1 693 K (1 420°C) or more;

Technical Note:

'Gas path temperature' is the bulk average gas path total (stagnation) temperature at the leading edge plane of the turbine component when the engine is running in a "steady state mode" of operation at the certificated or specified maximum continuous operating temperature.

6.

Airfoil-to-disk blade combinations using solid state joining;

7.

Not used;

8.

'Damage tolerant' gas turbine engine rotor components using powder metallurgy materials specified in 1C002.b.; or

Technical Note:

'Damage tolerant' components are designed using methodology and substantiation to predict and limit crack growth.

9.

Not used;

10.

Not used;

11.

'Fan blades' having all of the following:

a.

20% or more of the total volume being one or more closed cavities containing vacuum or gas only; and

b.

One or more closed cavities having a volume of 5 cm 3 or larger;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9E003.a.11., a 'fan blade' is the aerofoil portion of the rotating stage or stages, which provide both compressor and bypass flow in a gas turbine engine.

b.

"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of any of the following:

1.

Wind tunnel aero-models equipped with non-intrusive sensors capable of transmitting data from the sensors to the data acquisition system; or

2.

"Composite" propeller blades or propfans, capable of absorbing more than 2 000 kW at flight speeds exceeding Mach 0,55;

c.

"Technology""required" for manufacturing cooling holes, in gas turbine engine components incorporating any of the "technologies" specified in 9E003.a.1., 9E003.a.2. or 9E003.a.5., and having any of the following:

1.

Having all of the following:

a.

Minimum 'cross-sectional area' less than 0,45 mm 2 ;

b.

'Hole shape ratio' greater than 4,52; and

c.

'Incidence angle' equal to or less than 25°; or

2.

Having all of the following:

a.

Minimum 'cross-sectional area' less than 0,12 mm 2 ;

b.

'Hole shape ratio' greater than 5,65; and

c.

'Incidence angle' more than 25°;

Note:

Technical Notes:

1.

2.

3.

4.

d.

"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of helicopter power transfer systems or tilt rotor or tilt wing "aircraft" power transfer systems;

e.

"Technology" for the "development" or "production" of reciprocating diesel engine ground vehicle propulsion systems having all of the following:

1.

'Box volume' of 1,2 m 3 or less;

2.

An overall power output of more than 750 kW based on 80/1269/EEC, ISO 2534 or national equivalents; and

3.

Power density of more than 700 kW/m 3 of 'box volume';

Technical Note:

'Box volume' in 9E003.e. is the product of three perpendicular dimensions measured in the following way:

Length:

The length of the crankshaft from front flange to flywheel face;

Width:

The widest of any of the following:

a.

The outside dimension from valve cover to valve cover;

b.

The dimensions of the outside edges of the cylinder heads; or

c.

The diameter of the flywheel housing;

Height:

The largest of any of the following:

a.

The dimension of the crankshaft centre-line to the top plane of the valve cover (or cylinder head) plus twice the stroke; or

b.

The diameter of the flywheel housing.

f.

"Technology""required" for the "production" of specially designed components for high output diesel engines, as follows:

1.

"Technology""required" for the "production" of engine systems having all of the following components employing ceramics materials specified in 1C007:

a.

Cylinder liners;

b.

Pistons;

c.

Cylinder heads; and

d.

One or more other components (including exhaust ports, turbochargers, valve guides, valve assemblies or insulated fuel injectors);

2.

"Technology""required" for the "production" of turbocharger systems with single-stage compressors and having all of the following:

a.

Operating at pressure ratios of 4:1 or higher;

b.

Mass flow in the range from 30 to 130 kg per minute; and

c.

Variable flow area capability within the compressor or turbine sections;

3.

"Technology""required" for the "production" of fuel injection systems with a specially designed multifuel (e.g., diesel or jet fuel) capability covering a viscosity range from diesel fuel (2,5 cSt at 310,8 K (37,8°C)) down to gasoline fuel (0,5 cSt at 310,8 K (37,8°C)) and having all of the following:

a.

Injection amount in excess of 230 mm 3 per injection per cylinder; and

b.

Electronic control features specially designed for switching governor characteristics automatically depending on fuel property to provide the same torque characteristics by using the appropriate sensors;

g.

"Technology""required" for the "development" or "production" of 'high output diesel engines' for solid, gas phase or liquid film (or combinations thereof) cylinder wall lubrication and permitting operation to temperatures exceeding 723 K (450°C), measured on the cylinder wall at the top limit of travel of the top ring of the piston;

Technical Note:

'High output diesel engines' are diesel engines with a specified brake mean effective pressure of 1,8 MPa or more at a speed of 2 300 r.p.m., provided the rated speed is 2 300 r.p.m. or more.

h.

"Technology" for gas turbine engine "FADEC systems" as follows:

1.

"Development""technology" for deriving the functional requirements for the components necessary for the "FADEC system" to regulate engine thrust or shaft power (e.g., feedback sensor time constants and accuracies, fuel valve slew rate);

2.

"Development" or "production""technology" for control and diagnostic components unique to the "FADEC system" and used to regulate engine thrust or shaft power;

3.

"Development""technology" for the control law algorithms, including "source code", unique to the "FADEC system" and used to regulate engine thrust or shaft power;

Note:

i.

"Technology" for adjustable flow path systems designed to maintain engine stability for gas generator turbines, fan or power turbines, or propelling nozzles, as follows:

1.

"Development""technology" for deriving the functional requirements for the components that maintain engine stability;

2.

"Development" or "production""technology" for components unique to the adjustable flow path system and that maintain engine stability;

3.

"Development""technology" for the control law algorithms, including "source code", unique to the adjustable flow path system and that maintain engine stability.

Note:

a.

Inlet guide vanes;

b.

Variable pitch fans or prop-fans;

c.

Variable compressor vanes;

d.

Compressor bleed valves; or

e.

Adjustable flow path geometry for reverse thrust.

j.

"Technology""required" for the "development" of wing-folding systems designed for fixed-wing "aircraft" powered by gas turbine engines.

N.B.

9E101

a.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of goods specified in 9A101, 9A102, 9A104 to 9A111, 9A112.a. or 9A115 to 9A121.

b.

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of 'UAV's specified in 9A012 or goods specified in 9A101, 9A102, 9A104 to 9A111, 9A112.a. or 9A115 to 9A121.

Technical Note:

In 9E101.b. 'UAV' means unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

9E102

Technical Note:

In 9E102 'UAV' means unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

( 1 ) https://www.australiagroup.net/

( 2 ) http://mtcr.info/

( 3 ) http://www.nuclearsuppliersgroup.org/

( 4 ) http://www.wassenaar.org/

( 5 ) https://www.opcw.org/chemical-weapons-convention

( 6 ) Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230-2:1997 or 2006 should consult the competent authorities of the EU Member State in which they are established.

( 7 ) The numbers in parenthesis refer to the Notes following this Table.

ANNEX II

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATIONS

The following sections set out the Union general export authorisations for certain exports.

A. EXPORTS TO AUSTRALIA, CANADA, ICELAND, JAPAN, NEW ZEALAND, NORWAY, SWITZERLAND, INCLUDING LIECHTENSTEIN, THE UNITED KINGDOM AND THE UNITED STATES

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU001

(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)

Exports to Australia, Canada, Iceland, Japan, New Zealand, Norway, Switzerland, including Liechtenstein, the United Kingdom and the United States

Issuing authority: European Union

Part 1 – Items

This authorisation covers all dual-use items specified in any entry in Annex I, except those listed in Section I of this Annex.

Part 2 – Destinations

This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:

—

Australia,

—

Canada,

—

Iceland,

—

Japan,

—

New Zealand,

—

Norway,

—

Switzerland, including Liechtenstein,

—

United Kingdom (without prejudice to the application of this Regulation to and in the United Kingdom in respect of Northern Ireland, in accordance with point 47 of Annex 2 to the Protocol on Ireland/Northern Ireland (the “Protocol”) annexed to the Agreement on the withdrawal of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland from the European Union and the European Atomic Energy Community ( 1 ) , listing the provisions of Union law referred to in Article 5(4) of the Protocol),

—

United States.

Part 3 – Conditions and requirements for use

1.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:

(i)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(ii)

for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation in a country subject to an arms embargo; or

(iii)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;

(b)

the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a); or

(c)

the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.

2.

3.

Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation shall be defined by Member States.

A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.

Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.

B. EXPORTS OF CERTAIN DUAL-USE ITEMS TO CERTAIN DESTINATIONS

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU002

(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)

Exports of certain dual-use items to certain destinations

Issuing authority: European Union

Part 1 — Items

This authorisation covers the following dual-use items specified in Annex I:

—

1A001,

—

1A003,

—

1A004,

—

1C003.b.,

—

1C003.c.,

—

1C004,

—

1C005,

—

1C006,

—

1C008,

—

1C009,

—

2B008,

—

3A001.a.3.,

—

3A001.a.6.,

—

3A001.a.7.,

—

3A001.a.9.,

—

3A001.a.10.,

—

3A001.a.11.,

—

3A001.a.12.,

—

3A002.c.,

—

3A002.d.,

—

3A002.e.,

—

3A002.f.,

—

3C001,

—

3C002,

—

3C003,

—

3C004,

—

3C005,

—

3C006.

Part 2 — Destinations

This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:

—

Argentina,

—

South Africa,

—

South Korea,

—

Turkey.

Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use

1.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:

(i)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(ii)

for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation in a country subject to an arms embargo; or

(iii)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in national military lists that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;

(b)

the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a); or

(c)

the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.

2.

3.

Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation are defined by Member States.

A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.

Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.

C. EXPORT AFTER REPAIR/REPLACEMENT

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU003

(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)

Export after repair/replacement

Issuing authority: European Union

Part 1 — Items

1.

(a)

the items were reimported into the customs territory of the Union for the purpose of maintenance, repair or replacement, and are exported or re-exported to the country of consignment without any changes to their original characteristics within a period of 5 years after the date when the original export authorisation has been granted; or

(b)

the items are exported to the country of consignment in exchange for items of the same quality and number which were reimported into the customs territory of the Union for maintenance, repair or replacement within a period of 5 years after the date when the original export authorisation has been granted.

2.

(a)

all items listed in Section I of this Annex;

(b)

all items listed in Sections D and E of each Category of Annex I;

(c)

the following items specified in Annex I:

—

1A002.a.,

—

1C012.a.,

—

1C227,

—

1C228,

—

1C229,

—

1C230,

—

1C231,

—

1C236,

—

1C237,

—

1C240,

—

1C350,

—

1C450,

—

5A001.b.5.,

—

5A002.c.,

—

5A002.d.,

—

5A002.e.,

—

5A003.a.,

—

5A003.b.,

—

6A001.a.2.a.1.,

—

6A001.a.2.a.5.,

—

6A002.a.1.c.,

—

8A001.b.,

—

8A001.c.1.,

—

9A011.

Part 2 — Destinations

This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:

—

Albania,

—

Argentina,

—

Bosnia and Herzegovina,

—

Brazil,

—

Chile,

—

China (including Hong Kong and Macao),

—

French overseas territories,

—

India,

—

Kazakhstan,

—

Mexico,

—

Montenegro,

—

Morocco,

—

North Macedonia,

—

Russia,

—

Serbia,

—

Singapore,

—

South Africa,

—

South Korea,

—

Tunisia,

—

Turkey,

—

Ukraine,

—

United Arab Emirates.

Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use

1.

2.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:

(i)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(ii)

for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation where the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo; or

(iii)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;

(b)

the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);

(c)

the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation;

(d)

the initial authorisation has been annulled, suspended, modified or revoked; or

(e)

the exporter is aware that the end-use of the items in question is different from that specified in the original export authorisation.

3.

(a)

mention the reference number of the initial export authorisation in the export declaration to customs together with the name of the Member State that granted the authorisation, and declare that the items are being exported under Union general export authorisation No EU003 in the customs declaration;

(b)

provide customs officers, if so requested, with documentary evidence of the date of importation of the items into the Union, of any maintenance, repair or replacement of the items carried out in the Union and of the fact that the items are being returned to the end-user and the country from which they were imported into the Union.

4.

Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation shall be defined by Member States.

A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.

Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.

5.

D. TEMPORARY EXPORT FOR EXHIBITION OR FAIR

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU004

(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)

Temporary export for exhibition or fair

Issuing authority: European Union

Part 1 — Items

This authorisation covers all dual-use items specified in any entry in Annex I, except:

(a)

all items listed in Section I of this Annex;

(b)

all items listed in Section D of each Category of Annex I (this does not include software necessary to the proper functioning of the equipment for the purpose of the demonstration);

(c)

all items listed in Section E of each category of Annex I;

(d)

the following items specified in Annex I:

—

1A002.a.,

—

1C002.b.4.,

—

1C010,

—

1C012.a.,

—

1C227,

—

1C228,

—

1C229,

—

1C230,

—

1C231,

—

1C236,

—

1C237,

—

1C240,

—

1C350,

—

1C450,

—

5A001.b.5.,

—

5A002.c.,

—

5A002.d.,

—

5A002.e.,

—

5A003.a.,

—

5A003.b.,

—

6A001,

—

6A002.a.,

—

8A001.b.,

—

8A001.c.1.,

—

9A011.

Part 2 — Destinations

This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:

—

Albania,

—

Argentina,

—

Bosnia and Herzegovina,

—

Brazil,

—

Chile,

—

China (including Hong Kong and Macao),

—

French overseas territories,

—

India,

—

Kazakhstan,

—

Mexico,

—

Montenegro,

—

Morocco,

—

North Macedonia,

—

Russia,

—

Serbia,

—

Singapore,

—

South Africa,

—

South Korea,

—

Tunisia,

—

Turkey,

—

Ukraine,

—

United Arab Emirates.

Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use

1.

2.

3.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:

(i)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(ii)

for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation where the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo; or

(iii)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;

(b)

the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);

(c)

the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation;

(d)

the exporter has been informed by a competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established, or is otherwise aware (e.g. from information received from the manufacturer), that the items in question have been classified by the competent authority as having a protective national security classification marking, equivalent to or above “CONFIDENTIEL UE/EU CONFIDENTIAL”;

(e)

their return, in their original state, without the removal, copying or dissemination of any component or software, cannot be guaranteed by the exporter, or where a transfer of technology is connected with a presentation;

(f)

the relevant items are to be exported for a private presentation or demonstration (e.g. in in-house showrooms);

(g)

the relevant items are to be merged into any production process;

(h)

the relevant items are to be used for their intended purpose, except to the minimum extent required for effective demonstration, but without making specific test outputs available to third parties;

(i)

the export is to take place as a result of a commercial transaction, in particular as regards the sale, rental or lease of the relevant items;

(j)

the relevant items are to be stored at an exhibition or fair only for the purpose of sale, rent or lease, without being presented or demonstrated; or

(k)

the exporter makes any arrangement which would prevent him from keeping the relevant items under his control during the whole period of the temporary export.

4.

5.

Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation are defined by Member States.

A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.

Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.

6.

E. TELECOMMUNICATIONS

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU005

(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)

Telecommunications

Issuing authority: European Union

Part 1 — Items

This authorisation covers the following dual-use items specified in Annex I:

(a)

the following items of Category 5, Part l:

(i)

items, including specially designed or developed components and accessories therefor specified in 5A001.b.2., 5A001.c. and 5A001.d.;

(ii)

items specified in 5B001 and 5D001, where test, inspection and production equipment is concerned and software for items mentioned under point (i);

(b)

technology controlled by 5E001.a., where required for the installation, operation, maintenance or repair of items specified under point (a) and intended for the same end-user.

Part 2 — Destinations

This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:

—

Argentina,

—

China (including Hong Kong and Macao),

—

India,

—

South Africa,

—

South Korea,

—

Russia,

—

Turkey,

—

Ukraine.

Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use

1.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:

(i)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(ii)

for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation where the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo;

(iii)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State; or

(iv)

for use in connection with a violation of human rights, democratic principles or the freedom of expression as defined by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union, by using interception technologies and digital data transfer devices for monitoring mobile phones and text messages and targeted surveillance of Internet use (e.g. via Monitoring Centres and Lawful Interception Gateways);

(b)

the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);

(c)

the exporter is aware that the items in question will be re-exported to any destination other than those listed in Part 2 of this Section or in Part 2 of Section A of this Annex and the Member States;

(d)

the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.

2.

3.

Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation are defined by Member States.

A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.

Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.

F. CHEMICALS

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU006

(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)

Chemicals

Issuing authority: European Union

Part 1 — Items

This authorisation covers the following dual-use items specified in Annex I:

1C350:

1.

Thiodiglycol (CAS 111-48-8);

2.

Phosphorus oxychloride (CAS 10025-87-3);

3.

Dimethyl methylphosphonate (CAS 756-79-6);

5.

Methylphosphonyl dichloride (CAS 676-97-1);

6.

Dimethyl phosphite (DMP) (CAS 868-85-9);

7.

Phosphorus trichloride (CAS 7719-12-2);

8.

Trimethyl phosphite (TMP) (CAS 121-45-9);

9.

Thionyl chloride (CAS 7719-09-7);

10.

3-Hydroxy-1-methylpiperidine (CAS 3554-74-3);

11.

N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride (CAS 96-79-7);

12.

N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (CAS 5842-07-9);

13.

3-Quinuclidinol (CAS 1619-34-7);

14.

Potassium fluoride (CAS 7789-23-3);

15.

2-Chloroethanol (CAS 107-07-3);

16.

Dimethylamine (CAS 124-40-3);

17.

Diethyl ethylphosphonate (CAS 78-38-6);

18.

Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate (CAS 2404-03-7);

19.

Diethyl phosphite (CAS 762-04-9);

20.

Dimethylamine hydrochloride (CAS 506-59-2);

21.

Ethyl phosphinyl dichloride (CAS 1498-40-4);

22.

Ethyl phosphonyl dichloride (CAS 1066-50-8);

24.

Hydrogen fluoride (CAS 7664-39-3);

25.

Methyl benzilate (CAS 76-89-1);

26.

Methyl phosphinyl dichloride (CAS 676-83-5);

27.

N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-amino ethanol (CAS 96-80-0);

28.

Pinacolyl alcohol (CAS 464-07-3);

30.

Triethyl phosphite (CAS 122-52-1);

31.

Arsenic trichloride (CAS 7784-34-1);

32.

Benzilic acid (CAS 76-93-7);

33.

Diethyl methylphosphonite (CAS 15715-41-0);

34.

Dimethyl ethylphosphonate (CAS 6163-75-3);

35.

Ethyl phosphinyl difluoride (CAS 430-78-4);

36.

Methyl phosphinyl difluoride (CAS 753-59-3);

37.

3-Quinuclidone (CAS 3731-38-2);

38.

Phosphorus pentachloride (CAS 10026-13-8);

39.

Pinacolone (CAS 75-97-8);

40.

Potassium cyanide (CAS 151-50-8);

41.

Potassium bifluoride (CAS 7789-29-9);

42.

Ammonium hydrogen fluoride or ammonium bifluoride (CAS 1341-49-7);

43.

Sodium fluoride (CAS 7681-49-4);

44.

Sodium bifluoride (CAS 1333-83-1);

45.

Sodium cyanide (CAS 143-33-9);

46.

Triethanolamine (CAS 102-71-6);

47.

Phosphorus pentasulphide (CAS 1314-80-3);

48.

Di-isopropylamine (CAS 108-18-9);

49.

Diethylaminoethanol (CAS 100-37-8);

50.

Sodium sulphide (CAS 1313-82-2);

51.

Sulphur monochloride (CAS 10025-67-9);

52.

Sulphur dichloride (CAS 10545-99-0);

53.

Triethanolamine hydrochloride (CAS 637-39-8);

54.

N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (CAS 4261-68-1);

55.

Methylphosphonic acid (CAS 993-13-5);

56.

Diethyl methylphosphonate (CAS 683-08-9);

57.

N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride (CAS 677-43-0);

58.

Triisopropyl phosphite (CAS 116-17-6);

59.

Ethyldiethanolamine (CAS 139-87-7);

60.

O,O-Diethyl phosphorothioate (CAS 2465-65-8);

61.

O,O-Diethyl phosphorodithioate (CAS 298-06-6);

62.

Sodium hexafluorosilicate (CAS 16893-85-9);

63.

Methylphosphonothioic dichloride (CAS 676-98-2);

64.

Diethylamine (CAS 109-89-7);

65.

N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiol hydrochloride (CAS 41480-75-5).

1C450.a.:

4.

Phosgene: Carbonyl dichloride (CAS 75-44-5);

5.

Cyanogen chloride (CAS 506-77-4);

6.

Hydrogen cyanide (CAS 74-90-8);

7.

Chloropicrin: Trichloronitromethane (CAS 76-06-2);

1C450.b.:

1.

Chemicals, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls or in 1C350, containing a phosphorus atom to which is bonded one methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso) group but not further carbon atoms;

2.

N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] phosphoramidic dihalides, other than N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride which is specified in 1C350.57;

3.

Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] N,N-dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)]-phosphoramidates, other than Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate which is specified in 1C350;

4.

N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethyl-2-chlorides and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride or N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride which are specified in 1C350;

5.

N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-ols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethanol (CAS 96-80-0) and N,N-Diethylaminoethanol (100-37-8) which are specified in 1C350;

6.

N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-thiols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (CAS 5842-07-9) and N,N-Diisopropylaminoethanethiol hydrochloride (CAS 41480-75-5) which are specified in 1C350;

8.

Methyldiethanolamine (CAS 105-59-9).

Part 2 — Destinations

This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to the following destinations:

—

Argentina,

—

South Korea,

—

Turkey,

—

Ukraine.

Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use

1.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:

(i)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(ii)

for a military end-use as defined in point (b) of Article 4(1) of this Regulation where the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo; or

(iii)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State;

(b)

the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);

(c)

the exporter is aware that the items in question will be re-exported to any destination other than those listed in Part 2 of this Section or in Part 2 of Section A of this Annex and the Member States; or

(d)

the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.

2.

3.

Reporting requirements attached to the use of this authorisation and additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation shall be defined by Member States.

A Member State may require exporters resident or established in that Member State to register prior to the first use of this authorisation. Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter without delay and in any case within 10 working days of receipt, subject to Article 12(7) of this Regulation.

Where applicable, the requirements set out in the second and third subparagraphs shall be based on those defined for the use of national general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.

G. INTRA-GROUP EXPORT OF SOFTWARE AND TECHNOLOGY

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU007

(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)

Intra-group export of software and technology

Issuing authority: European Union

Part 1 – Items

This authorisation covers all technology and software specified in Annex I, except those listed in Section I of this Annex and technology and software related to items under 4A005, 4D004, 4E001.c, 5A001.f and 5A001.j.

Part 2 – Destinations

This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports of software and technology to the following destinations:

—

Argentina,

—

Brazil,

—

Chile,

—

India,

—

Indonesia,

—

Israel,

—

Jordan,

—

Malaysia,

—

Mexico,

—

Morocco,

—

Philippines,

—

Singapore,

—

South Africa,

—

South Korea,

—

Thailand,

—

Tunisia.

Part 3 – Conditions and requirements for use

1.

(a)

the parent company that directly controls the exporter and the entity ultimately controlling the exporter are resident or established in a Member State or in a country covered by Union general export authorisation No EU001; and

(b)

the parent company that directly controls the exporter provides a binding guarantee for the sister company’s compliance with the requirements of this authorisation; and

For the purpose of this authorisation, a parent company controls another company when it is capable of exercising decisive influence on it;

(c)

the exported software and technology will be exclusively used for the commercial product development activities of the exporter and the subsidiary or sister company respectively, and, in the case of employees, pursuant to the agreement establishing the employment relationship; and

(d)

the exported software and technology and any products resulting therefrom remain under the complete control of the exporter, or, for the purpose of fulfilling the requirements of this authorisation when the export is directed to a sister company, under the complete control of the parent company that directly controls the sister company and will not be shared with any other entity; and

(e)

the exported software and technology will be returned to the exporter and completely deleted by the subsidiary or sister company when the development activity has been completed or in the event that the subsidiary or sister company is acquired by any other entity. Any resulting developed technology will also be transmitted to the exporter and completely deleted by the subsidiary or sister company.

2.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is established that the software or technology in question is or may be intended, in its entirety or in part:

(i)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(ii)

for a military, paramilitary, police, intelligence, surveillance end-use or other security end-use by the government or by entities acting on behalf of the government;

(iii)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State; or

(iv)

for use in connection with a violation of human rights, democratic principles or the freedom of expression as defined by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union;

(b)

the exporter is aware that the software or technology in question is intended, in its entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);

(c)

the exporter is aware that the software or technology in question will be re-exported to any destination other than those listed in Part 2 of Section A of this Annex and the Member States; or

(d)

the exporter is aware that the consignee or end-user of the items in question is a military, paramilitary, police or intelligence service, or another governmental service for security, or that the items are intended for entities acting on behalf of any of the aforementioned services.

A Member State may adopt national legislation expanding points (b) and (c) to cover circumstances where the exporter has grounds for suspecting that the software or technology in question are intended for the uses referred to in point (b) or (c).

3.

4.

5.

Registration shall be automatic and acknowledged by the competent authority to the exporter within 10 working days of receipt.

6.

7.

(a)

the description of the software and technology;

(b)

where available, the quantity and the value of the software and technology;

(c)

the subsidiaries, sister companies and parent companies involved under this authorisation.

Additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation shall be defined by Member States.

H. ENCRYPTION

UNION GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU008

(referred to in point (d) of Article 12(1) of this Regulation)

Encryption

Issuing authority: European Union

Part 1 — Items

1.

—

5A002.a.2,

—

5A002.a.3,

—

5A002.b., only “cryptographic activation token” converting, by means of “cryptographic activation”, an item not specified in Category 5, Part 2, into an item specified in 5A002.a. as above or 5D002.c.1. as below, and not released by the Cryptography Note (Note 3 in Category 5, Part 2),

—

5D002.a.1., only “Software” specially designed or modified for the “use” of equipment specified in 5A002.a. as above or “software” specified in 5D002.c.1. as below,

—

5D002.b., “Software” having the characteristics of a “cryptographic activation token” specified in 5A002.b. as above,

—

5D002.c.1., only “Software” having the characteristics of, or performing or simulating the functions of equipment specified in 5A002.a. as above,

—

5E002.b., only “Technology” having the characteristics of a “cryptographic activation token” specified in 5A002.b. as above.

2.

(a)

the items use only published or commercial cryptographic standards that have been approved or adopted by internationally recognised standard bodies;

(b)

the items do not use cryptographic standards specially designed for government use (e.g. the cryptographic standards used in public safety radio systems, such as TETRA, TETRAPOL and P25); and

(c)

any cryptographic functionality used by the items cannot be easily changed by the user.

3.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established, or is otherwise aware (e.g. from information received from the manufacturer), that the items in question have been accredited or otherwise formally approved by the designated authority in a Member State (or are in the process of accreditation or other formal approval) to transmit, process or store classified information, equivalent to or above “RESTREINT UE/EU RESTRICTED”;

(b)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established, or is otherwise aware (e.g. from information received from the manufacturer), that the items in question have been classified by the designated authority in a Member State (or are in the process of classification) as having a protective national security classification marking, equivalent to or above “RESTREINT UE/EU RESTRICTED”.

Part 2 — Destinations

This authorisation is valid throughout the customs territory of the Union for exports to all destinations, excluding:

(a)

destinations eligible for export under Union general export authorisation No EU001;

(b)

Afghanistan, Armenia, Azerbaijan, Belarus, Cambodia, Central African Republic, China (including Hong Kong and Macao), Congo, Democratic Republic of the Congo, Egypt, Eritrea, Georgia, Iran, Iraq, Israel, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Lebanon, Libya, Malaysia, Mali, Mauritius, Mongolia, Myanmar/Burma, North Korea, Oman, Pakistan, Qatar, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Somalia, South Sudan, Sudan, Syria, Tajikistan, Turkmenistan, United Arab Emirates, Uzbekistan, Venezuela, Yemen, Zimbabwe;

(c)

any destination, other than those listed in point (b), subject to an arms embargo or subject to restrictive measures of the Union applicable to dual-use items.

Part 3 — Conditions and requirements for use

1.

(a)

the exporter has been informed by the competent authority of the Member State in which the exporter is resident or established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part:

(i)

for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices, or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons;

(ii)

for a military, paramilitary, police, intelligence, surveillance end-use, or other security end-use by the government or by entities acting on behalf of the government;

(iii)

for use as parts or components of military items listed in national military lists that have been exported from the territory of the Member State concerned without authorisation or in breach of an authorisation prescribed by the national legislation of that Member State; or

(iv)

for use in connection with a violation of human rights, democratic principles or the freedom of expression as defined by the Charter of Fundamental Rights of the European Union;

(b)

the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in point (a);

(c)

the exporter is aware that the items in question will be re-exported to any destination excluded by point (b) or (c) of Part 2 of this authorisation;

(d)

the relevant items are exported to a customs-free zone or a free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation;

(e)

the exporter is aware that the consignee or end-user of the items in question is a military, paramilitary, police or intelligence service, or another governmental service for security, or that the items are intended for entities acting on behalf of any of the aforementioned services; or

(f)

the export is controlled by virtue of any entry in Annex I not specified in this authorisation.

2.

3.

4.

5.

(a)

manufacturer;

(b)

product name;

(c)

model number;

(d)

item description - a brief general description of the item such as might be contained in a product brochure;

(e)

if necessary, as determined by the competent authority, technical specifications, which shall include:

(i)

a list of all relevant cryptographic algorithms, including associated key management, related to data confidentiality;

(ii)

a list of any protocols to which the item adheres;

(iii)

specification of pre- or post-processing of data, such as compression of plain text or packetizing of encrypted data;

(iv)

details of programming interfaces that can be used to gain access to the cryptographic functionality of the item;

(f)

export control classification.

6.

7.

(a)

export control classification of the dual-use items;

(b)

the quantity and the value of the dual-use items;

(c)

the name and address of the consignee;

(d)

where known, the end-use and end-user of the dual-use items;

(e)

a reference to the last submission of technical data for the dual-use items.

I. LIST REFERRED TO IN POINT (A) OF ARTICLE 12(6) OF THIS REGULATION AND SECTIONS A, C, D AND G OF THIS ANNEX

The entries do not always provide a complete description of the items and the related notes in Annex I. Only Annex I provides a complete description of the items.

The mention of an item in this Section does not affect the application of the General Software Note (GSN) set out in Annex I.

—

all items specified in Annex IV,

—

0C001 “Natural uranium” or “depleted uranium” or thorium in the form of metal, alloy, chemical compound or concentrate and any other material containing one or more of the foregoing,

—

0C002 “Special fissile materials” other than those specified in Annex IV,

—

0D001 “Software” specially designed or modified for the “development”, “production” or “…” of goods specified in Category 0, in so far as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV,

—

0E001 “Technology” in accordance with the Nuclear Technology Note for the “development”, “production” or “…” of goods specified in Category 0, in so far as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV,

—

1A102 Resaturated pyrolised carbon-carbon components designed for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104,

—

1C351 Human and animal pathogens and “toxins”,

—

1C353 Genetic elements and genetically modified organisms,

—

1C354 Plant pathogens,

—

1C450.a.1. Amiton: O,O-Diethyl S-[2-(diethylamino)ethyl] phosphorothiolate (78-53-5) and corresponding alkylated or protonated salts,

—

1C450.a.2. PFIB: 1,1,3,3,3-Pentafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-1-propene (382-21-8),

—

7E104 “Technology” for the integration of flight control, guidance and propulsion data into a flight management system for optimisation of rocket system trajectory,

—

9A009.a. Hybrid rocket propulsion systems with total impulse capacity exceeding 1.1 MNs,

—

9A117 Staging mechanisms, separation mechanisms and interstages usable in “missiles”.

( 1 ) Agreement on the withdrawal of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland from the European Union and the European Atomic Energy Community ( OJ L 29, 31.1.2020, p. 7 ).

ANNEX III

MODELS FOR AUTHORISATION FORMS

A. Model for individual or global export authorisation forms

(referred to in Article 12(2) of this Regulation)

When granting the export authorisations, Member States will strive to ensure the visibility of the nature of the authorisation (individual or global) on the form issued.

This export authorisation is valid in all Member States of the European Union until its expiry date.

EUROPEAN UNION

EXPORT OF DUAL-USE ITEMS (Reg. (EU) 2021/821)

1

1.

Exporter

No

2.

Identification number

3.

Expiry date (if applicable)

LICENCE

4.

Contact point details

5.

Consignee

6.

Issuing authority

7.

Agent/Representative (if different from exporter)

No

8.

Country of consignment

Code

9.

End-user (if different from consignee)

10.

Member State of current or future location of the items

Code

11.

Member State of intended entry into the customs export procedure

Code

1

12.

Country of final destination

Code

13.

Description of the items ( 1 )

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Harmonised System or Combined Nomenclature Code (if applicable with 8 digit; CAS number if available)

16.

Control list No (for listed items)

17.

Currency and Value

18.

Quantity of the items

19.

End-use

20.

Contract date (if applicable)

21.

Customs export procedure

22.

Additional information required by national legislation (to be specified on the form)

Available for pre-printed information

At discretion of Member States

For completion by issuing authority

Signature

Issuing Authority

Stamp

Date

1 Bis

1.

Exporter

2.

Identification number

LICENCE

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code (if applicable with 8 digit; CAS number if available)

16.

Control list No (for listed items)

17.

Currency and Value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code (if applicable with 8 digit; CAS number if available)

16.

Control list No (for listed items)

17.

Currency and Value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code

16.

Control list No

17.

Currency and value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code

16.

Control list No

17.

Currency and value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code

16.

Control list No

17.

Currency and value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code

16.

Control list No

17.

Currency and value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code

16.

Control list No

17.

Currency and value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code

16.

Control list No

17.

Currency and value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code

16.

Control list No

17.

Currency and value

18.

Quantity of the items

13.

Description of the items

14.

Country of origin

Code 2

15.

Commodity code

16.

Control list No

17.

Currency and value

18.

Quantity of the items

Note: In part 1 of column 24, write the quantity still available and in part 2 of column 24, write the quantity deducted on this occasion.

23.

Net quantity/value (Net mass/other unit with indication of unit)

26.

Customs document (Type and number) or extract (No) and date of deduction

27.

Member state, name and signature, stamp of deduction

24.

In numbers

25.

In words for quantity/value deducted

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

2.

1.

2.

B. Model for brokering services / technical assistance authorisation forms

(referred to in Article 13(5) of this Regulation)

EUROPEAN UNION

PROVISION OF BROKERING SERVICES / TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE (Reg. (EU) 2021/821)

1

1.

Broker/ Provider of technical assistance/ Applicant

No

2.

Identification number

3.

Expiry date

(if applicable)

LICENCE

4.

Contact point details

5.

Exporter in originating third country (if applicable)

6.

Issuing authority

7.

Consignee

No

8.

Member State in which the broker / provider of technical assistance is resident or established

Code ( 2 )

9.

Originating country/ Country of location of the items subject of brokering services

Code ( 2 )

10.

End-user in third country of destination (if different from consignee)

11.

Country of destination

Code ( 2 )

12.

Third parties involved, e.g. agents (if applicable)

1

13.

Description of the items / technical assistance.

14.

Harmonised System or Combined Nomenclature Code (if applicable)

15.

Control list No (if applicable)

16.

Currency and Value

17.

Quantity of the items (if applicable)

18.

End-use

19.

Additional information required by national legislation (to be specified on the form)

Available for pre-printed information

At discretion of Member States

For completion by issuing authority

Signature

Issuing Authority

Stamp

Date

C. Common elements for publication of national general export authorisations in national Official Journals

(referred to in point (b) of Article 12(6) of this Regulation)

1.

2.

3.

‘This is a national general export authorisation under the terms of Article 12(6) of Regulation (EU) 2021/821. This authorisation, in accordance with Article 12(6) of that Regulation, is valid in all Member States of the European Union.’

Validity: according to national practices.

4.

‘This export authorisation covers the following items’

5.

‘This export authorisation is valid for exports to the following destinations’

6.

( 1 ) If needed, this description may be given in one or more attachments to this form (1bis). In this case, indicate the exact number of attachments in this box. The description should be as precise as possible and integrate, where relevant, the CAS or other references for chemical items in particular.

( 2 ) See Regulation (EC) No 1172/95 ( OJ L 118, 25.5.1995, p. 10 ).

ANNEX IV

LIST OF DUAL-USE ITEMS REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 11(1) OF THIS REGULATION

The entries do not always cover the complete description of the item and the related notes in Annex I ( 1 ) . Only Annex I provides for the complete description of the items.

The mention of an item in this Annex does not affect the application of the provisions concerning mass-market products in Annex I.

The terms appearing in straight double quotes are defined terms in the global definitions list of Annex I.

PART I

(possibility of National General Authorisation for intra-Union trade)

Items of stealth technology

1C001

Materials specially designed for absorbing electromagnetic radiations, or intrinsically conductive polymers.

N.B. SEE ALSO 1C101

1C101

Materials and devices for reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures, other than those specified in 1C001, usable in ‘missiles’, "missile" subsystems or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012.

Note: 1C101 does not control materials if such goods are formulated solely for civil applications.

Technical Note:

In 1C101 ‘missiles’ means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

1D103

"Software" specially designed for analysis of reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures.

1E101

"Technology" according to the GTN for the "use" of goods specified in 1C101 or 1D103.

1E102

"Technology" according to the GTN for the "development" of "software" specified in 1D103.

6B008

Pulse radar cross-section measurement systems having transmit pulse widths of 100 ns or less and specially designed components therefor.

N.B . SEE ALSO 6B108

6B108

Systems specially designed for radar cross section measurement usable for ‘missiles’ and their subsystems.

Technical Note:

In 6B108 ‘missile’ means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

Items of the Union strategic control

1A007

Equipment and devices, specially designed to initiate charges and devices containing "energetic materials", by electrical means, as follows:

N.B . SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS, 3A229 AND 3A232.

a.

Explosive detonator firing sets designed to drive multiple controlled detonators specified in 1A007.b. below;

b.

Electrically driven explosive detonators as follows:

1.

Exploding bridge (EB);

2.

Exploding bridge wire (EBW);

3.

Slapper;

4.

Exploding foil initiators (EFI).

Note: 1A007.b. does not control detonators using only primary explosives, such as lead azide.

1C239

High explosives, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls, or substances or mixtures containing more than 2% by weight thereof, with a crystal density greater than 1,8 g/cm3 and having a detonation velocity greater than 8 000 m/s.

1E201

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of goods specified in 1C239.

3A229

High-current pulse generators, as follows ...

N.B. SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS

3A232

Multipoint initiation systems, other than those specified in 1A007 above, as follows ...

N.B. SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS

3E201

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 3A229 or 3A232.

6A001

Acoustics, limited to the following:

6A001.a.1.b.

Object detection or location systems, having any of the following:

1.

A transmitting frequency below 5 kHz;

6.

Designed to withstand …;

6A001.a.2.a.2.

Hydrophones … Incorporating …

6A001.a.2.a.3.

Hydrophones … Having any …

6A001.a.2.a.6.

Hydrophones … Designed for …

6A001.a.2.b.

Towed acoustic hydrophone arrays …

6A001.a.2.c.

Processing equipment, specially designed for real time application with towed acoustic hydrophone arrays, having "user-accessible programmability" and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;

6A001.a.2.e.

Bottom or bay-cable hydrophone arrays, having any of the following:

1.

Incorporating hydrophones …, or

2.

Incorporating multiplexed hydrophone group signal modules …;

6A001.a.2.f.

Processing equipment, specially designed for real time application with bottom or bay cable systems, having "user-accessible programmability" and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;

6D003.a.

"Software" for the "real-time processing" of acoustic data;

8A002.o.3.

Noise reduction systems designed for use on vessels of 1 000 tonnes displacement or more, as follows:

b.

‘Active noise reduction or cancellation systems’, or magnetic bearings, specially designed for power transmission systems, and incorporating electronic control systems capable of actively reducing equipment vibration by the generation of anti-noise or anti-vibration signals directly to the source;

Technical Note:

‘Active noise reduction or cancellation systems’ incorporate electronic control systems capable of actively reducing equipment vibration by the generation of anti-noise or anti-vibration signals directly to the source.

8E002.a.

"Technology" for the "development", "production", repair, overhaul or refurbishing (re-machining) of propellers specially designed for underwater noise reduction.

Items of the Union strategic control— Cryptanalysis — Category 5, Part 2

5A004.a.

Equipment designed or modified to perform ‘cryptanalytic functions’.

Note : 5A004.a. includes systems or equipment, designed or modified to perform ‘cryptanalytic functions’ by means of reverse engineering.

Technical Note:

‘Cryptanalytic functions’ are functions designed to defeat cryptographic mechanisms in order to derive confidential variables or sensitive data, including clear text, passwords or cryptographic keys.

5D002.a.

"Software" specially designed or modified for the "development", "production" or "use" of any of the following:

3.

Equipment as follows:

a.

Equipment specified in 5A004.a.;

b.

Equipment specified in 5A004.b.;

5D002.c.

"Software" having the characteristics of, or performing or simulating the functions of, any of the following:

3.

Equipment as follows:

a.

Equipment specified in 5A004.a.;

b.

Equipment specified in 5A004.b.;

5E002.a.

Only "technology" for the "development", "production" or "use" of the goods specified in 5A004.a, 5D002.a.3. or 5D002.c.3. above.

Items of the MTCR technology

7A117

"Guidance sets", usable in "missiles" capable of achieving system accuracy of 3,33% or less of the range (e.g., a ‘CEP’ of 10 km or less at a range of 300 km), except "guidance sets" designed for missiles with a range under 300 km or manned aircraft.

Technical Note:

In 7A117 ‘CEP’ (Circular Error Probable or Circle of Equal Probability) is a measure of accuracy, defined as the radius of the circle centred at the target, at a specific range, in which 50% of the payloads impact.

7B001

Test, calibration or alignment equipment specially designed for equipment specified in 7A117 above .

Note: 7B001 does not control test, calibration or alignment equipment for ‘Maintenance Level I’ or ‘Maintenance Level II’.

7B003

Equipment specially designed for the "production" of equipment specified in 7A117 above.

7B103

"Production facilities" specially designed for equipment specified in 7A117 above.

7D101

"Software" specially designed for the "use" of equipment specified in 7B003 or 7B103 above.

7E001

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of equipment or "software" specified in 7A117, 7B003, 7B103 or 7D101 above.

7E002

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of equipment specified in 7A117, 7B003 and 7B103 above.

7E101

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 7A117, 7B003, 7B103 and 7D101 above .

9A004

Space launch vehicles capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km .

N.B. SEE ALSO 9A104.

Note 1: 9A004 does not control payloads.

9A005

Liquid rocket propulsion systems containing any of the systems or components specified in 9A006 usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below.

N.B. SEE ALSO 9A105 and 9A119.

9A007.a.

Solid rocket propulsion systems, usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below, with any of the following:

N.B. SEE ALSO 9A119.

a.

Total impulse capacity exceeding 1,1 MNs;

9A008.d.

Components, as follows, specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems:

N.B. SEE ALSO 9A108.c.

d.

Movable nozzle or secondary fluid injection thrust vector control systems, usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below, capable of any of the following:

1.

Omni-axial movement exceeding ± 5°;

2.

Angular vector rotations of 20°/s or more; or

3.

Angular vector accelerations of 40°/s2 or more.

9A104

Sounding rockets, capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km.

N.B. SEE ALSO 9A004.

9A105.a.

Liquid propellant rocket engines, as follows:

N.B. SEE ALSO 9A119.

a.

Liquid propellant rocket engines usable in ‘missiles’, other than those specified in 9A005, integrated, or designed or modified to be integrated, into a liquid propellant propulsion system which has a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 1,1 MNs having a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 1,1 MNs; except liquid propellant apogee engines designed or modified for satellite applications and having all of the following:

1.

nozzle throat diameter of 20 mm or less; and

2.

2. combustion chamber pressure of 15 bar or less.

9A106.c.

Systems or components, other than those specified in 9A006, usable in "missiles" , as follows, specially designed for liquid rocket propulsion systems:

c.

Thrust vector control sub-systems, except those designed for rocket systems that are not capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km.

Technical Note:

Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A106.c. are:

1.

Flexible nozzle;

2.

Fluid or secondary gas injection;

3.

Movable engine or nozzle;

4.

Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or

5.

Thrust tabs.

9A108.c.

Components, other than those specified in 9A008, usable in ‘missiles’ as follows, specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems:

c.

Thrust vector control sub-systems, except those designed for rocket systems that are not capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km.

Technical Note:

Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A108.c. are:

1.

Flexible nozzle;

2.

Fluid or secondary gas injection;

3.

Movable engine or nozzle;

4.

Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or

5.

Thrust tabs.

9A116

Reentry vehicles, usable in "missiles", and equipment designed or modified therefor, as follows, except for reentry vehicles designed for non-weapon payloads:

a.

Reentry vehicles;

b.

Heat shields and components therefor fabricated of ceramic or ablative materials;

c.

Heat sinks and components therefor fabricated of light-weight, high heat capacity materials;

d.

Electronic equipment specially designed for reentry vehicles.

9A119

Individual rocket stages, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A005 or 9A007.a. above

9B115

Specially designed "production equipment" for the systems, sub-systems and components specified in 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119 above.

9B116

Specially designed "production facilities" for the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, or systems, sub-systems, and components specified in 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119 above.

9D101

"Software" specially designed for the "use" of goods specified in 9B116 above .

9E001

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" of equipment or "software" specified in 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9B115, 9B116 or 9D101 above.

9E002

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "production" of equipment specified in 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9B115 or 9B116 above .

Note: For "technology" for the repair of controlled structures, laminates or materials, see 1E002.f.

9E101

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of goods specified in 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119 above .

9E102

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116, 9A119, 9B115, 9B116 or 9D101 above .

Exemptions:

Annex IV does not control the following items of the MTCR technology:

1.

that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed by the European Space Agency (ESA) or that are transferred by ESA to accomplish its official tasks;

2.

that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed by a Member State's national space organisation or that are transferred by it to accomplish its official tasks;

3.

that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed in connection with a Union space launch development and production programme signed by two or more European governments;

4.

that are transferred to a State-controlled space launching site in the territory of a Member State, unless that Member State controls such transfers within the terms of this Regulation.

PART II

(NO NATIONAL GENERAL AUTHORISATION FOR INTRA-UNION TRADE)

Items of the CWC (Chemical Weapons Convention)

1C351.d.4.

Ricin

1C351.d.5.

Saxitoxin

Items of the NSG technology

All Category 0 of Annex I is included in Annex IV, subject to the following:

0C001: this item is not included in Annex IV;

—

0C002: this item is not included in Annex IV, with the exception of "special fissile materials" as follows:

(a)

separated plutonium;

(b)

"uranium enriched in the isotopes 235 or 233" to more than 20%.

—

0C003 only if for use in a "nuclear reactor" (within 0A001.a.);

—

0D001 ("software") is included in Annex IV except insofar as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV;

—

0E001 ("technology") is included in Annex IV except insofar as these related to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV.

1B226

Electromagnetic isotope separators designed for, or equipped with, single or multiple ion sources capable of providing a total ion beam current of 50 mA or greater.

Note: 1B226 includes separators:

a.

Capable of enriching stable isotopes;

b.

With the ion sources and collectors both in the magnetic field and those configurations in which they are external to the field.

1B231

Tritium facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows:

a.

Facilities or plants for the production, recovery, extraction, concentration, or handling of tritium;

b.

Equipment for tritium facilities or plants, as follows:

1.

Hydrogen or helium refrigeration units capable of cooling to 23 K (– 250°C) or less, with heat removal capacity greater than 150 W;

2.

Hydrogen isotope storage or hydrogen isotope purification systems using metal hydrides as the storage or purification medium.

1B233

Lithium isotope separation facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows:

a.

Facilities or plants for the separation of lithium isotopes;

b.

Equipment for the separation of lithium isotopes, as follows:

1.

Packed liquid-liquid exchange columns specially designed for lithium amalgams;

2.

Mercury or lithium amalgam pumps;

3.

Lithium amalgam electrolysis cells;

4.

Evaporators for concentrated lithium hydroxide solution.

1C012

Materials as follows:

Technical Note:

These materials are typically used for nuclear heat sources.

b.

"Previously separated" neptunium-237 in any form.

Note : 1C012.b. does not control shipments with a neptunium-237 content of 1 g or less.

1C233

Lithium enriched in the lithium-6 (6Li) isotope to greater than its natural isotopic abundance, and products or devices containing enriched lithium, as follows: elemental lithium, alloys, compounds, mixtures containing lithium, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C233 does not control thermoluminescent dosimeters.

Technical Note:

The natural isotopic abundance of lithium-6 is approximately 6,5 weight per cent (7,5 atom per cent).

1C235

Tritium, tritium compounds, mixtures containing tritium in which the ratio of tritium to hydrogen atoms exceeds 1 part in 1 000 , and products or devices containing any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C235 does not control a product or device containing less than 1,48 × 103 GBq (40 Ci) of tritium.

1E001

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "development" or "production" of equipment or materials specified in 1C012.b.

1E201

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of goods specified in 1B226, 1B231, 1B233, 1C233 or 1C235.

3A228

Switching devices, as follows:

a.

Cold-cathode tubes, whether gas filled or not, operating similarly to a spark gap, having all of the following characteristics:

1.

Containing three or more electrodes;

2.

Anode peak voltage rating of 2,5 kV or more;

3.

Anode peak current rating of 100 A or more; and

4.

Anode delay time of 10 μs or less;

Note: 3A228 includes gas krytron tubes and vacuum sprytron tubes.

b.

Triggered spark-gaps having both of the following characteristics:

1.

An anode delay time of 15 μs or less; and

2.

Rated for a peak current of 500 A or more;

3A231

Neutron generator systems, including tubes, having both of the following characteristics:

a.

Designed for operation without an external vacuum system; and

b.

Utilizing electrostatic acceleration to induce a tritium-deuterium nuclear reaction.

3E201

"Technology" according to the General Technology Note for the "use" of equipment specified in 3A228 or 3A231 above.

6A203

Cameras and components, other than those specified in 6A003, as follows:

a.

Mechanical rotating mirror streak cameras, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

Streak cameras with writing speeds greater than 0,5 mm per microsecond;

b.

Mechanical rotating mirror framing cameras, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

1.

Framing cameras with recording rates greater than 225 000 frames per second;

Note: In 6A203.a. components of such cameras include their synchronising electronics units and rotor assemblies consisting of turbines, mirrors and bearings.

6A225

Velocity interferometers for measuring velocities exceeding 1 km/s during time intervals of less than 10 microseconds.

Note: 6A225 includes velocity interferometers such as VISARs (Velocity interferometer systems for any reflector) and DLIs (Doppler laser interferometers).

6A226

Pressure sensors, as follows:

a.

Shock pressure gauges capable of measuring pressures greater than 10 GPa, including gauges made with manganin, ytterbium, and polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) / polyvinyl difluoride (PVF2);

b.

Quartz pressure transducers for pressures greater than 10 GPa.

( 1 ) The differences in the wordings/scopes between Annex I and Annex IV are indicated with bold italic text.

ANNEX V

REPEALED REGULATION WITH LIST OF THE SUCCESSIVE AMENDMENTS THERETO

Council Regulation (EC) No 428/2009 ( OJ L 134, 29.5.2009, p. 1 )

Regulation (EU) No 1232/2011 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( OJ L 326, 8.12.2011, p. 26 )

Regulation (EU) No 388/2012 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( OJ L 129, 16.5.2012, p. 12 )

Regulation (EU) No 599/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( OJ L 173, 12.6.2014, p. 79 )

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) No 1382/2014 ( OJ L 371, 30.12.2014, p. 1 )

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/2420 ( OJ L 340, 24.12.2015, p. 1 )

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/1969 ( OJ L 307, 15.11.2016, p. 1 )

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2017/2268 ( OJ L 334, 15.12.2017, p. 1 )

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2018/1922 ( OJ L 319, 14.12.2018, p. 1 )

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2019/2199 ( OJ L 338, 30.12.2019, p. 1 )

Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2020/1749 ( OJ L 421, 14.12.2020, p. 1 )

Regulation (EU) 2020/2171 of the European Parliament and of the Council ( OJ L 432, 21.12.2020, p. 4 )

ANNEX VI

CORRELATION TABLE

Regulation (EC) No 428/2009

This Regulation

Article 1

Article 2, introductory wording

Article 2, point 1

Article 2, point (1)

Article 2, point 2, introductory wording

Article 2, point (2), introductory wording

Article 2, point 2,(i) and (ii)

Article 2, point (2)(a) and (b)

-

Article 2, point (2)(c)

Article 2, point 2,(iii)

Article 2, point (2)(d)

Article 2, point 3, first subparagraph, introductory wording

Article 2, point (3), first subparagraph, introductory wording

Article 2, point 3, first subparagraph, point (i)

Article 2, point (3), first subparagraph, point (a)

Article 2, point 3, first subparagraph, point (ii)

Article 2, point (3), first subparagraph, point (b)

Article 2, point 3, second subparagraph

Article 2, point (3), point (c)

-

Article 2, point (3), point (d)

Article 2, point 4

Article 2, point (4)

-

Article 2, point (5)

-

Article 2, point (6)

Article 2, point 5, first subparagraph, introductory wording

Article 2, point (7), first subparagraph, introductory wording

Article 2, point 5, first subparagraph, first indent

Article 2, point (7)

Article 2, point 5, first subparagraph, second indent

Article 2, point (7)

Article 2, point 5, second subparagraph

Article 2, point (7)

Article 2, point 6

Article 2, point (8)

-

Article 2, point (9) and (10)

Article 2, point 7

Article 2, point (11)

Article 2, point 8

Article 2, point (12)

Article 2, point 9

Article 2, point (15)

Article 2, point 10

Article 2, point (13)

-

Article 2, point (14)

Article 2, point 11

Article 2, point (16)

Article 2, point 12

Article 2, point (17)

Article 2, point 13

Article 2, point (18)

-

Article 2, point (19)

-

Article 2, point (20)

-

Article 2, point (21) and (22)

Article 3

Article 4(1)

Article 4(1), introductory wording and point (a)

Article 4(2), first sentence

Article 2 (19) and 4(1)(b)

Article 4(2),second sentence

Article 4(1)(b), introductory wording

Article 4(2), points (a), (b) and (c)

Article 4(1), point (b) (i), (ii) and (iii)

Article 4(3)

Article 4(1), point (c)

Article 4(4)

Article 4(2)

Article 4(5)

Article 4(3)

Article 4(6)

Article 4(4) and (5)

Article 4(7)

Article 4(6)

-

Article 4(7)

Article 4(8)

-

Article 5

Article 5(1), first sentence

Article 6(1)

Article 5(1), second sentence

Article 6(2)

Article 5(2), (3) and (4)

Article 6(3), (4) and (5)

Article 6(1), first sentence

Article 7(1)

Article 6(1), second sentence

-

Article 6(2), first sentence

Article 7(2), first sentence

-

Article 7(2), second sentence

Article 6(3)

Article 7(3)

Article 6(4)

Article 7(4)

Article 7

-

Article 8

Article 9

-

Article 10

Article 9(1), first subparagraph

Article 12(1), point (d)

Article 9(1), second and third subparagraphs

Article 12(7)

Article 9(1), fourth and fifth subparagraphs

Articles 17 and 19

Article 9(2), first subparagraph

Article 12(1), points (a) to (c), and Article 12(2), first subparagraph

Article 9(2), second subparagraph

Article 12(1), second subparagraph

-

Article 12(2), second subparagraph

-

Article 12(3)

Article 9(2), third subparagraph

Article 12(4), first and second subparagraphs

-

Article 12(4), third subparagraph

Article 9(3)

Article 12(5)

Article 9(4)

Article 12(6)

Article 9(5)

-

Article 9(6)

Article 12(6), fourth subparagraph, and Article 23(1)

Article 10(1), extended to technical assistance

Article 13(1), first subparagraph, and Article 13(2)

-

Article 13(1), second subparagraph

Article 10(2)

Article 13(3)

Article 10(3)

Article 13(4)

Article 11

Article 14

Article 12(1)

Article 15(1)

Article 12(2)

-

Article 15(2)

Article 13

Article 16

Article 14(1)

Article 12(2), third subparagraph, and Article 13(5), extended to technical assistance

Article 14(2)

Article 12(4), fourth subparagraph

Article 15(1)

Article 17(1), point (a)

Article 15(2)

Article 20

Article 15(3)

Article 17(1), introductory wording and point (b)

-

Article 17(2)

Article 16

Article 21

Article 17

Article 22

Article 18

-

Article 19(1)

-

Article 19(1), introductory wording

Article 23(2), introductory wording

-

Article 23(2), point (a)

-

Article 23 (2), point (b)

-

Article 23 (2), point (c)

Article 19(2), point (a)

Article 23(2), point (d)

Article 19(2), point (b)

Article 23(2), point (e)

-

Article 23 (3)

-

Article 23 (4)

Article 19(3)

Article 23 (5)

Article 19(4)

Article 23(6)

Article 19(5)

Article 26(1), second sentence

Article 19(6)

Article 23(7)

Article 20(1) to (3)

Article 27(1) to (3)

Article 21

Article 28

Article 22(1) and (2)

Article 11(1) and (2)

Article 22(3) and (4)

Article 11(3) and (4)

Article 22(5) to (7)

Article 11(5) to (7)

Article 22(8)

Article 27(4)

Article 22(9) and (10)

Article 11(8) and (9)

Article 23(1) and (2)

Article 24(1) and (2)

-

Article 24(3)

-

Article 24 (4)

Article 23(3)

Article 26(2)

-

Article 26(3)

-

Article 26 (4)

Article 23a(1)

Article 18(1)

Article 23a(2) and (3)

Article 18(2) and (3)

-

Article 18(4)

Article 23a(4) and (5)

Article 18(5) and (6)

Article 23b

Article 19

Article 24

Article 25(1)

-

Article 25(2)

Article 25(1)

Article 23(1), first and second subparagraphs

Article 25(2) and (3)

-

Article 25(4)

Article 26(2)

-

Article 29(1)

Article 25a

Article 29(2)

Article 26

-

Article 30

Article 27

Article 31

Article 28

Article 32

Annex I

-

Annex I

Annex IIa

Annex II, Section A

Annex IIb

Annex II, Section B

Annex IIc

Annex II, Section C

Annex IId

Annex II, Section D

Annex IIe

Annex II, Section E

Annex IIf

Annex II, Section F

-

Annex II, Section G

-

Annex II, Section H

Annex IIg

Annex II, Section I

Annex IIIa

Annex III, Section A

Annex IIIb

Annex III, Section B

Annex IIIc

Annex III, Section C

Annex IV

Annex V

Annex VI

Menu

Regulation (EU) 2021/821 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 May 2021 setting up a Union regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items (recast)

Regulation (EU) 2021/821 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 20 May 2021 setting up a Union regime for the control of exports, brokering, technical assistance, transit and transfer of dual-use items (recast)

LEXI